Skip to main content

Full text of "Classified Catalogue Code Ed. 5th"

See other formats


Raivunthaa  Series  is  Libraiy  Science 

1 IM>rary  movement  in  India  by  P N Kauia 

2 Gassffied  eaudogue  code  by  S R Ranganathan 

3 LSurary  adnMstratUm  by  S R Ranganathan 

4 Cobm  elas^eatioH  by  S R Rangamrthan 

5 Sodat  xience  research  and  Ubrarks  by  S R Ranganathan  and 
Kumar 

6 Library  manual  by  S R Ranganathan 

7 Education  for  leisure  by  S R Ranganathan 

8 Elements  of  iStray  ciassifietukm  by  S R Ranganathan 

9 Beferenee  service  S R Ranganathan 

10  Doeumentatian  and  its  facets,  ed  by  S R Ranganathan 

11  Decimal  elassifieation  and  colon  dassihcation  in  oerspeetivp.  hy  R S Parirhi 

12  The  five  laws  of  library  scknce  by  S R Ranganathan 

13  PunaJhiiliQw  yi^yoR  Icf  Miontta  by  Umesh  Datta  Shantna 

14  Ubray  science  today:  Ranganathan  Festschrift  Volume  l~Essaysand 
felicitations  offered  to  S It  Eanganathan  on  his  seventy^st  birthday, 
ed  by  P N Kauia  (In  Press) 

15  An  essay  in  personal  bibliognphy : Ranganathan  Festschrift  Volume  11-' 
Bibliography  of  the  writings  on  aid  by  Dr  S R Rai^anathan,  ooiiq>i]ed 
by  A K Das  Gupta  (In  Press) 

16  LUwary  book  selection  by  S R Ranganathan 

17  Library  manual  (Translation  into  Hindi  by  P N Kauia) 

Some  other  books  by  the  author 

Anuvaga-sudii-kalpa 

Classification  and  communication 

Depth  classification 

Granthoradhyayanatluhkai 

Granthalaya-prtdcriya 

Heading  and  canons 

Library  development  plan 

Ubray  legislation 

Literature  fa  neoliterates 

Organization  of  libraies 

PMosopky  of  Ubray  classification 

PidtUe  Wwary  provision  and  documentation  problems 

Rurtd  adult  education 

Social  bibUogrtgihy 

Social  education  literatae 

Union  catalogm  of  leaned  periodical  publietaitms  in  South  Ada 


CLASSIFIED 
CATALOGUE  CODE 

with  additional  rules  for 
Dictionary  Catalogue  Code 


o R RANGANATHAN 

Assisted  by 
A NEELAMEGHAN 

Documentation  Research  and  Tndning  Centre 
Bangalore 


ASIA  PUBLISHING  HOUSE 
BCnCBAY  • CALCUTTA  • NEW  DQJBa  • MAtatAS 


Sbiyali  Ranuunrita  Ranganathan  <189^ 
Arashanapalai  Neeiamegfaan  (1927) 

SARADA  RANGANATHAN  ENDOWMENT 
FOR  LIBRARY  SCIENCE 


Edition 

1 

1934 

Edition 

2 

1945 

Edition 

a 

1951 

Edition 

4 

1958 

Edition 

5 

1960 

nONTED  IN  INI»A 

BY  S.  N.  aVHA  RAY  AT  SREE  SARASWATY  PRESS  1X0.,  32,  ACHARYA 
PRAFUIXA  OlANDRA  ROAD,  CAljCUTrA-9  AND  FCBUSHED 
BY  P.  S.  lAYASINOHE,  WBUSOOta  HOOSE,  BCBffiAY 


To  the  memory  of 

KRISHNASWAMY  RAO 
first  colleague  in  Cataloguing 


Ute  Five  Ltxws  of  Library  Science 

1 Books  are  for  use 

2 Every  Reader  his  book 

3 Every  book  its  reader 

4 Save  the  time  of  the  reader 

5 A library  is  a growins  organism 


CONUHTS 


Part  A 
IntrodoctieB 

Clug>  Pages 

AA  Genesis  17 

AB  Scientific  Method  20 

AC  Aid  to  Development  23 

AD  Successive  Editions  26 

AE  Conspectus  29 


Part  B 

Canons  of  Cataloguing 

BA  Definition  33 

BB  Canon  of  Ascertainability  34 

BC  Canon  of  Prepotence  36 

BD  Canon  of  Individualisation  40 

BE  Canon  of  Sought-Heading  44 

BF  Canon  of  Context  47 

BG  Canon  of  Pennanence  52 

BH  Canon  of  Currency  S3 

BJ  Canon  of  Consistence  54 


Part  C 

Goieral  Nonnative  Prind^es 

CA  Laws  of  Librafy  Science  57 

CB  Laws  of  Interpretation  59 


7 


CONTENTS 


Qtap  ' Pages 

CC  Law  of  Impartiality  61 

CD  Law  of  Symmetry  62 

CE  Law  of  Parsimony  63 

CF  Principle  of  Local  Variation  65 

CG  Principle  of  Osmosis  71 


Part  D 

Evolution  of  the  Catali^ne 

DA  Functions  of  the  Catalogue  77 

DB  Parts  of  the  Library  Catalogue  79 

DC  Right  Approach  81 

DD  Physical  Form  of  the  Library  Cata- 
logue 83 

DE  Centralised  Cataloguing  86 


Part  E 
Recording 

EA  Language  of  Entries  91 

EB  Script  of  Entries  93 

EC  Articles  and  Contractions  95 

ED  Style  of  Writing  97 

EE  Size  of  Book  105 

EF  Continued  Cards  107 

EG  Arrangement  of  Entries  in  Classified 

Part  108 

EH  Anangement  of  Efttries  in  Alpha- 
betical Part  1 10 


8 


CwmNTS 
Part  F 


TondBotosy 


Chap 

Pages 

FA 

Work 

117 

FB 

Title 

120 

FC 

Author 

123 

FD 

Collaborator  and  Sponsor 

131 

FE 

Document 

132 

FF 

Kinds  of  Documents 

134 

FG 

Preliminary  Pages 

140 

FH 

Scries 

141 

FJ 

Related  Documents 

144 

FK 

Edition 

146 

FL 

Cataloguer’s  Needs 

147 

FM 

Catalogue 

155 

FN 

Entry 

158 

FP 

Classified  Catalogue 

167 

FQ 

Sections  of  Entry 

169 

FR 

Heading 

171 

FZD 

Dictionary  Catalogue 

177 

Part  G 

Conflict  of  AnthorsUp 


GA 

Introduction 

181 

GB 

Person  vs  Person 

182 

GC 

Person  vs  Corporate  Body 

184 

GD 

Corporate  Body  vs  Corporate  Body 

187 

GE 

. Name  of  Original  Author  Merged  in 

Title 

193 

Part  H 

Name  of  Pmon 

HA 

Introduction 

205 

HB 

Terminology:  Simple  Name 

211 

9 


CONTENTS 


Chap 

Paga 

HC 

Terminology:  Compound  Name 

221 

HD 

Split  Given  Name 

226 

HE 

Forms  of  Name^f-Person 

230 

HF 

Arabic  Name 

233 

HO 

Illusion  and  Solution. 

236 

Part  J 

Renderii^  of  Nunes 


JA 

Personal  Name 

241 

JB 

Geographical  Name 

246 

JC 

Government 

251 

JD 

Institution 

259 

JE 

Conference 

263 

JF 

Title 

266 

JG 

Series 

271 

JH 

Pseudo  Series 

274 

Part  K 

Class  Index  Entry 


KA 

Terminology  of  Classification 

279 

KB 

Terminology  of  Chain  Procedure 

287 

KC 

Examples  of  Chain  and  link 

290 

KD 

Choice  of  Class  Indnc  Heading 

299 

KE 

Rendering  of  Class  Index  Heading 

302 

KF 

Class  Index  Entry 

305 

KG 

Exmples  of  Class  Index  Entries 

308 

KH 

Classic 

314 

KJ 

Commission  Report 

318 

KK 

Homonym  in  Gass  Index  Headings 

321 

KL 

Feature  Heading 

324 

KZD 

Modifications  for  Dictionary  Cata* 

logue 


‘10 


327 


OONXENIS 

Part  L 


Qross  Erfmiice  bdex  Entry 

Chap  Pages 

LA  Structure  and  Types  337 

LB  Alternative  Name  Entry  340 

LC  Variant-Form-of-Word  Entry  344 

LD  Pseudonym-Real'Name  Entry  346 

LE  Editor-of-Series  Entry  347 

LF  Generic-Name  Entry  349 


Part  M 

Single-Volumed  Simple  Book 

MA  Main  Entry:  Source  355 

MB  Main  Entry:  Sections  357 

MC  Main  Entry:  Leading  Section  360 

MD  Main  Entry:  Heading  361 

ME  Main  Entry:  Title  Section  369 

MF  Main  Entry:  Note  376 

MG  Main  Entry:  Accession  Number  392 

MH  Main  Entry:  Tracing  Section  393 

MJ  Cross  Reference  Entry  396 

MK  Book  Index  Entry  399 

< M23>  Dictionary  Catalogue  408 


Part  N 

Composite  Book  and  Midti-Volnmed  Book 

NA  Ordinary  Composite  Book  413 

NB  Artificial  Composite  Book  421 

NC  Multi-Volumed  Book  425 

11 


CONTENTS 

Part  P 

Pniodical  PnMicatioB 


Cht^ 

Pages 

PA 

Complexities 

433 

PB 

Simple  Periodical  Publication 

436 

PC 

, Irregularity  in  Volume-Number 

450 

PD 

Interrupted  Publication 

451 

PE 

Change  of  Title  and  Sponsor 

455 

PF 

Amalgamation 

460 

PG 

Splitting  Up 

465 

PH 

Supplement 

471 

PJ 

Combination  of  Complexities 

474 

PZD 

Dictionary  Catalogue 

479 

PZY 

Desiderata 

483 

Part  Q 

Uoion  Catalogue  of  Books 


QA 

Coverage 

489 

QB 

Modification  in  Cataloguing  Rules 

492 

QC 

Main  Entry 

494 

QD 

Library  Number 

496 

QE 

Card  for  Union  Catalogue 

499 

Part  R 

Union  Catalogue  of  Periodical  Publications 


RA 

Coverage 

503 

RB 

Users 

505 

RC 

Physical  Form 

507 

RD 

Main  Entry 

508 

RE 

Other  Entries 

511 

RF 

12 

Abbreviations 

512 

CONTENTS 


Chap. 

Pages 

RG 

Contractions  for  Words  Denoting 

‘Periodical  Publication’ 

515 

RH 

Contractions  of  Names  of  Subjects 

518 

RJ 

Contractions  of  Geographical  Names 

and  Names  of  Languages 

520 

RK 

Contractions  for  General  Words 

522 

RL 

T^pogfaphy 

525 

RM 

Lay  Out 

527 

RN 

Pagination  and  Inclusive  Captions 

530 

RP 

Card  Technique 

531 

Part  S 

Natioaal  Bibliogra^y 


SA 

Definition  of  the  National  Biblio- 

graphy 

535 

SB 

Value  and  its  Implications 

537 

SC 

Physical  Form 

539 

SD 

Modification  of  Cataloguing  Rules 

540 

SE 

Main  Entry 

542 

SF 

Other  Entries 

545 

SG 

Arrangement  of  Entries  in  Classified 

Part 

548 

SH 

Printed  Unit  Card 

550 

SJ 

Typography 

552 

SK 

Lay  Out 

555 

SL 

* Pagination  and  Inclusive  Captions 

559 

Part  T 

lodexii^  Periodical 

TA 

• 

Value  of  Indexing  Periodical 

563 

TB 

Coverage 

565 

13 


CONTENTS 


Cfuq> 

Pages 

TC 

Need  for  Modification  of  Cataloguing 

t 

Rules 

567 

TD 

Main  Entry 

569 

TE 

Other  Entries 

571 

TF 

Classified  Index 

573 

TG 

Typography 

574 

TH 

Lay  Out 

575 

TJ 

Pagination  and  Inclusive  Captions 

576 

Part  U 

Abstracting  Periodical 

UA 

Value  of  Abstracting  Periodical 

579 

UB 

Canons  for  Abstracting 

580 

UC 

Abstracting  Personnel 

583 

UD 

Modification  of  Cataloguing  Rules 

585 

UE 

Main  Entry 

586 

UF 

Examples 

587 

Part  V 

Incunabula  and  Non-Book  Materials 

VA 

Kinds  of  Documents  for  Considera- 

tion 

593 

Part  W 
End  Matter 


WA 

Glossary  of  Terms 

597 

WB 

Bibliographical  References 

608 

WC 

Index 

613 

14 

JPjIRT  a 


INTRODTJCXION 


CHAPTER  AA 


GENESIS 
1 Sense  of  Revolt 

The  Classilled  Catalogue  Code  owes  itself  to  the  sense  of  revolt' 
induced  in  the  mind  while  learning  cataloguing  in  1924-25,  in  the 
School  of  librarianship  of  the  University  College  in  London. 
The  first  cause  of  revolt  was  the  method  of  teaching  used. 
Each  rule  of  the  Anglo-American  Code  was  taken  by  itself,  to  be 
pot  into  rote-memory  as  it  were.  No  attempt  at  answering  the 
what,  the  why,  or  the  how  of  it.  No  attempt  to  present  the  rules 
as  a system.  No  attempt  at  studying  an  alternative  code  and 
comparing  their  relative  merits.  But  t^  is  necessary  to  sense  the 
theory  behind  the  practice.  The  second  cause  was  the  nature  of 
the  Code  taught.  It  was  the  Anglo-American  Code  [A3]  of  1 908. 
Its  skeleton  nature,  its  mixing  up  the  author  entry  and  the  subject 
entry,  lack  of  unity  in  many  of  its  rules — a serious  drawback  in  the 
drafting  of  a Code— all  these  added  to  the  result.  There  was 
also  a third  cause.  The  volumes  of  the  Classified  Catalogue  of 
the  Carnegie  Library  of  Pittsburgh  and  of  the  Mitchel  Library  of 
Glasgow  were  fascinating.  Copies  of  these  were  available  in  the 
library  of  the  School  of  Librarianship.  But  not  a word  was  said 
in  the  class  either  about  Classified  Catalogue  or  about  the  essential 
difference  between  it  and  Dictionary  Catalogue.  A fourth  cause 
came  out  of  the  discrepancy  between  the  rules  taught  in  the 
theory  class  and  those  prescribed  for  adoption  in  the  practical 
class.  Here  again,  nothing  was  said  or  done  to  satisfy  the  curio- 
sity of  students  about  this  difference.  Fifthly,  the  bibliographi- 
cal details  about  format,  collation  and  imprint  were  over-emphasi- 
sed in  the  practical  class.  The  revolt  made  one  say  within  onself, 
“When  I go  back  home ” 

2 Facility  for  Designing 

On  going  back  to  Madras,  facility  of  every  kind  was  found  to 
re-think  the  cataloguing  work. 


IW 


AA21  CLASSIFIED  CATALOGUE  CODE 

21  Freedom 

In  the  first  place,  there  was  full  freedom  to  do  one's  best  in 
re-organisation — open  access,  classification,  cataloguing,  re- 
ference service,  simplified  practice  in  administration,  staff 
selection,  public  relation,  in  fact  in  every  detail  in  the  running  of 
the  library  and  in  building  it  up. 

22  Need  for  Fresh  Catalogue 

Secondly,  the  annual  accession  soon  rose  from  500  to  6,000. 
Within  a year,  this  choked  the  paste-down  catalogue  in  book- 
form.  The  necessity  to  build  the  catalogue  afresh  provided  the 
opportunity  to  change  over  to  card  catalogue.  This  in  its  turn 
brought  in  the  opportunity  to  give  up  the  old  method  of  catalogu- 
ing, based  on  the  British  Museum  Code,  modified  arbitruily  here 
and  there.  The  working  out  of  a new  Code  was  taken  on  hand.  . 

23  Unconventionalised  Mind  of  Readers 

Thirdly,  much  time  was  spent  each  day  on  floor-duty,  observing 
the  classificatory  and  cataloguing  approach  of  readers  to  books. 
Their  approach  had  not  been  coloured  at  all  by  any  tradition,  as 
most  of  them  tasted  library  facility — and  open  access  in  particular 
— ^for  the  first  time  in  their  lives.  This  gave  as  good  an  approxi- 
mation as  possible  to  unconventionalised,  free,  natural  mental 
behaviour  on  the  part  of  readers. 

24  One  Mind  in  Three  Bodies 

Fourthly,  I was  fortunate  in  the  first  two  colleagues  selected  by 
me — C Sundararo  and  K M Sivaraman.  Both  were  young 
graduates  fresh  from  university.  Both  were  free  from  any  kind 
of  library  tradition  in  any  library  technique  whatever.  Both  had 
a participating  attitude.  Both  were  devoted  to  their  work.  Both 
were  industrious.  All  the  three  of  us  were  loyal  to  one  anoth^. 
In  fact,  we  three  worked  together  in  library  field,  as  if  it  were  a 
case  of  one  mind  in  three  bodies.  A quantum  of  Intuition  was 
bringing  out  the  Colon  Classificatiot>and  the  Classified  Catalogue 
Code.  Intellect  was  brought  into  play  once  a week  collectively 

cli 


GENESIS 


AA3 


in  all  the  three — ^to  discuss,  check  up,  and  polish  the  product  of 
intuition,  in  the  light  of  the  experience  gained  by  each  of  the 
three  during  the  hours  Of  floor-duty. 

25  Teaching  of  Cataloguing 

Fifthly,  a School  of  Library  Science  was  established  in  1929. 
Since  then,  the  author  had  been  teaching  cataloguing  every  year. 

26  Practice  of  Cataloguing 

Sixthly,  about  70,000  volumes  were  classified,  catalogued,  and 
served  during  the  seven  years  from  1926  to  1932.  During  the 
last  two  of  these  years  the  Colon  Classification  occupied  the 
conscious  level.  The  Classified  Catalogue  Code  was,  however, 
shaping  itself  unexpressed,  below  the  conscious  level,  except 
while  teaching  cataloguing,  till  1933  the  year  of  publication  of  the 
Colon  classification. 


3 First  Formulation 

After  the  Colon  classification  [CIO]  came  out,  the  catalogue- 
valve  between  the  conscious  and  the  sub-conscious  opened  out. 
The  simmering  of  the  Classified  Catalogue  Code  began  within  the 
mind.  I had  to  go  to  Calcutta.  It  was  a railway  journey  of  38 
hours.  I said  to  Sivaraman,  “Put  into  my  bag  plenty  of  5x3 
slips  and  a few  sharpened  pencils.’’  During  the  20  hows  of 
daylight  in  the  forward  journey  and  an  equal  extent  of  time  in  the 
return  journey,  the  rocking  of  the  train,  the  utter  absence  of 
distraction  by  any  printed  stuff,  and  the  solitude  in  the  railway 
compartment,  help^  concentration.  Un-interrupted  recording 
of  the  flow  of  the  rules  of  the  Classified  Catalogue  Code  was  the 
result.  Somek  of  the  rules  brought  their  commentaries  in  their 
train.  On  return  to  Madras,  these  were  intellectually  reviewed 
by  all  the  three  of  us.  These  were  checked  up  and  polished. 
Examples  were  provided.  The  press-copy  was  typed.  This 
was  the  developn^t  of  the  First  Formulation  of  this  Classified 
Catalogue  Code. 


49 


CHAPTER  AB 


SCIENimC  METHOD 
1 Endless  Spiral 

The  next  stage  in  the  development  of  the  Classified  Catalogue 
Code  was  conditioned  by  the  advent  of  scientific  method. 

In  scientific  method,  there  is  a never-ending  spiral : 

1 From  individual  experiences,  through  generalisation,  to 
empirical  laws  derived  from  them,  with  the  aid  of  induction  and 
normal  equations; 

2 Through  their  reduction  to  a few  normative  principles,  with 
the  aid  of  imagination  and/or  intuition; 

3 Through  deductive  laws  or  canons  derived  from  the  norma- 
tive principles  with  the  aid  of  methods  of  inference  and 
semantics; 

4 Through  fresh  individual  experiences  not  conforming  to 
them; 

5 Back  again  through  another  cycle;  and 

6 So  on,  without  end. 

2 Establishment  of  Cycle 

Such  a cycle  of  development  has  now  been  established  in 
cataloguing.  Therefore,  both  the  teaching  of  cataloguing  and  the 
framing  of  Catalogue  Code  can  have  the  benefit  of  normative 
principles.  New  types  qf  reading  materials,  apparently  trans- 
cending the  capacity  of  the  existing  rules  of  a ^talogue  Code, 
may  be  catalogued  by  a proper  interpretation  of  its  rules.  If 
this  is  not  adequate,  the  rules  can  be  amended  or  extended  with 
the  aid,  and  as  a necessary  implication,  of  the  normative 
principles.  When  the  cumulated  unconscious  shift  in  the  social 
purpose  of  the  library  calls  for  an  altogether  different  kind  of 
library  service,  organisation,  and  technique,  and  the  current  ones 
stand  abandoned  by  sheer  folk-force,  new  normative  principles 
should  replace  the  old  ones.  And  the  cycle  should  ^ started 
again  [RF9]. 


AB5 


SCIEminC  METHCO) 

3  Crftiad  study  of  Codes 

A critical  examination  of  a Catalogue  Code  can  be  made  with 
the  aid  of  the  normative  principles.  So  also  can  be  made  a com* 
parative  study  of  several  Catalogue  Codes.  Lastly,  any  Catalogue 
Code  can  be  rectified  in  their  light. 

4  Verbal  Apparatus 

The  success  of  critical  or  comparative  study  will  depend  on  the 
verbal  apparatus  used  to  express  thought  and  communicate  it. 
The  verbal  apparatus  should  not  create  “noise”  in  the  process  of 
communication.  It  should  not  do  so  even  in  self*communica- 
tion.  Grossly  disturbing  noise  is  usually  caused  by  the  presence 
of  homonyms  and  synonyms  in  the  verbal  apparatus.  Even 
more  dangerous  and  virus-like  is  the  subtle  difference  in  the  shade 
of  meaning  of  a word  or  phrase,  due  to  slight  shift  in  undertones 
and  overtones.  To  minimise  this,  we  should  begin  any  discipline 
with  the  establishment  of  a special,  agreed,  dry-as-dust  termino- 
logy without  even  the  slightest  touch  of  fuzziness.  But  such  a 
special  terminology  will  have  to  begin  with  some  undefined  terms. 
These  should  be  clearly  stated.  Again  the  meta-language  with 
which  we  handle  the  special  terminology  both  at  the  stage  of 
definition  and  at  the  later  stages  of  development  of  thought, 
should  be  closely  watched,  if  it  is  also  drawn  from  the  same 
natural  language  as  the  terminology  itself.  This  is  so  in  the 
discipline  of  cataloguing  to-day.  The  special  terminology  should 
become  spontaneous  and  instantaneous.  Its  use  should  be  as 
much  the  result  of  reflex  action  as  that  of  mother-tongue.  This 
is  an  essential  factor  in  scientific  method. 

5  First  Approximatimi 

The  first  application  of  such  a scientific  method  to  Cataloguing 
and  to  Catalogue  Code  was  made  in  1937.  Between  1934  and 
1937  some  of  the  rules  of  the  Classified  Catalogue  Code  came  up 
for  critical  examination  from  time  to  time,  both  in  class-room 
discussion,  and  in  staff-meetings  to  consider  problem-books  in 
cataloguing.  On  the  anvi],of  such  critical  discussions  and  as  a 
necessary  aid  to  them,  certain  normative  principles  of  cataloguing 


21 


AB5 


CLASSinB>  CATAUKJUB  CODE 


took  shape.  These  were  different  from  the  Five  Laws  of  Library 
Science.  Indeed,  they  were  all  implications  of  these  Laws. 
They  were  also  diiierent  from  the  normative  principles  common 
to  all  spheres  of  human  action  and  thought.  The  special  norma- 
tive prindples  were  called  Canons  of  Catdoguing.  These  were 
the  product  of  impersonal  intellectual  grind  during  the  prolonged 
earlier  stages,  and  of  imagination  with  a touch  of  intuition  at 
the  difficult  final  stage.  1 had  the  unusual  privilege  of  continu- 
ously subjecting  my  Classified  Catalogue  Code  and  the  other 
codes  to  a severe  semantic  analysis  and  check-up  in  the  pure 
intellectual  plane — ^in  the  class-room  and  in  staff-meetings.  This 
helped  the  formulation  of  the  Canons;  and  it  also  led  eventually 
to  the  setting  up  of  the  scientific  method  in  the  Discipline  of 
Cataloguing.  The  experience  of  this  first  attempt  was  recorded 
in  Theory  of  library  catalogue  [RTl]  in  1937. 


CHAPTER  AC 


AID  TO  DEVELOPMENT 
1 ComparatiTe  Study  1 

It  was  late  in  1937.  The  press-copy  of  the  Theory  was  lying 
on  the  table.  T o write  or  not  to  write  to  the  Vice-Chancellor  for 
formal  permission  to  print  it — that  was  the  question.  A sullen 
mood  for  total  withdrawal  from  intellectual  work  and  retirement 
from  office  was  undermining  enthusiasm  and  zest.  Natesa 
Ananda,  a spiritual  friend,  took  me  for  an  all-night  vigil.  He 
counselled  persistence  in  the  work  on  hand.  A new  spiritual  guide 
appeared  suddenly.  He  was  Purohit  Swami.  He  had  considera- 
ble experience  both  before  and  after  enlightenment  He  had  just 
then  returned  from  Ireland  after  spending  some  years  with  W B 
Yeats.  He  administered  a genial  warning.  He  said,  “Salvation 
can  come  only  by  dogged  pursuit  of  the  allotted  work  in  society, 
with  neither  emotional  attachment  nor  revulsion.”  This  correc- 
tive was  working  in  the  mental  plane  for  about  twenty-four  hours. 
Then  came  suddenly  a physical  aid  in  the  form  of  a postal  packet. 
It  contained  a mimeographed  copy  of  the  draft  of  the  Rules  for 
the  preliminary  second  edition  of  the  Anglo-American  Code, 
Along  with  it  came  also  a letter  from  Rudolph  Qjelsness,  chair- 
man and  editor-in-chief  of  the  Catalogue  Revision  Committee 
of  the  American  Library  Association.  He  asked  for  comments 
on  the  Draft  Rules.  A few  hours  were  turned  on  them  during 
night.  Many  inconsistencies  were  seen.  Some  faults  were 
detected.  But  there  was  no  agreed  Terminology  or  Canons  of 
Cataloguing,  in  terms  of  which  the  comments  could  be  put  across 
to  a far-off  cbcrespondent  precisely  and  briefly  through  a letter. 
The  new  Canons  came  in  handy  to  make  a comparative  study  of 
the  draft  of  the  second  edition  of  the  Anglo-American  Code  and 
the  Classified  Catalogue  Code.  These  events,  the  close  sequence 
of  them,  and  the  advice  from  spiritual  friends  at  the  nick 
of  time  led  to  a decision  to  publish  the  Theory  of  library 
catalogue. 


23 


AC2  classified  cataloolte  cchdb 

2  Cbmparative  Study  2 

The  Heading  and  canons  [RHl]  a second  approximation 
to  the  af^lication  of  Scientific  Method  to  catalo^ng.  The 
Spiral  of  Scientific  Method  having  been  formed  in  this  field, 
this  second  approximation  began  with  a chapter  on  Terminology 
and  another  on  Normative  Principles.  Then  the  several  topics 
in  the  Choice  and  Rendering  of  Headings  were  taken  up  succes- 
sively. The  corresponding  rules  in  the  five  chosen  codes — the 
Anglo-American  Code,  the  Classified  Catalogue  Code,  the  Cutter 
Code  [Cl],  the  Prussian  Instructions  [Ol],  and  the  Vatican  Code 
[S2] — were  examined  critically  and  comparatively.  This  demon- 
strated the  convenience,  if  not  the  need,  of  having  an  Interna- 
tional Standard  for  the  Title-Page  and  its  Overflow,  with  special 
emphasis  on  Supplement  to  Author-Statement.  Finally  came  a 
peep  into  the  problems  of  an  International  Catalogue  Code. 

3  Corrective  of  the  Class-Room 

The  Classified  Catalogue  Code  has  been  used  by  me  to  teach 
the  subject  even  from  the  time  it  was  in  the  first  draft  stage.  It 
is  still  being  used  both  in  teaching  theory  and  in  practical  catalo- 
guing. This  is  an  unusual  privilege  I have  had — to  be  an  author 
and  at  the  same  time  to  teach  one’s  own  book  to  growing  minds. 
This  gave  me  a great  chance  to  discover  the  flaws  in  the  book. 
Here  is  a picture  of  a situation  in  the  class-room.  The  class  as  a 
whole  critically  examines  the  catalogue  cards  written  in  the  practi- 
cal hours.  The  “accuser”  as  well  as  the  “accused”  student  should 
cite  the  appropriate  rule  from  the  Classified  Catalogue  Code  in 
support  of  every  statement  of  his.  The  class-room  looks  like  a 
Court  of  Law.  This  method  of  teaching  puts  the  Classified 
Catalogue  itself  “on  trial”  in  this  Court.  This  has  happened  for 
nearly  twenty-five  years.  A few  trivial  flaws  thus  come  to  be 
spotted  out  from  time  to  time.  These  are  removed  in  the  sub- 
sequent edition.  This  is  a continuing  process. 

4  Resilience  of  Sutra  St}'le 

The  Rules  in  the  very  first  edition  made  some  approximation 
to  the  Sutra  (aphorism)  style  of  expdsition.  This  style  is  the 

24 


AID  TO  DEm01>MENT 


AC4 


one  used  for  basic  codes  and  texts  in  Sansltrit  tradition.  Ibis 
style  is  «ctremely  sensitive  to  tbe  prindple  of  ^‘atomic  unit- 
thought”  in  the  ccmstruction  of  a rule.  However,  drafting  in 
English  does  not  allow  thorough  atomisation.  But  so  far  as  it 
goes,  it  proves  useful  in  applying  the  rules  to  refractory  title-pages 
with  the  aid  of  the  Rules  of  Interpretation.  The  ruthlessly  analy- 
tical mesh,  holding  the  rules  of  the  Classified  Catalogue  Code, 
invests  the  code  as  a whole  with  a resilience  of  another  kind. 
Books'  appear  off  and  on  with  cataloguing  features  beyond  the 
capacity  of  the  existing  rules,  even  with  the  prop  provided  by  the 
Rules  of  Interpretation.  A few  books  with  one  or  the  other  of 
such  new  features  have  come  out  in  recent  years.  This  will  continue 
for  ever.  Hitherto,  it  has  been  easy  to  interpolate  the  necessary 
new  Rules  consistent  with  the  old  ones  in  the  right  place  in  the 
Code.  Three  such  new  Rules  have  been  absorbed  by  the  Classi- 
fied Catalogue  Code  since  the  first  edition  came  out  without  any 
disturbance  to  the  existing  rules.  These  concern  Pseudo-Series, 
Related  Book,  and  Merger  Book. 


CHAPTER  ArV 


SUCCESSIVE  EDITIONS 

1 Edition  1 

Edition  1 was  published  in  1934  as  volume  4 of  the  Publication 
Series  of  the  Madras  Library  Association  [RC2].  This  edition 
furnished  Uie  members  of  the  staff  of  the  Madras  University 
Library  with  a firm  Code  to  do  their  day-to-day  cataloguing  work 
and  to  make  full  use  of  all  the  entries  in  the  card  catalogue  in 
giving  reference  service  to  readers.  Perhaps,  it  happened  to  be 
the  first  available  complete  Classified  Catalogue  Code  in  printed 
■ form.  It  was  pronounced  by  Sayers  to  be  “by  far  the  largest 
contribution  to  the  subject”  [SI]. 

2 Edition  2 

In  1938,  the  Canons  of  Cataloguing  were  first  enunciated. 
These  were  applied  to  a critical  examination  of  this  Code.  The 
symbiosis  between  Classification  and  Cataloguing  was  discovered 
at  the  same  time.  It  was  brought  out  by  the  Chain  Procedure 
invented  at  that  time  to  derive  Class  Index  Entry  from  Class 
Number.  These  ideas  were  incorporated  in  the  next  edition  [RC3] 
which  came  out  in  1945.  The  Theory  of  library  catalogue  [RT12] 
contained  also  a Theory  of  Alphabetisation.  This  theory  separa- 
ted the  “Legislative  phase”  and  the  “Executive  phase”  in  alpha- 
betisation. This  led  to  the  formulation  of  the  Rules  for  the  Style 
of  Writing  and  those  for  Alphabetisation,  in  close  correlation  to 
one  another.  This,  in  its  turn,  led  to  the  formulation  of  the 
Gestalt  Theory  of  Alphabetisation.  Edition  2 incorporated  these 
new  ideas  also  [RC4]. 


3  Edition  3 

Edition  3 came  out  in  1951.  It  included  Rules  for  a Union 
Caudogue  of  Periodical  Publications^  [RC7]  and  Rules  for  an 
Abstracting  Periodical  [RC8].  This*  edition  provided  also  an 

26 


SUCCESSIVE  EDITIONS 


ADS 


English-Sanskrit  CHossary  of  Cataloguing  Terms  {RC9]  to  fonn 
the  basis  for  cogn^  ter^nology  in  the  sei«ral  Indian  langu^es. 
This  was  made  possible  by  the  Hindi  version  of  the  Code  [RZN], 
with  Rules  in  Sanskrit  Sutras,  which  was  also  printed  about  the 
sanmtime. 


4 Edition  4 

Edition  4 was  largely  the  result  of  the  second  round  of  the 
critical  study  of  cataloguing  problems  embodied  in  the  Heading 
and  canons  (1955).  It  sought  to  implement  the  lay-out  for  a 
catalogue  code  arrived  at  in  that  book.  It  added  the  supple- 
mentary rules  needed  in  the  building  of  a National  Bibliography. 
It  separated  the  problems  of  the  determination  of  the  authorship 
of  a document,  the  choice  of  heading,  and  its  rendering,  and  pres- 
cribed the  rules  for  them  in  independent  chapters.  It  made 
some  changes  in  the  Style  of  Writing  headings  and  the  corres- 
ponding changes  in  the  Rules  for  Alphabetisation.  The  correc- 
tions suggested  in  the  Heading  and  canons  were  incorporated. 
This  edition  further  eliminated  the  need  for  a separate  Dictionary 
Catalogue  Code.  The  necessary  alternative  rules  for  a Dictionary 
Catalogue  Code  were  given  in  appropriate  places  in  the  Classi- 
fied Catalogue  Code  itself.  They  were  only  a few. 

5 Editions 

Ed  5 is  different  from  Ed  4 in  certain  respects.  The  difference 
concerns  the  inclusion  of  the  following  new  chapters  and  Part: 

Chap  CD  Law  of  Symmetry; 

Chap  DD  Physical  Form; 

Chap  D£  Centralised  Cataloguing; 

Chap  KI^  Homonym  in  class  Index  Headings;  and 

Chap  KL  Feature  Heading; 

Part  V Non-Conventional  Documents. 

In  Ed  5,  some  of  the  typographical  and  other  trivial  mistakes 
have  been  corrected.  These  concern  particularly  the  internal 
reference  backwards  and  forwards,  the  bibliography,  the  examples, 
and  the  index.  Several  sections  have  been  re-worded  to  secure 


27 


ADS 


CLASSIFIBO  CATALOGUE  C(»» 


unifonnity,  or  clarity,  or  simplicity  as  the  case  may  be.  Addi- 
tiooal  commentaries  have  been  added  in.  several  places.  A major 
change  in  Ed  5 is  the  reorganisation  of  the  Parts  and  Chapters. 
The  9 Parts  of  Ed  4 have  been  replaced  by  19  Parts  in  Ed  5.  Some 
of  the  longer  chapters  have  been  split  into  shorter  chapters. 
All  this  was  done  to  make  a closer  approximation  to  the  Principle 
of  Unity  in  Parts  as  well  as  in  Chapters. 

In  this  edition,  Sri  A Neelameghan,  my  colleague  and  Reader 
in  the  Documentation  Research  and  Training  Centre,  has  shared 
with  me  the  work  of  revision.  His  assistance  has  been  of  im- 
mense help  to  me. 

The  work  of  revising  the  text  of  Ed  4 and  preparing  the  press 
copy  of  Ed  S has  taken  about  320  man-hours.  This  does  not 
include  the  time  taken  by  clerical  work. 


28 


CHAPTER  AE 


CONSPECTUS 

The  9 pMts — ^A  B C D E F G H and  J — constitute  the  approach, 
so  to  speak.  The  10  parts— K LMNPQRST  and  U — give 
the  substantive  rules  for  cataloguing. 

The  5 chapters  of  Part  A describe  the  evolution  of  the  Code. 

The  9 chapters  of  Part  B expound  the  Canons  of  Cataloguing  in 
the  light  of  which  a Catalogue  Code  should  be  written  as  well  as 
interpreted  while  applying. 

The  7 chapters  of  Part  C deal  with  the  Laws  of  Library  Science, 
four  general  Laws  applicable  to  any  situation,  two  Principles 
which  throw  light  on  the  need  for  Local  Catalogue  Codes,  and 
the  Principle  of  Osmosis  by  which  a library  can  be  reorgani»d 
and  recatalogued  at  minimum  cost. 

The  5 chapters  of  Part  D deal  with  the  evolution  of  the  library 
catalogue  in  its  internal  form  as  well  as  external  form  and  with 
Centralised  Cataloguing. 

The  8 chapters  ofPartE  deal  with  the  mechanics  of  catalogu* 
ing — such  as  writing  and  arranging  entries. 

The  17  chapters  of  Part  F concern  themselves  with  the  establish- 
ment of  a standard  terminology  for  use  in  the  discipline  of 
cataloguing. 

The  5 chapters  of  Part  G give  some  help  in  the  determination 
of  the  author  of  a document,  particularly  with  reference  to  the 
conflict  usually  arising  between  the  claimants — a Person,  a 
Corporate  Body,  a Government,  and  an  Institution. 

The  7 chapters  of  Part  H go  into  the  structure  of  Name-of- 
Person  in  difierent  cultural  groups.  They  lay  bare  the  difficulties 
in  the  way  of  the  cataloguers  of  any  one  cultural  group  under- 
standing the  correct  method  of  rendering  the  Name-of-Person 
in  any  other  cultural  group. 

The  8 chapters  of  Part  J prescribe  the  rules  for  rendering 
different  kinds  of  names— personal,  geographical,  corporate  — 
and  also  names  of  books  and  series. 

The  12  chapters  of  Part  K develop  the  technique  of  Chain 


A£  CLASSIFIED  CATALOGUE  COI»  ’ 

Procedure  devised  in  1938.  During  the  last  25  years  tiie  advantages 
of  Chain  Procedure  are  being  appreciated  all  over  the  world. 
Ed  S gives  the  latest  version  of  that  procedure. 

The  6 chapters  of  Part  L deal  with  the  Cross  Iteference  Index 
Entries  to  be  given  in  the  alphabetical  part  of  the  catalogue  by  way 
of  linking  up  alternative  headings  likely  to  be  sought. 

The  11  chapters  of  Part  M form  the  core  of  the  book.  They 
lay  down  strict  rules  for  the  writing  of  the  diverse  kinds  of  Specific 
Entries  for  a Single-Volumed  Simple  Book. 

The  3 chapters  of  Part  N give  the  supplementary  rules  necessary 
in  making  entries  for  a Composite  Book  and  a Multi'Volumed 
Book. 

The  11  chapters  of  Part  P analyse  the  complexities  normally 
met  in  Periodical  Publications  and  provide  the  additional  rules 
necessary  to  write  entries  for  Periodicals  with  several  kinds  of 
complexities. 

The  44  chapters  of  Parts  Q to  V give  the  additional  rules  neces- 
sary in  building  a Union  Catalogue  of  Books,  a Union  Catalogue 
of  Periodical  Pubh'cations,  a National  Bibliography,  an  Abstract- 
ing or  Indexing  Periodical,  and  a Catalogue  of  Non-conven- 
tional  Documents. 

The  last  chapters  of  some  of  the  Parts — ^particularly  those 
giving  rules  for  making  entries — ^are  devoted  to  the  alternative 
rules  for  a Dictionary  Catalogue  Code. 


^0 


PART  B 


CANONS  OF  CATALOGUING 


CHAPTER  BA 


DEFINlTldN 

0  CuMNtt  of  CitfilogoiDg.— The  spedfic  nornutive  prmdples 
applicable  to  cataloguing— that  is,  to  the 

1 Drafting  of  a Catalogue  Code  including  the  formulation 
of  each  rule  ; 

2 Intc^retation  of  the  rules  to  meet  new  situations  brought 
op  by  a particular  document  or  by  changes  in  the  practice  of  bobk 
production;  and 

3 Provision  of  suitable  guidance  for  cataloguing  work. 

There  are  nine  Canons  of  Cataloguing  formulated  so  far.  Some  of  them 
were  formulated  for  the  first  time  in  the  Theory  of  library  mtalogue  [RT?]. 
They  were  further  added  to  and  elaborated  in  the  Heading  and  canons: 
Comparative  study  of  five  catalogue  codes  [RH2].  The  Canons  are  stated 
below  with  brief  comments. 

A word  of  explanation  about  the  choice  of  the  term  ^Canons*  to  denote 
^Normative  Principles’.  The  following  is  the  convention  adopted  about  the 
term  to  be  used  to  denote  normative  principles  in  different  contexts: 

Law.*— In  the  context  of  a major  discipline,  such  as  Library  Science. 

Canon.— In  the  context  of  divisions  of  the  first  order  of  the  major  discipline, 
such  as  Book  Selection,  Oassification,  and  Cataloguing. 

Principle.— In  the  context  of  divisions  of  the  second  or  later  order  of  the 
major  discipline,  such  as  Facet  Sequence  in  Classification,  and  Alphabeti- 
sation  in  Cataloguing. 


33 


CHAPTER  BB 


CANON  OF  ASCERTAINABILITY 

« 

0  Caam  of  AsccrtaiBabflity.— The  Principle  piescribing  that 
the  infonnation  found  in  the  title-page  of  the  document  catalogued 
and  its  over-flow  pa^  should  determine  the  choice  and  rendering 
of 

1 Each  Section  of  die  Main  Entry  other  than  the  Extract 
Note,  the  Extraction  Note,  and  the  Related  Book  Note; 

2 Each  Section  of  a Cross  Reference  Entry  (in  a Classified 
Catalogue)  and  Subject  Analytical  (in  a Dictionary  Catalogue) 
other  than  the  Leading  Section  and  the  Directing  Section; 

3 The  Heading  of  each  Book  Index  Entry  other  than  any 
derived  from  the  Extract  Note,  Extraction  Note,  and  Related 
Book  Note; 

4 All  Sections  other  than  the  Heading  and  the  Directing 
Section  of  each  Book  Index  Entry; 

5 All  Sections  other  than  the  Heading  and  Directing 
Section  of  a Class  Index  Entry  (in  a Classified  Catalogue),  and 
Specific  Subject  Entry,  and  See  also  Entry  (in  a Dictionary 
Catalogue); 

6 Each  Section  other  than  the  Directing  Section  in  each 
Cross  Reference  Index  Entry  other  than  Name  Entry;  and 

7 Similar  sections  in  any  other  kind  of  entry. 

1 Internal  Inconsistency 

Some  of  the  iateraat  inconsistencies  of  existing  catalogue  codes  are  trace- 
able to  their  being  obliged  to  step  out  of  the  title-page  and  its  over-flow  and 
go  into  the  market  place  so  to  speak,  in  search  of  data  for  the  choice  and 
rendering  of  headings  of  even  specific  entries. 

2 Faihire  of  Tifle-Pag^ 

Unfortunately,  the  title-page  and  its  over-flow  have  not  yet  begun  to  give 
all  the  data  needed  for  making  the  main  entry  in  the  catalogue.  Nor  has 
the  Cataloguing  Profession  exerted  itself  till  now  in  persuading  the  book- 
trade  and  the  authors  to  do  the  needful  in  the  matter. 

34 


CANON  OF  ASCCRTAINABlLiry  BBS 

3  Steady  Oumge  in  Title-Pege 

It  must  however  be  conceded  that  the  design  of  the  title-page  and  its  over* 
flow  has  been  in  dux  all  along.  During  the  last  one  or  two  centuries  sheer 
folk-force  has  led  the  title-page  and  |ts  over-flow  to  evolve  towards  being  a 
complete  repository  of  the  cataloguing  elements  of  a document.  Its  evolution 
has  been  described  in  detail  in  the  SocUU  bibliography:  Physical  biblipgraphy 
for  librarians  [RS2].  The  title-page  is  a gift  of  the  early  printers.  It  has  Imn 
exploited  in  succession  by  patrons,  publishers,  and  authors.  It  is  open  to 
cataloguers  too  to  exploit  it.  Exploitation  here  means  not  only  using  the 
information  given  in  the  title-page,  but  also  endeavouring  to  make  the  title- 
page  and  its  over-flow  carry  all  such  information  as  the  cataloguer.needs  but 
is  not  at  present  given  in  them. 

4 Reciprocity 

In  other  words,  the  influence  between  the  title-page  and  the  Cataloguing 
Profession  should  be  reciprocal.  Each  should  enrich  and  help  the  other. 
To  make  this  possible,  the  title-leaf  and  its  over-dew  leaves  in  the  material 
plane  and  the  Canon  of  Ascertainabiiity  in  the  idea  plane — that  is,  the  plane 
of  normative  principles — should  be  made  the  sheet-anchor  of  any  Catalogue 
Code.  The  purpose  of  the  commentaries  in  Sections  FL71  to  ]l^78  is  just 
to  plead  for  the  establishment  of  such  a reciprocity  between  the  Cataloguing 
Profession  and  the  book-trade,  leading  to  the  adoption  of  an  International 
Standard  for  the  title-page  and  its  over-dow. 

5 Main  Entry 

Even  before  the  desired  International  Standard  for  the  title-page  and  its 
over-dow  is  established,  the  Main  Entry  can  conform  to  the  Canon  of 
Ascertainabiiity  to  a large  measure.  Most  of  the  Book  Index  Entries  also 
can  do  so. 


CHAPTER  BC 


CANON  OF  PtoOTFNCE 

0  Canon  of  Prepotence.— The  principle  that 

1 The  Potency  to  decide  the  position  of  an  entry  among  the 
various  entries  in  a catalogue  should,  if  possible,  be  concentrated 
totally  in  the  Leading  Section;  and  even  there 

2 It  should  be  concentrated,  as  much  as  possible,  in  the 
entry  element;  and  further 

3 If  total  concentration  in  the  Leading  Section  is  not 
possible,  the  minimum  possible  potency  should  be  allowed  to 
overflow  beyond  it  to  later  sections;  and 

4 Even  this  spill-over  should  be  distributed  in  the  later 
sections  in  a decreasing  sequence  of  intensity. 

1 Distribution  of  Potency 

The  essence  of  a Library  Catalogue  is  arrangement  of  entries.  The  entries 
get  sort^  letter  by  letter  or  digit  by  digit,  beginning  with  the  very  first  of 
these  found  in  an  entry.  The  potency  goes  on  decreasing  rightwards  and 
downwards,  from  the  first  letter  or  digit,  in  most  of  the  scripts.  Any  mistake 
in  the  first  letter  or  the  digit  will  therefore  be  fatal.  The  entry  will  b^  virtually 
lost  in  some  far-off  region  of  the  catalogue.  The  range  within  which  the 
entry  may  get  lost  goes  on  decreasing,  as  we  move  further  on  from  the  first 
letter  or  digit.  The  range  is  reduced  to  a reasonably  small  one,  only  by  the 
time  we  reach  beyond  the  end  of  the  entry  word,  or  of  the  entry  element,  or 
of  the  class  number,  as  the  case  may  be. 

2 Ll|^  for  Framm  of  Catalogue  Code 

The  Canon  of  Prepotence  yields  an  important  deduced  principle  applicable 
to  the  choice  of  entry  element  in  a multi-worded  heading—that  is,  in  the 
rendering  of  a multi-worded  term  chosen  for  use  as  heading.  That  principle 
is  a statistical  one.  • 

“The  entry  element  should  be  chosen  from  among  that  group  of  the  words, 
occurring  in  the  multi-worded  term  chosen  for  use  as  heading,  that  is  more 
numerous  than  the  groups  of  the  other  words  occurring  in  it.*’ 

For,  the  probability  for  the  same  word  to  be  used  as  entry  element  in  several 
headings  is  inversely  proportional  to  the  numerousness  of  the  group  from 
which  the  word  is  chosen;  and  the  smaller  this  probability,  the  greater  will 
be  concentration  of  potency  in  the  entry  clement.  This  statistical  principle 
is  responsible— -unconscious  though  it  mii^t  have  been— for  the  choice  of  the 

36 


CANm  tXP  PRePOTCNCE  BC4 

famSy  name  as  the  entry  element  In  rendering  western  name^^f-person  in 
a heading.  It  is  the  overlooking  of  this  statistica]  principle  that  hsa  vitiated 
the  Anglo-American  Code’s  prescription  of  place-name  as  the  entry  element 
for  Institution-Heading^  in  spite  its  having  accepted  the  place-name  as  the 
entry  element  in  the  name  of  a Government  as  improvised  by  cataloguing 
convention  [A4].  This  statistica]  principle  plays  some  part,  though  again  un- 
consciously, in  the  choice  of  entry  element  in  the  real  title  for  title  heading, 
as  prescribed  in  the  Prussian  Instructions  [02].  This  statistical  principle 
should  be  exploited  fully  in  the  framing  of  a Catalogue  Code.  Its  use  will  be 
demonstrated  in  Part  J,  which  is  on  the  Rendering  of  Names. 

21  Illustration  From  Name  of  Series 

Here  is  an  example  of  the  application  of  this  principle  to  Series-Heading. 
Many  universities  and  governments  have  established  their  own  series.  They 
are  generally  given  common  names,  such  as  Publication  series,  Library  science 
series,  English  series,  Hindi  series,  Historical  series.  Economic  series.  Pamphlet 
series,  and  so  on.  These  names  do  not  have  sufficient  potency.  They  often 
become  homonyms-  To  resolve  the  homonym  and  to  increase  the  potency, 
the  name  of  the  university  or  the  government  or  even  a department  of  either 
may  have  to  be  added.  If  the  purpose  be  merely  individualisation,  the  name 
can  be  added  at  the  end.  But  if  the  purpose  is  increasing  the  potency  of  the 
heading,  the  name  should  be  added  at  the  front.  While  drafting  the  Classifkd 
Catalogue  Code  in  1933, 1 had  not  consciously  seized  the  Canons  of  Catalogu- 
ing. I was  therefore  unable  to  decide  the  issue  on  proper  grounds.  Much 
of  indetcrminancy  or  inconsistency  was  the  result.  It  is  sixteen  years  after 
the  Canons  of  Cataloguing  were  enunciated,  that  1 was  able  to  sec  this  difficult 
issue  lighted  up  by  the  Canon  of  Prepotence. 

3 Moral  for  the  Cataloguer 

The  Cataloguer  should  prevent  any  casual  error  creeping  into  the  Leading 
Section  and  particularly  into  the  first  word  or  the  class  number — and  even 
more  so  the  very  first  letter  or  digit— to  be  written  at  the  very  beginnirg  of 
the  Leading  Section.  He  must  be  aware  that  any  error  in  writing  the  Entry 
Element  or  the  Class  Number  carries  a higli  penalty. 

4 Call  Number  Entry 

The  Canon  of  Prepotence  has  its  fullest  sway  in  the  Call  Number  Entry 
of  the  Classified  Catalogue.  Even  here,  it  is  able  to  have  its  full  sway,  only 
if  the  Scheme  of  Classification  in  use  has  an  individualising  Cali  Number  for 
every  document.  Today,  the  only  scheme  that  does  so  is  the  Colon  Classi- 
fication [RCl  1 ].  If  the  Call  Number  is  constnictcd  according  to  that  scheme, 
the  Leading  Section  of  the  Main  Entry  is  truly  prepotent.  All  the  potency 
of  the  entry,  in  respect  of  arrangement  of  entries,  is  concentrated  in  the  Lead- 
ing Section.  Every  other  section  in  that  entry  is  rendered  impotent.  In 
finding  the  position  for  a Call  Number  Entry  in  the  catalogue  cabinet,  the 

37 


BC4  duASSOFlBD  CATALOGUE  GCH>E 

Filing  Cataloguer  need  never  look  beyond  the  Call  Number  in  the  Leading 
Section. 


5  DIctioiiary  Catalogiie 

In  respect  of  the  Canon  of  Prepotence,  the  Oassified  Catalogue  has  an 
advantage  over  the  Dictionary  Catalogue.  For,  the  Main  Entry  of  the  latter 
is  an  Author  Entry.  However  much  the  name  of  an  author  may  be  indi- 
vidualised, it  may  not  individualise  the  document  described  in  the  entry. 
For,  the  author  might  have  written  two  or  more  documents.  Even  if  ho 
has  written  only  two,  the  entry  is  not  individualised  by  the  name  of  the  author 
alone.  In  other  words,  the  potency  is  not  concentrated  in  the  Leading 
Section.  A part  of  it  necessarily  overflows  into  the  title-section.  In  finding 
the  position  for  the  Main  Entry  in  the  Catalogue  Cabinet  of  a Dictionary 
Catalogue,  the  Filing  Cataloguer  will  have  often  to  look  into  the  second  and 
the  later  secUons. 


6 Word  Entry 

A similar  remark  is  applicable  also  to  any  specific  word  entry,  be  it  of  the 
Dictionary  Catalogue  or  of  the  Alphabetical  Part  of  the  Classified  Catalogue. 
In  eveiy  such  entry,  every  endeavour  is  made  by  a Catalogue  Code  for  the 
potency  to  be  at  its  possible  maximum  in  the  Leading  Section.  For  exampte, 
the  name  of  a person,  occupying  the  Leading  Section,  is  individualised  by  the 
addition  of  the  necessary  Individualising  Elements  to  the  name.  Similarly, 
a geographical  name  in  the  Leading  Section — be  it  as  the  name  of  a subject 
or  as  the  name  of  a Government — is  helped  to  cany  the  maximum  possible 
potency,  by  the  addition  of  the  necessary  Individualising  Elements  to  the  name, 

7  Cross  Reference  Entry 

In  a Cross  Reference  Entry  of  a Classified  Catalogue,  the  Leading  Section 
has  only  a little  potency.  For,  it  is  nwrely  a class  number.  A good  deal  of 
potency  necessarily  flows  into  the  Third  Section,  which  gives  the  Locus. 
The  Filing  Cataloguer  will  have  to  reach  that  Section  in  the  Entry. 

8  Class  Index  Entry 

The  Canon  of  Prepotence  has  its  full  sway  in  a Class  Index  Entry  of  the 
Classified  Catalogue.  For,  there  cannot  be  two  Class  Index  Entries  with  the 
same  Heading.  This  is  a result  of  the  requirement  nhat  the  artificial 
ordinal  language  of  class  numbers  is  expected  to  be  so  designed  that  it  has 
no  synonyms  or  homonyms  [RP2].  In  other  words,  the  Heading  of  a Class 
Index  Entry  individualises  the  entry.  All  the  potency,  in  respect  of  arrange- 
ment of  entries,  of  a Qass  Index  Entry  is  totally  concentrated  in  its  Leading 
Section.  Its  second  section  containing  the  directing  words  and  its  third 
section  containing  the  class  number  are  totally  impotent.  In  finding  the 
position  for  a Class  Index  Entry  in  the  Catalogue  Cabinet,  the  Filing  Catalo- 
guer need  not  at  all  look  beyond  the  Leading  Section. 

38 


CA140N  W FREPOUNCE  BC9i 

91  OroMlUiBram 

The  Canon  of  Prepotence  is  least  respected  by  the  Cross  Reference  Imte 
Entry— 4>e  it  in  the  Classified  Catalogue  or  in  the  Dktionary  Catalogue. 
For,  the  Filing  Cataloguer  must  look  down  to  the  last  word  in  the  last  secthm 
of  such  an  entry  to  find  the  correct  position  of  it  inXdse  catalogue  cabtnct* 
In  other  words,  the  potency,  in  respect  of  arrangement  of  entries,  is  distri* 
bated  both  in  the  first  and  the  last  sections  of  a Cross  Reference  Index  Entry. 
The  Filing  Cataloguer  will  have  to  reach  the  Third  Section  of  the  Entry. 


39 


CHAPTER  BD 


CANON  OF  INDIVIDUALISATION 

0 Canon  of  Individiialisation. — ^The  principle  that  the  name  of 
any  entity— be  it  of  a person,  a geographical  entity,  a corporate 
body,  a series,  a document,  a subject,  or  a language— used  as  the 
Heading  of  a catalogue  entry  should  be  made  to  denote  one  and 
only  one  entity,  by  adding  to  it  the  necessary  and  sufficient  number 
of  Individualising  Elements. 

1  Fatal  Result  of  Homonym 

Homonym  may  prove  fatal.  Tragic  results  have  come  out  of  homonyms. 
In  the  epic  MaMhdrata  the  turning  point  in  the  Great  War  centres  round 
the  homonym  *"Aswatthama'\  It  was  the  name  of  a General  as  well  as  of  an 
elephant  on  the  side  of  one  of  the  belligerents.  When  the  elephant  was 
killed,  the  words  ‘^Aswatthama  killed'*  were  broadcast  by  the  opposite  belli- 
gerents. The  other  side  took  the  name  “Aswatthama”  to  denote  their 
General.  This  led  to  the  demoralisation  of  that  side  and  the  ultimate  victory 
of  the  other. 


2  Homonym  Deflects  an  Author 

Homonym  may  lead  to  serious  results  In  a scholar's  work.  A traditional 
story,  apocryphal  though  it  might  be,  illustrates  it.  Sankara,  the  great 
philosopher  of  mediaeval  India,  wished  to  write  a commentary  on  the  Sahasra- 
norm  (book  of  thousand  names)  of  Lalita  (the  Goddess-Principle).  He 
asked  his  librarian  to  bring  a copy  of  the  Sahasranama,  But  he  brought  the 
Sahasramma  of  Vishnu  (the  God-Principle).  According  to  the  tradition, 
Sankara  ultimately  saw  the  vision  of  Lalita  telling  him,  *Tt  is  I that  took 
advantage  of  the  homonymous  nature  of  the  title  mentioned  by  you,  and  led 
your  librarian  to  bring  the  other  Sahasranama,  Write*  a commentary 
on  it.” 


3  Homonym  Spoils  Book  Selection 

Homonym  may  lead  to  ridicihous  mistakes.  Some  years  ago,  the  Board 
of  Studies  in  Engiish  Literature  recommended  to  the  Madras  University 
Library  the  purchase  of  a book  entitled  Life  of  Johnson,  It  had  taken  it  to 
to  be  a biography  of  Samuel  Johnson,  the  well-known  man  of  letters.  But 
when  the  book  arrived,  it  turned  out  to  be  the  life  of  a dog  ! 


CANON  OF  INDIVIOUALlSAtlON  BD43 

4 HoaoHmyn  in  liid<d0gy 
By  S Kuppuswamy  Saatri 

Hie  following  account  of  the  way  in  which  homonym  dissipates  research; 
potential  into  trivial  work  had  been  furnished  by  the  late  Mahamahopadhyaya 
Vidya-Vacaspati  Professor  S Kuppuswamy  Sastri,  Professor  of  Sanskrit  and 
Comparative  Philology  in  the  Presidency  College  and  Curator  of  the  Govern* 
ment  Oriental  Manuscripts  Library  in  Madras.  It  is  extracted  from  a note  of 
his  entitled  Authorial  polyonymy  and  homonymy  in  Sanskrit  literature.  This 
note  will  be  found  in  full  in  the  first  three  editions  of  this  book  [RC5.] 

41  Authorial  Homonym  in  Sanskrit  Literature 

In  Sanskrit  Literature,  there  are  several  instances  of  Authorial  Homonym 
(the  same  name  coining  to  be  given  to  dilTerent  authors). 

This  phenomenon  presents  many  an  interesting  problem  to  the  makers  and 
students  of  Library  Science,  in  their  attempt  to  formulate  the  rules  of  library 
classification  and  cataloguing,  not  to  speak  of  the  various  difficulties  which 
they  cause  to  the  modem  historians  of  Sanskrit  literature.  Homonym  com- 
prises all  the  cases  where,  mainly  as  a result  of  the  ancient  custom  of  naming 
persons  after  their  ancestors,  gods,  goddesses,  prophets,  saints,  distinguished 
authors,  patrons  and  sometimes  rulers,  different  persons  have  come  to  bear 
the  same  name.  In  many  of  the  cases  of  homonym , it  is  impossible  to  discover 
exactly  all  the  underlying  causes.  Homonymous  parallels  are  bound  to  cause 

cataloguing  than  in  the  investigation  of  crimes  and  settlement  of  legal  claims. 
Long-standing  usage  established  by  reliable  evidence  is  certainly  useful  to  a 
considerable  extent  in  helping  one  out  of  difficulties.  It  would  be  certainly 
worthwhile  for  any  institution  intended  for  the  promotion  of  culture  to  under- 
take the  preparation  of  a concordance  to  Authorial  Homonyms  in  Indian 
literature;  and  this  would  afford  ample  scope  for  intelligent,  inteiesting,  and 
useful  research  for  a number  of  scholars  for  a number  of  years. 

The  following  illustrations  indicate  the  nature  and  complexity- of  the  pro- 
blems connected  with  Authorial  Homonym.  All  the  names  given  below  are 
such  as  are  expected  to  find  a place  in  the  classification  of  Indian  literature. 

42  Vyasa 

Vyasa  is  one  ofjlhe  most  famdhs  names  in  Sanskrit  literature.  He  is  the 
reputed  author  of  the  Mafmbharata.  Several  Puranas  arc  attributed  to  one 
with  the  same  name.  The  famous  Bhashya  on  the  Yoga-sutras,  called  Vyasa- 
bhashya^  is  also  believed  to  have  been  written  py  Vyasa.  Some  later  writers 
called  Vyasaraya  and  Vyasa tirtha  bore  the  name  Vyasa, 

43  Valmikj 

Valmiki  is  the  author  of  the  Ramayana,  1 n late r 1 iterat  ure,  a T amil  poet  and 
a Prakrita  grammarian  came  to  be  called  Valmiki.  In  recent  times,  Subba 

41 


BD43 


CLASSIHEd  CATALOGUE  CODE 


Rao,  retired  Teltiga  Fandit  of  die  Presidency  College  came  to  be  called 
Andhra-Valmiki  for  his  Telugu  Ramayana. 

44  Gautama 

Gautama  is  Uie  author  of  the  Nyaya-sutras.  The  founder  of  Buddhism^ 
whose  hagiological  name  is  Siddhartha,  is  also  known  by  his  gotrarname^ 
Gautama.  Cataloguers  have  also  to  take  into  account  the  name  Gautama, 
borne  by  the  author  of  an  ancient  Sutra  work  of  the  Dharmasastra  literature 
iCautama-dharniasutrani), 


45  Bad  Errors 

In  library  classification  and  cataloguing,  the  various  problems  connected 
with  authorial  Homonym  should  be  carefully  and  successfully  tackled.  Other* 
wise,  bad  errors  are  likely  to  vitiate  the  work  of  higher  research.  The  follm^fing 
illustration,  in  this  connection,  may  not  be  out  of  place.  Aufrecht,  on  page 
46  of  his  famous  catalogue,  confounds  Anandatirtha  («»Madhavacarya» 
Pumaprajna)  wiUi  Anandagiri  (—Anandajnana).  The  former  is  the  well* 
known  Acarya  of  the  Dvaita  School  and  the  latter  is  the  well-known  scholiast 
of  the  Advaita  School.  This  is  an  instance  in  which  a homonymous  part  of 
two  distinct  names  of  two  distinct  authors  has  caused  trouble. 

46  Inadequacy  of  Mere  Names 

This  illustration  will  indicate  the  nature  of  the  snares  and  pitfalls  in  the 
way  of  librarians  who  are  engaged  in  library  classification  and  cataloguing. 
The  difficulties  arising  in  this  way  from  Authorial  Homonymy  in  Sanskrit 
literature  have  to  be  surmounted  necessarily  with  the  co-operation  of  scholars 
in  Sanskrit,  until  a reliable  concordance  as  indicated  at  the  end  of  Sec  BD41 
becomes  available,  for  ready  reference.  One  ^Iden  rule,  however,  which  a 
librarian,  who  is  concerned  with  the  classification  and  cataloguing  of  any 
considerable  collection  of  Sanskrit  books,  can  easily  remember  and  follow 
is — Refuse  to  be  guided  by  mere  names,^* 

5 Dissiiwtion  of  Research  Potential 

The  unresolved  homonyms  of  the  past  are  dissipating  much  of  the  research 
potential  among  the  Indologists  of  the  world  today.  Surely  the  time  and 
energy  of  such  eminent  scholars  could  be  put  to  better  use,  if  the  bibliographies 
and  catalogues  of  the  past  had  respected  the  Canon  oS  Individualisation. 
Research  Potential  is  also  dissipated  by  the  failure  of  the  past  to  have  resolved 
homonyms  in  the  titles  of  books,  as  and  when  they  appeared. 

6 Safeguard  the  Future 

The  directive  of  the  Canon  of  Individualisation  is  in  the  words,  *‘Sufl5cicnt 
is  the  harm  done  by  neglecting  me  in  the  past.  Provide  safeguards  against 
its  recurrence  at  least  in  respect  of  the  headings  in  the  entries  of  the  future 
documents.  The  safeguard  is  to  resolve  homonyms  in  headings  by  the  add!* 

42 


CANOK  OF  INDlVlDUALISAtlOH  BD43 

tioo  of  extra  tenm  to  the  names  prop^.  CaB  them  IhdtvIdiiatU^  Ele- 
ments.’^ One  of  the  main  punKises  the  plan  contained  in  Sec  JPL71  to 
PL78  for  an  International  Standard  for  the  Entry  Statement  for  Anilior  on 
the  bade  of  the  title-page  of  a book  is  to  carry  out  this  directive  of  the  Canon 
of  Individoalisation.  Many  of  the  Rules  in  the  chapters  of  Part  S are  tinned 
on  prescription  of  Individualising  Elements  in  the  rendering  of  names  in 
headings  of  catalogue  entries. 


43 


CHAPTER  BE 


CANON  OF  SOUGHT-HEADING 

0 Canon  of  Soo^t-Heading.~The  principle  that  the  decision 
whether  an  entry 

1 With  a imrticular  type  of  heading,  or 

2 With  a particular  choice  for  that  heading,  or 

3 With  a particular  rendering  of  that  choice,  or 

4 A particular  added  entry  arising  out  of  it, 

should  be  based  on  the  answer  to  the  question;  ‘Ts  reader  or 
library  staff  likely  to  look  for  a book  under  the  particular  type  or 
choice  or  rendering  of  heading  or  in  the  particuar  added  entry.” 

*'1  Flair  and  Freedom 

(jhe  answer  to  this  question  is  a matter  of  flair.  The  flair  shield  be  based 
on  experience  in  Reference  ServiceVthat  is,  in  eliciting  from  readers  their 
requirements  and  flndlng  the  appropriate  documents  for  them,  (induction 
should  be  applied  to  the  words  usually  brought  up  by  readers  in  looking  into 
the  catalogue  to  choose  their  documents.  The  flair  should  also  be  based  on 
experience  in  Book  Selection.  Induction  should  be  applied  to  the  types 
of  heading  found  necessary  to  help  either  in  Ailing  up  gaps  in  the  library 
collection  or  in  avoiding  unintended  duplication^  ^It  has  to  be  based  further  ^ 
on  the  obligation  of  the  Reference  Section  to  give  a reader  alternatives  to  a 
document,  when  the  one  actually  sought  is  not  in  at  the  moment.  The  alter- 
native may  be  essentially  the  same  as  the  one  sought.  For«  tb^  same  book 
might  have  appeared  with  a different  title  and  the  latter  may  bi^in  the  library. 
Or,  it  might  have  been  merged  into  another  book  in  the  library.  Or  it 
be  an  extract  from  some  other  book,  which  is  on  the  shelf.  Reference  Section 
will  also  have  the  obligation  to  produce  to  a reader  all  the  documents  associa- 
ted with  another  document  mentioned  by  him.  The  apparent  freedom  given 
by  the  Canon  of  Sought-Heading  should  be  used  with  great  circumspection, 
care,  and  judgement.^ 


^ 2 Effect  on  Catalogue  Code 

(The  design  of  the  Catalogue  Code  is  itself  largely  guided  by  the  Canon  of 
Sought-Heading.  Several  of  the  Rules  arc  determinded  by  it^  There  are 
several  elements  on  the  title-page  and  its  over-flow.  The  Canon  of  Asccr- 
tainability  is  indifferent  as  to  which  element  can  be  allowed  the  claim  to  be- 

44 


CANON  Of  SOIK>HT«HEA0INO  BBl$ 

come  a headu3(g.  All  that  it  is  concerned  with  is  that(oo  element  outside  the 
title-page  and  its  over-flow  should  be  allowed  to  be^me  the  heading  of  a 
main  en^  or  any  other  entry  coming  under  its  8way)as  prescribed  in  Sec  BBO» 
(it  is  the  business  of  the  Canon  of  Sought-Heading  to  admit  or  reject^  claim 
of  any  element  in  the  title-page  and  its  over-flow  to  become  a heading.  A 
trivial  case  of  rejection  is  the  claim  of  the  year  or  the  place  of  publication  or 
of  the  name  of  the  publisher.  Author-heading  and  subject-heading  are  the 
most  popular  among  sought-headings.  Collaborator-heading  comes  next  in 
popularity.  Series  heading  also  is  sought.) 

3  Pseudo-Series  and  its  Discovery 

(rhe  concept  of  Pseudo-Series  owes  its  origin  practically  to  the  Canon  of 
Sought-Heading.)  The  question  '*What  are  the  plays  of  Shakespeare  with 
Variorum  Edition  V*  was  asked  by  a scholar.  The  catalogue  based  on 
the  1934  edition  of  the  Classified  catalogue  code  or  any  other  code  current 
in  that  period,  could  not  give  an  immediate  answer  to  this  question.  Similar 
experiences  accumulated  through  years  while  doing  Reference  Service.  It 
was  this  that  led  to  the  concept  of  Pseudo-Series. 

4  Extract  and  its  Demand 

^ f A reader  may  ask  for  a document.  It  may  have  gone  out  on  loan.)  But 
an  Extract  frjjpp  it  may  be  on  the  shelf,  as  a separate  document.  There  is 
some  probability  for  this  Extract  to  satisfy  his  want.  But  he  will  not  be  able 
to  look  for  it  under  its  own  heading.  Because  he  may  not  know  of  its 
existence.  Therefore,  when  he  looks  for  the  original  book  under  its  own 
heading  which  he  knows,  he  will  be  helped  if  there  is  a note  in  its  entry  with 
the  information  portion  printed  os'*  followed  by  the  heading  etc  of  each 
of  the  extracts  from  it,  owned  by  the  library.  Vice  versa,  the  reader  may 
know  only  of  the  Extractfy  A note  in  its  entry  saying  ^'Extract  from . . 
will  help  him  to  think  of  the  original.  It  may  be  of  use  to  him.  He  might 
not  at  all  have  thought  of  the  original.  But  this  note  will  make  him  seek  it. 
This  service  s^dd  be  done  by  the  catalogue  according  to  the  Canon  of 
Sought-Heading"' 


5 Merger  Book  and  its  Demand 

Again,  it  was  only  in  1953  that(the  phenomenon  of  two  or  more  books 
appearing  mergedjinto  one  book  at  a later  time,  came  to  our  notice.  Here 
again  the  Canon  of  Sought-Heading  prompted  the  framing  of  a Rule  to  meet 
the  cataloguing  problems  of  such  Merger  Books.) 

6 Cross  Reference  Index  Entry 

^he  institution  of  the  majority  of  cross  reference  index  entries  had  its  origin 
in  the  Canon  of  Sought-Heading)  A reader  might  remember  an  author  or  a 
collaborator  by  only  one  of  the  names  used  by  him  as  alternative  names  or 
variant  forms  of  one  and  the  same  name,  in  different  documents.  Some  of 

45 


BE6  CLASSinCD  CATAU)OUS  CODS 

these  (msy  be  waX  and  some  pseadonymousA  This  makes  no  difference  In 
the  problem  beitig  considered.  (Whatever  be  me  name  sought  by  die  reader^ 
the  catalogue  should  inform  him  of  all  the  documents  written  by  him  under 
other  names  too^  The  Canon  of  Sought-Heading  recognised  this  fact.  Ah 
such  names  ate  proper  names.  Only  a few  persons  indulge  in  such  alternative 
names.  The  claim  of  each  name  to  be  used  as  heading  may  thmfoie  be 
admitted  without  undue  disregard  of  the  Law  of  Parsimony.  Such  is  the 
verdict  of  the  Omon  of  Souid^t-Heading. 

7 Subject-Heading  and  Chain  Procedure 

When  the  Rules  of  Chain  Procedure  were  formulated  for  the  first  time  in 
1938  in  TJteorjf  (RTlOj,  the  rules  were  crude.  For,  practically  every  significant 
digit  in  the  class  number  was  given  the  right  to  claim  a Class  Index  Entry 
of  its  own.  Far  example,  in  the  class  number  L183,  the  digit  3 gave  the  class 
index  heading  **Bar,  Medicine.**  The  digit  8 also  gave  the  class  index  heading 
**Head,  Medicine.**  Again,  the  digit  1 too  gave  the  class  index  heading 
‘‘Regional  Organ,  Medicine**.  This  was  a ruthlessly  mechanical  way  of 
deriving  class  index  entries  from  the  digits  in  class  number.  It  led  to  a plethora 
of  class  index  entries.  Some  of  these  were  irritating  the  mind  vaguely.  The 
Law  of  Parsimony  protested.  But  there  was  no  way  of  removing  the  irrita- 
tion, till  the  Canon  of  Sought-Heading  took  shape.  It  ruled  out  as  unsought 
the  two  headings  “Head,  Medicine,**  and  “Regional  Orgsm,  Medicine’*. 
Similar  weeding  out  of  unsought  headings  was  indicated  in  many  classes. 
The  Rules  of  Chain  Procedure  were  themselves  re-enunciated.  However, 
it  is  the  crudeness  of  the  Chain  Procedure,  invented  in  1938,  that  was  respon- 
sible for  the  formulation  of  the  Canon  of  Sought-Heading  in  1952. 

7ZD  Application  to  Dictionary  Catalogue 

During  my  visit  to  London  in  June  1954  for  consultation  with  colleagues 
in  the  profession,  A J Wells,  the  Editor  of  the  British  national  bibliogrtqfhy^ 
brought  an  important  experience  to  notice.  While  the  subject-heading  got 
by  the  Rules  of  Chain  Procedure  did  its  work  well  in  the  Clawed  Catalo^e, 
it  did  nor’pi^i^the  ^ in  the  Dictionary  Catalogue.  The 

discussion  of  t1^  subject  took  a fruitful  turn  as  soon  as  the  Canon  of  Sought- 
Heading  was  consciously  taken  as  guide. 


46 


CHAPTER  BF 


CANON  OF  CONTEXT 

0  Caotm  of  Context.~The  principle 

1 That  the  Rules  of  a Catalogue  Code  should  be  formulated 
injhe  context  of: 

11  The  nature  of  the  cataloguing  features  of  the  book» 
prevalent  in  the  mode  of  book  production; 

12  The  nature  of  the  organisation  of  libraries  prevalent 
in  regard  to  the  mode  and  quality  of  library  service;  and 

13  The  coming  into  existence  of  published  bibliographies 
and  particularly  bibliographical  periodicals;  and 

2 That  the  rules  should  be  amended  from  time  to  time  to 
keep  step  with  changes  in  the  Context. 

1 Weightage  to  Physical  Attributes 

When  manuscripts  were  loosely  assembled  sheets,  not  firmly  bound,  a 
detailed  description  of  size,  collation,  and  even  peculiarities  of  individual 
leaves  was  necessary  in  catalogue  entry.  To  add  to  this,  each  copy  of  a book 
was  virtually  unique.  It  was  often  a rarity.  It  was  property.  Each  entry 
in  a catalogue  was  therefore  over-weighted  with  details  of  physical  biblio- 
graphy. This  was  true  as  much  with  Manuscript  as  with  Incunabula.  They 
are  of  immense  help  in  historical  bibliography.  For  a long  time,  after  the 
invention  of  printing— even  long  after  the  Incunabula  Period— these  practices 
prevailed  in  some  measure.  This  mental  set  of  the  cataloguers  of  documents 
of  pre-printing  days  and  of  Incunabula  days  continued  even  for  ages  after 
the  context  had  changed.  Cutter  [C2]  saw  the  continuance  of  this  mental 
set  even  down  to  the  last  quarter  of  the  nineteenth  century.  He  called  it 
“full”  cataloguing.  He  recommended  “short”  cataloguing  for  Service- 
Libraries.  This  recommendation  was  opportune;  and  it  was  readily  accepted 
by  the  progressive  members  of  the  profession.  Because  the  great  increase 
in  the  annual  output  of  printed  books  and  even  in  the  annual  accession  in 
many  a library  made  “full”  too  costly  for  practice.  The  Canon  of  Context 
gave  weight  to  this  change  in  context.  It  supported  the  Law  of  Parsimony. 
And  Cataloguing  Code  was  modified.  The  jurisdiction  of  the  old  Code 
was  confined  to  the  relatively  few  kinds  of  catalogues  and  lists  obliged  to  give 
bibliographical  description. 

2 Back-Log  of  Incunabiilfi  Age 

However,  the  back-log  of  the  old  mental  set  let  go  the  retention  of  colia- 

47 


BF2  CLASSIHED  CATALOGUE  CODE 

tion,  name  of  publisher,  name  of  the  place  of  publication,  and  price  in  library 
catalogue.  So  long  as  library  organisation  put  a physical  barrier  between 
reader  and  library  collection,  collation  served  a useful  purpose.  For,  a 
reader  naturally  wanted  to  know  the  size  of  a book  before  applying  for  it. 
Canon  of  Context  voted  for  its  retention  in  the  then  prevailing  Context. 
Publisher*s  name  too  was  somewhat  helpful  in  evaluating  a book  without 
seeing  it.  But  the  place  of  publication  and  price  were  hardly  relevant  to 
the  needs  of  either  the  reader  or  of  the  staff.  Publisher's  catalogue  gave  this 
information.  Hie  staff  had  an  additional  source  in  tl^  accession  register. 
These  details  are  necessary  in  catalogues  of  publishers  and  book-sellers, 
the  accession  register,  and  certain  other  forms  of  bibliography  such 
as  a National  Bibliography.  But  they  are  not  necessary  in  the  library 
catalogue  of  a Service-Library.  In  the  long  run,  they  may  even  amount  to 
wrong  information.  In  spite  of  this,  the  back-log  of  an  earlier  context  is 
still  persisting  in  practice,  unmindful  of  the  Canon  of  Context.  This  back-log 
of  the  Incunabula  Age  should  not  be  allowed  today  to  enter  the  catalogue 
of  any  Service-Library.  The  Catalogue  of  a National  Central  Library,  serving 
also  as  the  National  Bibliography,  is  the  only  library  catalogue  where  such 
details  should  be  continued. 


3 CcHitext  of  Open  Access 

A further  change  has  now  occurred  in  the  Context.  This  change  lies  in 
the  domain  of  the  organisation  of  a library.  It  is  the  introduction  of  Open 
Access  System.  Now  the  barrier  between  the  reader  and  the  book  collection 
has  been  removed  except  in  the  case  of  pamphlets,  weakly-built  books,  and 
rare  or  costly  books.  These  form  only  a fraction  of  the  collection  of  a 
Service-Library.  A book  within  direct  access  to  reader  docs  not  need  the 
mention  of  its  format,  collation  etc,  in  its  catalogue  entry.  The  Canon 
of  Context  recommends  a device  such  as  that  the  catalogue  should  indicate  a 
pamphlet  by  a simple  device  like  underlining  the  book  number;  similarly  it 
may  indicate  an  over-size  book  by  over-lining  the  book  number,  and  so  on; 
for,  books  of  these  kinds  arc  not  given  open  access.  The  implication  of  the 
Canon  of  Context  is  that,  in  the  entries  of  any  book,  other  than  those  to  which 
open  access  cannot  be  given,  all  items,  other  than  name(s)  of  author(s),  title 
with  puff  omitted,  note  giving  series  or  certain  other  peculiarities  prescribed 
by  the  Canon  of  Sought-Heading,  call  number,  and  accession  number,  should 
be  omitted  from  the  main  entry  of  the  catalogue  of  a Ser/ice-Library.  The 
Classified  Catalogue  Code  was  one  of  the  Erst  codes  to  cut  out  items  other 
than  the  above,  quite  ruthlessly  in  a library  catalogue.  It  may  however  be 
added  that  if  centrally-printed  catalogue  card  is  used,  the  Unit  Card  System 
may  come  into  force.  It  will  be  printed  by  the  National  Central  Library, 
It  will  be  a reprint  from  the  Main  Entry  of  the  National  Bibliography.  There- 
fore, it  will  have  to  be  allowed  to  have  all  the  bibliographical  details  needed 
in  the  National  Bibliography.  For,  it  is  cheaper  to  use  the  same  card  both 
for  the  National  Central  Library  and  for  a Service-Library. 

48 


CANON  OT  CONTEXT  BF5 

The  Context  of  Open  Access  will  also  reduce  annotation  to  catalogue- 
entries  to  a minimum^  and  perhaps  even  eliminate  it. 

4 Expectation  of  Life  of  a Book 

To-day  the  demand  for  simplification  is  reinforced  by  another  factor  in  the 
Context.  Books  are  plentiful  and  cheap.  Only  a small  percentage  have 
permanent  value.  Thus,  the  preciousness  of  books  as  permanent  possession 
has  diminished  considerably.  Furth^,  democracy  circulates  the  library 
copy  of  a book  through  many  hands.  Therefore,  books  perish  rapidly  by 
legitimate  use.  We  have  begun  to  realise  that  a book  is  a mortal,  though  the 
work  embodied  in  it  may  be  immortal.  Except  in  a comparatively  small 
percentage  of  works  which  form  the  classics  of  permanent  value,  even  the 
thought-content  of  a work  is  soon  out-moded.  And  in  the  case  of  some 
works,  the  thought-content  becomes  even  quite  wrong  in  course  of  time. 
A copy  of  a book  embodying  such  out-moded  and  wrong  thought-content 
may  be  necessary  in  a few  libraries,  in  order  to  serve  the  interest  of  historical 
and  antiquarian  research.  Perhaps,  it  should  be  sufficient  to  have  copies  of 
such  out-moded  works  in  one  domiitary  library  in  each  country  or  in  each 
constituent  State,  or  in  a few  regions  of  each  country.  In  a Service-Library, 
such  books  are  not  only  a burden,  but  they  may  even  be  a social  danger. 
Because,  the  lower  intellectual  strata  in  a democracy  may  not  be  able  to  sense 
the  erroneousness  of  the  information  or  the  knowledge  given  in  such  books. 

I usually  high-light  this  new  element  in  the  Context  by  the  provocative  state- 
ment : “The  expectation  of  life  of  a modem  book  is  only  ten  years.  A Service- 
Library  hoarding  books,  over  ten  years  old,  is  punishable  for  one  or  other 
of  two  reasons.  Either  it  has  neglected  to  circulate  the  book  properly  as  is 
evident  from  its  being  not  worn  out  sufficiently  and  reduced  to  pulp  by  legiti- 
mate use  to  make  its  being  weeded  out  a necessity;  or  it  is  retaining  a book 
embodying  out-of-date  knowledge  and  exposing  it  to  use  by  the  public. 
Either  of  these  is  a social  danger.  If  the  work  as  well  as  the  book  embodying 
it  are  of  fleeting  value,  there  is  no  harm  in  weeding  the  book  out  in  ten 
years.  If  the  work  is  immortal  and  its  body  perishes  by  actual  use,  one  will 
have  to  withdraw  it  in  ten  years  and  replace  it  by  a fresh  copy;  moreover, 
its  very  lasting  value  will  enable  it  to  come  again  in  a new  embodiment. 
In  that  case,  it  is  wiser  to  replace  it  by  a later  edition.*’  We  can  generally 
grant  that  the  span  of  life  of  a book  of  to-day  is  limited,  even  though 
the  work  embodied  in  it  may  have  unlimited  span  of  life.  This  context 
makes  one  scrutinfese  severely  the  cost  of  cataloguing.  It  calls  for  simp- 
lification of  catalogue  entry.  A revision  of  Catalogue  Code  becomes 
necessary. 

5 New  Demand  in  Literature-Search 

Intensification  and  extension  of  research  activity  in  the  community  creates 
new  demands  on  the  catalogue.  Over-all  economy  in  the  man-power  of  a 
nation  calls  for  a new  division  of  labour.  There  should  be  no  dissipation  of 
research-potential.  For  this,  a new  division  of  labour  is  necessary  among 

49 


BFS  CLA^mm  catalogue  code 

the  intellectuals.  In  this  new  division  of  labour,  the  Library  Profession  should 
relieve  the  other  professions  of  the  task  of  literature-search.  The  librarian 
^ould  become  a partner  in  every  research  enterprise.  Moreover,  the 
tremendous  turbtdance  in  the  universe  of  knowledge  of  today  throws  a heavy 
burden  on  the  library  Profession  engaged  in  literature-search.  The  search, 
moreover,  has  to  be  expeditious.  To  discharge  this  r)cw  function,  the  Library 
Profession  has  to  throw  a new  burden  on  the  library  catalogue.  Subject^ 
analyticals  have  to  be  multiplied,  in  order  to  bring  to  the  notice  of  the  reader 
even  micro  thought  embodied  in  articles  in  periodicals  and  in  portions  of 
books,  in  the  measure  of  his  interest  in  them.  Many  libraries  have  begun 
to  practise  this— particularly  research,  industrial,  commercial,  and  govern- 
mental libraries,  and  even  public  libraries. 

6 Effect  of  Intematioiial  Bibliograpby 

Another  change  has  come  in  the  Context.  It  has  been  brought  about  by 
the  pressure  of  the  economics  of  cataloguing  service.  There  is  much  un» 
favourable  disproportion  between  the  cost  of  subject-analyticals  and  the  extent 
of  their  use.  However,  the  social  value  of  even  limited  use  is  immense. 
A .reconciliation  of  these  two  conflicting  findings  should  be  found.  It  has 
been  found.  It  is  the  publication  of  subject  bibliographies  as  an  international 
project.  This  change  in  the  Context  does  make  the  Catalogue  Code  add  a 
directive  that  subject-analyticals  should  not  be  attempted  wholesale  by  a 
Library  Catalogue  in  the  fields  of  knowledge  provided  ^yith  international 
bibliographies. 


7 Effect  of  National  Docnmientation 

But  there  is  an  unavoidable  time-lag  between  the  appearance  of  a document 
and  its  mention  in  international  bibliography.  This  is  unavoidable  on  account 
of  the  problems  created  by  the  space  to  be  covered  and  by  the  needs  of  pro- 
cessing. During  the  interval  of  this  time-lag,  a Service-Library  cannot  fail 
or  fumble  about  in  its  literature-search.  The  failure  here  is  particularly 
anti-social.  Because,  it  is  nascent  micro  thought  that  counts  in  research. 
Here  again,  the  pressure  of  the  economics  of  cataloguing  comes  into  play. 
This  pressure  too  has  been  removed  by  a new  development  coming  into 
vogue  just  at  this  time.  A temporary  '‘documentation  list”  is  being  published 
by  a nation.  For  this  purpose,  nation  after  nation  has  begun  to  establish  a 
National  Documentation  Centre.  It  scans  all  the  periodicals  produced  in 
the  country  or  taken  into  the  country.  It  classifies  the  afitiefes.  It  publishes 
a classified  list  of  them  week  by  week.  The  Context  changes  with  its  establish- 
ment. The  Canon  of  Context  is  sensitive  to  this  change.  It  tells  individual 
Service-Libraries  “Don’t  attempt  subject-analyticals  in  duplication  of  entries 
in  national  documentation  lists.”  It  also  tells  the  National  Documentation 
Centre,  “Remember  that  your  documentation  list  is  only  for  temporary  use. 
It  will  soon  be  replaced  by  the  fully  comprehensive  international  bibliographies 
in  the  diverse  subjects.  Don’t  waste  your  resources  in  making  your  docu- 
mentation list  exhaustive.  Know  what  work  is  in  progress  in  your  country. 

50 


CANON  OF  CONTCH*  BF8 

Xndude,  in  your  documentation  list»  only  the  title  justified  by  this 
Context.*’  \ 

8 Other  CSiaiiges  in  Context 

The  world  of  books  is  not  static.  Context  is  ever-changing.  Nature  of 
book  changes.  Make  up  of  title-pas^  changes.  Nature  of  readers  changes. 
Out-look  of  library  service  changes.  Extent  of  national  and  international 
co-operation  changes.  The  Canon  of  Context  demands  that  cataloguing 
practice  should  also  change.  For  this  purpose,  it  demands  that  Catalogue 
Code  too  should  change  in  consonance  with  the  change  in  the  other  factors. 
When  the  standard  for  Entry  Statement  for  Author,  recommended  in  Sec 
FL71  to  FL78  comes  into  vogue,  many  of  the  Rules  in  the  current  Catalogue 
Codes,  in  regard  to  the  rendering  of  names  of  authors,  will  have  to  be  omitted. 
Probably  about  60  pages  of  this  code  will  be  replaced  by  a Rule  of  a few  lines. 
(See  Rule  Cl).  Several  others  will  have  to  be  changed.  New  ones  will  have 
to  be  added. 

The  refrain  of  the  Canon  of  Context  in  its  application  to  Library  Catalogue 
and  to  Library  Catalogue  Code  is: 

Ever  becoming,  ever  new. 

51^  !T!ft  I 


51 


CHAPTER  BG 


CANON  OF  PERMANENCE 

0 Canon  of  Pennanence.— The  principle  that  no  element  in  an 
entry,  the  heading  in  particular,  should  be  subjected  to  change  by 
the  Rules  of  a Catalogue  Code,  except  when  the  Rules  themselves 
are  changed  in  response  to  the  Canon  of  Context. 

The  Canon  of  Pennanence  and  the  Canon  of  AscertainabDity  work  in 
unison.  Alternative  names  are  left  to  the  care  of  Cross  Reference  Index 
Entries.  Change  of  name  of  a person  or  of  a corporate  body  is  not  allowed 
to  ask  for  a change  in  the  Heading  of  any  entry  of  any  book  published  under 
the  old  name.  The  Classified  Catalogue  Code  has  framed  its  Rules  on  the 
cataloguing  of  periodical  publications,  for  the  first  time,  in  such  a way  that 
the  Canon  of  Permanence  in  cataloguing  and  the  Canon  for  Filiatory  Sequence 
[RC6J  in  classification  are  both  respected  simultaneously. 


52 


CHAPTER  BH 


CANON  OF  CURRENCY 

0 CunoQ  of  Currency.— The  principle  that  the  term  used  to 
denote  a subject  in  a Class  Index  Entry  of  a Classified  Catalogue 
and  in  a Subject  Entry  of  a Dictionary  Catalogue  should  be  the 
one  in  current  usage. 


1 Conflict  Canons 

Name  of  subject  keeps  changing  widi  time.  Unless  the  current  name  is 
used  in  the  heading,  readers  cannot  benefit  by  it.  To  satisfy  this  Canon, 
the  headings  of  Class  Index  Entries  and  of  Subject  Entries  idiould  be  changed 
as  and  when  a new  name  stabilises  itself.  This  leads  inevitably  to  a violation 
of  the  Canon  of  Permanence.  This  conflict  between  the  two  Canons  is 
resolved  by  a partition  of  the  field  of  sway.  The  Canon  of  Cvmncy  has 
sway  only  over  Class  Index  Heading  in  Classified  Catalogue  and  over  Subject* 
Heading  in  Dictionary  Catalogue.  The  Canon  of  Permanence  has  sway  only 
over  Name-Heading  other  than  Subject-Heading.  It  has  sway  only  in  a 
heading  made  of  name  of  person,  geographical  entity,  or  corporate  body. 

2 Dilemma 

The  Canon  of  Currency  has  to  face  a dilemma.  The  question  is,  “Current 
among  whom  ?“  For,  two  different  terms  may  be  current  at  the  same  time 
among  specialists  and  non-specialists  to  denote  one  and  the  same  subject. 
The  first  belongs  to  the  special  terminology  built  up  by  the  specialists  them- 
selves. The  second  belongs  to  the  natural  language  spoken  by  the  common 
man.  The  general  tendency  is  to  prefer  the  term  in  natural  language.  This 
preference  often  leads  to  a multi-worded  term  in  natural  language  in  pre- 
ference to  a single-worded  term  in  specialist  language,  e g,  “Child,  Medicine*’ 
in  preference  to  **Pediatrics“.  In  spite  of  the  increase  in  the  number  of 
words  to  be  used,  natural  language  is  preferred.  This  is  due  to  the  pressure 
of  the  Second  Law  of  Library  Science  [RF3].  According  to  it,  a specialist 
reader  knows  thetommon  name  as  well  as  the  technical  name  of  a subject. 
The  non-specialist  reader  knows  only  the  common  name;  he  does  not  know 
the  technical  name.  Moreover,  the  specialist  has  a highly  organised  perso- 
nality; he  has  greater  intellectual  awareness  and  agility.  If  he  does  not  find 
a technical  name  in  the  headings,  he  will  look  up  its  popular  equivalent. 
It  is  not  so  with  the  common  reader.  Therefore,  to  serve  every  reader  without 
exception,  common  name  should  be  preferred  to  special  terminology,  in 
Subject  Heading.  This  is  the  joint  finding  of  the  Canon  of  Currency  and  the 
Second  Law  of  Library  Science  as  a helpful  way  of  getting  out  of  the  dilemma* 

53 


CHAPTER  BJ 


' CANON  OF  CONSISTENCE 

0  Canon  df  Consistence.— The  principle  that 

1 The  rales  of  a Catalogue  Code  should  provide  for  all 
the  added  entries  of  a document  to  be  consistent  with  its  Main 
Entry;  and 

2 The  entries  of  all  documents  should  be  consistent  with 
one  another  in  certain  essentials  such  as  choice,  rendering,  and 
style  of  writing  the  heading  and  the  other  sections. 

The  Canon  of  Consistence  does  insist  that  the  Main  Entry  of  all  documents 
should  be  of  the  same  species.  For  example,  in  a Dictionary  Catalogue 
the  main  entry  should  be  an  Author  Entry  in  ail  cases.  It  should  not  be  a 
Subject  Entry. 

We  should  not  make  one  species  of  entry  take  the  place  of  another.  Again 
a catalogue  code  should  not  prescribe  for  the  heading  of  one  and  the  same 
entry,  Main  Heading  and  Sub*Heading  of  different  species,  such  as  Author 
Heading  and  Subject  Sub-Heading.  But  this  canon  is  violated  by  some  of  the 
Rules  of  the  Anglo-American  Code,  as  shown  in  the  Heading  and  canons 
[RH3], 


54 


PART  C 


GENERAL  NORMATIVE  PRINCIPLES 


CHAPTER  CA 


LAWS  OF  UBRARY  SCIENCE 

0  Laws  of  LOnrary  Science.— The  spedlic  normative  principles 
applicable  to  any  problem  arising  in  library  science,  library 
service,  and  library  practice. 

1 First  Law:— Books  are  for  Use. 

2 Second  Law: — ^Every  Reader  His  Book. 

3 Third  Law:— Every  Book  Its  Reader. 

4 Fourth  Law: — Save  the  Time  of  the  Reader. 

41  Corrollary  to  the  Fourth  Law:— Save  the  Time  of  the  Staff. 

5 Fifth  Law Library  is  a Growing  Organism. 

1 Fundamental  Laws 

There  are  Five  Laws  of  Library  Science  formulated  so  far.  They  were  first 
formulated  in  Madras  in  1928.  In  1931,  they  were  first  published  in  a book 
[RFl]  along  with  an  exposition  of  their  implications. 

These  Laws  are  the  Fundamental  Laws  of  Library  Science.  These  form 
the  Normative  Principles  containing  in  a latent  form  all  the  library  practices 
current  at  any  time  and  to  be  evolved  at  a later  time.  A new  chapter  in  its 
second  edition  [RF8]  published  in  1957  shows  how  some  of  its  implications 
not  current  in  library  practice  a quarter  of  a century  ago,  have  now  become 
current  to  suit  the  boundary  conditions  of  Library  Service  set  up  by  the 
pressure  of  the  social  concepts  of  to-day.  In  particular,  the  term  "*Book*’ 
should  be  generalised  in  the  present-day  context  to  mean  a "^Document” 
as  defined  and  elaborated  in  the  Rules  of  Chap  FE. 

2 Final  Court  of  Appeal 

The  Canons  of  Cataloguing  given  in  Part  B are  all  implications  of  the 
Five  Laws,  specific  to  the  sphere  of  cataloguing.  If  any  conflict  arises  betwe^ 
the  Canons,  it  is  resolved  by  an  appeal  to  the  Five  Laws.  If  a cataloguing 
problem  exceeds  the  capacity  of  the  Canons,  an  appeal  is  made  to  the  Five 
Laws  to  suggest  a solution.  But  we  do  not  invoke  the  Five  Laws  on  the 
occasions  in  which  the  Canons  can  manage  the  situation.  The  Five  Laws 
are  like  the  Head  of  a State,  in  whose  name  and  on  whose  authority,  every 
government  action  is  done  by  the  ministers  and  the  secretaries,  without  his 
explicit  and  immediate  intervention.  The  Five  Laws  are  like  Lord  Namyana, 
resting  in  his  fiowery  float  on  the  Ocean  of  Milk,— ever-watchful  and  ever-alert, 
but  abstaining  from  visible  intervention  except  when  the  laws  of  the  universe 
are  over-powered  by  the  happenings  in  the  universe  not  anticipated  by  them, 

57 


CA3  CLASSIFIK)  CATALOGUE  CODE 

S Agency  fof  ConiiNromiee 

It  occasionafiy  happens  that  the  Canons  of  Cataloguing  come  into  conflict 
with  certain  general  Normative  Principles,  such  as  those  given  in  the  later 
Chapters  of  this  Part.  On  such  occasions,  a compromise  is  elliscted  in  the 
light,  and  with  the  aid,  of  the  Five  Laws  of  Library  Science. 


58 


CHAPTER  CB 


LAWS  OF  INTERPRETATION 

0 Laws  of  Interpretatioii.— The  well-known  principles  of  inter* 
pretation,  such  as  the  1,008  principles  of  interpretation  listed  in  the 
Nyaya-kosa  [Jl], 


1  AppUcati<«  to  Cataloaue  Code 

These  principles  have  been  evolved  to  a remarkable  extent  by  the  philo- 
sophers of  the  Purva-Mimamsa  and  the  Nyaya  Schools  of  Indian  philosophy. 
In  law  too,  such  principles  are  applied  necessarily.  A Catalogue  Code  is 
like  a legal  document.  Any  Rule  in  it  should  be  interpreted  like  a legal  text. 
For  example,  there  may  be  conflict  between  one  Rule  and  another.  In  actual 
application,  the  conflict  should  be  resolved  with  the  aid  of  the  Laws  of  Inter- 
pretation. A new  cataloguing  problem  created  by  a document  may  have  to 
be  met  by  a proper  interpretation  of  the  Rules  in  the  Catalogue  Code.  Periodi- 
cally, the  Rules  should  be  amended  ig  the  light  of  experience,  so  as  to  remove 
conflicts  or  at  least  to  reduce  them  to  a minimum,  if  they  could  not  be  totally 
removed.  It  is  the  application  of  the  Laws  of  Interpretation  that  led  to  a 
revision  of  the  definition  of  Composite  Book  and  to  the  concept  of  Pseudo- 
Series.  One  of  the  Laws  of  Interpretation  is  called  “Lost-horse,  Burnt- 
chariot**  Principle.  Its  application  in  the  held  of  classification  occurs  in  the 
article  Classification  of  allusion  books  [RZS]. 

2  Resolution  of  Conflict 

There  is  often  conflict  between  the  Law  of  Parsimony,  the  Laws  of  Library 
Science,  and  the  Canons  of  Cataloguing.  The  conflict  has  to  be  removed 
quite  often  with  the  aid  of  the  Laws  of  Interpretation.  One  of  the  Laws  of 
Interpretation,  for  example,  is  this:  The  claim  of  the  normative  principles 
special  to  the  business  on  hand — cataloguing,  in  this  case — should  be  given 
greater  weightage  than  a normative  principle  of  general  application— say,  a 
Law  of  Library  Science.  Conflict  may  arise  between  one  Law  of  Library 
Science  and  another  in  framing  a particular  Rule  in  Catalogue  Code.  The 
Fifth  Law— Librarjws  a Growing  Organism — often  sides  the  Law  of  Parsimony 
and  gets  into  conflict  with  the  other  Laws  of  Library  Science.  If  possible, 
a compromise  has  to  be  arrived  at  in  every  such  case  of  conflict.  If  a com- 
promise is  not  at  all  possible  the  principle  of  “the  later  the  law,  the  greater 
its  weightage*’  is  applied. 


3  Subject  for  Thesis 

It  has  been  an  unfulfliled  ambition  to  scrutinise  the  entire  Classifled  Cata- 
logue Code  from  the  angle  of  the  Laws  of  Interpretation.  My  friend  Maha- 

.59 


CB3  CLASSIFIBD  CATALOGUE  CODE 

mahopadhyaya  Professor  S Kuppuswamy  Sastry  was  an  eminent  speciaHst 
in  the  subject.  He  and  myself  had  intended  to  t^e  up  such  a scrutiny  of  the 
Classified  Catalogue  Code,  after  both  of  us  would  retire  from  the  salary* 
earning  stage  of  life.  But,  alas,  he  died  before  1 could  retire.  I then  soufibt 
to  do  the  work  in  collaboration  with  a student  of  his.  But  it  did  not  mature. 
The  application  of  the  Laws  of  Interpretation  to  the  Classified  Catalogue  Code 
will  be  an  eminent  subject  for  investigation  by  an  aspirant  to  a Doctorate  in 
Library  Science. 


60 


CHAPTER  CC 


LAW  OF  IMPARTIALITY 

0 Law  of  Impartiality. — The  principle  that  between  two  or 
more  claimants — say,  for  use  as  heading — ^the  preference  of 
any  one  should  be  made  only  on  sufficient  grounds,  and  not 
arbitrarily. 

1  Joint  AuUiorslilp 

For  example,  in  the  case  of  joint  authorship,  the  Law  of  Impartiality  would 
recommend  equal  right  to  the  names  of  all  the  authors  for  choice  as  heading. 

2  Multiple  Series 

Again,  a book  may  belong  to  more  than  one  publisher’s  series.  The  Law 
of  Impartiality  would  recommend  equal  right  to  each  of  the  series  to  have  a 
note  devoted  to  itself.  Further,  as  a consequence  of  this,  this  Law  would 
recommend  equal  right  to  the  names  of  each  of  the  series  for  choice  as  heading 
for  a book  index  entry  of  its  own.  (See  Examples  1 to  S in  Sec  MK232). 

3  Locus  Statement 

Here  is  another  example.  The  locus  of  a micro  document  has  to  be  given 
both  in  the  case  of  a Cross  Reference  Entry  and  of  an  entry  in  indexing  or 
abstracting  periodical.  The  locus  consists  of  the  name  of  a host  document 
and  often  also  of  the  exact  part,  chapter,  section  or  page  of  occurence  in  the 
host  document.  The  punctuation  marks  to  be  used  in  the  locus  section  should 
be  along  similar  lines  in  tlic  case  of  either  class  of  entry  according  to  the 
Law  of  Impartiality. 


61 


CHAPTER  CD 


LAW  OF  SYMMETRY 

0 Law  of  Symmetry.—The  principle  that  of  two  entities  or 
situations  which  admit  of  being  regarded  as  symmetrical  counter*^ 
parts  of  each  other,  if  one  of  the  entities  or  the  situations  is  given 
weight  in  any  particular  context,  the  other  entity  or  situation 
should  also  be  given  a corresponding  weight. 

1  Joint  Attthorsliip 

For  Example:  Let  us  consider  a book  of  two  joint  authors.  In  the  heading 
of  the  main  entry,  we  are  obliged  to  write  Jhe  names  of  the  two  authors  in 
the  sequence  in  which  they  occur  on  the  title  page.  As  a result  of  this,  there 
will  be  a book  index  entry  using  as  heading  the  names  of  the  two  authors  in 
the  same  sequence.  But  considerations  of  symmetry  would  make  us  write 
another  book  index  entry  using  the  names  of  the  two  authors  in  the  reverse 
sequence.'  (See  examples  7 and  8 in  Sec  MK  21 1). 

2  Concurrent  Prescription 

In  this  type  of  cases,  the  prescription  of  the  Law  of  Symmetry  is  concur- 
rent with  the  prescription  of  the  Canon  of  SoughMIeading  formulated  in 
Chap  BE.  The  difference  between  the  Law  of  Impartiality  and  the  Law  of 
Symmetry  is  somewhat  subtle.  A little  thought  will  however  show  that  they 
are  not  identical. 


3  Conflict  with  Law  of  Parsimony 

Conflict  may  arise  often  between  the  Law  of  Impartiality  and  the  Law  of 
Symmetry  on  the  one  side  and  the  Law  of  Parsimony  on  the  other.  It  will 
require  a considerable  judgement  to  resolve  the  conflict  in  actual  cataloguing 
work. 


62 


CHAPTER  CE 


LAW  OF  PARSIMONY 

0 Law  of  Pardmony.— The  principle  that  between  two  or  more 
possible  alternative  rules  bearing  on  a particular  phenomenon,  the 
one,  leading  to  ov^all  economy  of  man-power,  material,  money, 
and  time  considered  together  with  proper  weightage,  is  to 
prderred. 


1 Sobering  the  Chain  Procedure 

The  sobering  effect  of  the  Law  of  Parsimony  of  the  Chain  Procedure  has 
been  described  in  Sec  BE7. 

2 Pruning  According  to  Context 

The  Alternative-Name  Entries*  the  special  notes  in  the  Main  Entry  and 
their  Associated  Added  Entries,  the  Cross  Reference  Entries  in  a Classified 
Catalogue,  the  Subject-Analyticals  in  a Dictionary  Catalogue,  the  Class 
Index  Entries  in  a Classified  Catalogue  and  the  See  also  Subject  Entries  in  a 
Dictionary  Catalogue  promoted  by  the  Canon  of  Sought-Heading,  may  swell 
to  disproportionate  dimensions,  unless  the  answer  to  the  question,  ‘Ts  it 
truly  a Sought-Entry  V is  considered  with  great  care.  The  Law  of  Parsimony 
would  ask  for  considerable  pruning.  This  pruning  can  be  done  to  an  appreci- 
able extent  with  the  aid  of  the  Canon  of  Context  explained  in  Chap  BF  and 
its  commentaries. 


3  Printed  vs  Written  Card 

The  Law  of  Parsimony  would  make  a fundamental  difference  in  the  Rules 
about  Specific  Added  Entries,  according  as  the  catalogue  card  is  printed 
or  machine  duplicated,  or  typed  (or  hand-written).  In  the  former  case,  it 
would  recommend  the  Unit-Card-System.  In  this,  a copy  of  the  Main  Entry 
Card  itself  would  be  used  as  any  Specific  Added  Entry  Card,  by  merely  insert- 
ing in  the  Leading  Section  the  heading  of  the  Added  Entry.  For  this  purpose, 
the  first  line  of  th#  printed  card  should  be  left  vacant.  On  the  other  hand, 
if  the  catalogue  card  is  typed  or  hand-written,  the  Law  of  Parsimony  would 
recommend  a Multiple-Card-System.  In  this,  each  Added  Entry  would 
have  only  the  minimum  information  necessary  to  satisfy  the  Canon  of  Context.^ 
To  achieve  this,  the  Law  of  Parsimony  would  allow  a number  of  additional 
Rules  in  the  Catalogue  Code  to  take  care  of  the  different  kinds  of  Added 
Entries.  Such  additional  Rules  for  Specific  Added  Entries  would  prescribe 
omission  of  Series  Note  and  Accession  Number,  shortening  of  Title,  and 
shortening  of  every  other  category  not  acting  as  a link  between  a Specific 

63 


CE3  CXAIKipPIED  CATALOGUE  CODE 

Added  Butty  aiid  its  Main  Entry.  Ifot  emmide.  in  fla  CTauM^  r>*«try^/' 
Rules  would  inovide  for  the  omission,  in  the  Second  Se^on  of  « 

Added  Entry,  of  the  Individualising  Etemmts  added  to  tibe  Author’s  Name 
in  the  Heading  of  the  Main  Entry. 


64 


CHAPTER  CF 


PRINCIPLE  OF  LOCAL  VARIATION 

0  Prindple  of  Local  Variation.  —The  principle  that  ^ 

1 The  International  Catalogue  Code  should  mark  out 
factors  to  be  left  to  the  care  ot each  National  Catalogue  Code; 

2 A National  Catalogue  Code  should  mark  out  the  factoit 
to  be  left  to  the  care  of  each  Linguistic  Catalogue  Code  in  a multi«> 
lingual  country  such  as  India; 

3 A National  Catalogue  Code  or  a Linguistic  CatalogtH)i 
Code,  as  the  case  may  be,  should  mark  out  the  factors,  to  be  left 
to  the  care  of  the  Local  Catalogue  Code  of  each  individual  library; 

4 The  Catalogue  Codes  in  each  hierarchical  line  should  be 
consistent  with  one  another  without  any  mutual  contradiction;  and 

5 Each  lower  link  in  each  hierarchical  line  should  be  a 
Supplement  to  all  the  upper  links  taken  together. 

1 Intimacy  Inherent  in  Service 

Catalogue  is  a tool  f^r  a reader  to  find  out  his  requirement  in  the  library. 
It  is  an  important  tool  in  library  service.  Intimacy  characterises  service. 
Intimacy  underlines  the  individuating  particularities  in  the  reader-library 
setting.  The  catalogue  is  a medium  of  communication  in  this  intimate  setting. 
Thus,  local  colour  should  be  inherent  in  library  catalogue.  A library , catgut 
logue  does  have  to  conform  to  a pattern  conceivable  in  abstract.  The  pattern 
should  also  be  prescribed  in  abstract.  But  to  invest  it  with  the  intimacy 
Inherent  in  service,  it  should  be  impressed  with  the  essential  local  colour. 
This  is  the  message  of  the  Principle  of  Local  Variation.  This  local  colour 
to  be  assumed  by  the  library  catalogue  in  successive  stages.  Three  or  four^ 
stages  are  unmistakable — ^International,  National,  Linguistic,  and  Local. 
Corresponding  to  each  stage  there  should  be  a different  catalogue  cotfe, 
consistent  with  the  code  corresponding  to  each  of  the  earlier  stages.  The 
International  ( atalogue  Code  gives  only  a general  blue  print,  as  it  were. 

2 Languages  and  Their  Reconciliation  , 

Difference  in  language  will  be  the  first  point  of  deviation  from  the  Inter* 
national  Code.  It  has  been  shown  in  Library  catalogue:  Fundamentals  and 
procedure  that  the  Language  of  the  Heading  in  a Catalogue  Entry  is  an  aiti* 
ficial  language  [RL5].  Its  syntax  is  different  from  that  of  any  Natural 
Language.  It  generally  admits  of  nouns  only,— with  the  exception  thqt.  \\h  • 
a language  has  no  single  word  to  denote  an  ^ 

«7 


5 


OASmm  CATAU)OUB  CODE 


cp4 

Imve  to  admit  a nemo  qmdified  by  an  adiective— as  for  example^  **DiMtive 
to  denote  the  functional  organ  concerned.  Again  the  nouns  in  tiite 
ifaading  should  be  in  the  notninadve  case.  But  the  title-page  in  some  of  the 
languages  such  as  Sanskrit  and  Russian  give  the  names  of  authors  and  col- 
lahorators  in  the  instrumental  case.  Therefore  the  Lingoistlc  Catalogue 
Code  in  such  a language  should  give  an  appropriate  note  under  Sec 
The  punctuation  system  of  the  artificial  language  of  Headings  is  also  artificial, 
linguistic  Variation  should  be  allowed  in  respect  of  punctuation. 

3  Style  of  Writliig  and  Prints 

The  style  of  writing  or  printing  the  elements  in  a catalogue  entry  depends 
on  the  script  and  the  type-faces  available.  For  example,  Roman  character 
admits  of  upper  case,  lower  case,  and  italics)  It  admits  also  of  antique  face 
and  small  capitals.  Even  when  written  by  hand,  it  is  possible  to  have  cor- 
responding varieties.  ""pBut  many  of  the  Indian  characters  do  not  admit  of  all 
of  them.  As  it  is  to-day,  we  have  to  have  recourse  only  to  white  and  black, 
and  variation  of  matra  (size).  ]^e  International  Catalogue  Code  should 
therefore  deal  with  style,  only  in  g^ral  terms— of  dominance,  subordination, 
and  the  like.  The  actual  method  of  implementing  these  prescriptions  will 
have  to  be  stated  only  in  a National  Catalogue  Code  or  a Linguistic  Catalogue 
Code  as  the  case  may  be;\  The  importance  and  inevitability  of  a Linguistic 
Code  providing  its  own  s^ification  for  the  style  of  writing  was  realised  in 
a compelling  way  while  compiling  a Tamil  Bibliography  [RZM].  In  this 
sense,  either  of  these  has  to  fill  up  some  details  in  the  blue  print  sketched  by 
the  International  Catalogue  Code.  Thus  the  Principle  of  Local  Variatioii 
has  sway  over  this  problem. 

4  ArrangeiBent  of  Entries 

The  arrangement  of  word-entries  is  intimately  bound  up  with  the  style  of 
writing  and  printing,  At  any  rate,  it  is  desirable  that  they  should  be  so  lx>und 
up. . ' As  the  Rules  on  the  Style  of  Writing  and  Printing  have  to  be  left  to  the 
care  of  a National  Catalogue  Code  or  Linguistic  Catalogue  Code,  the  Rtileq 
on  the  Arrangement  of  Word-Entries  should  also  be  left  to  its  care.  Thus, 
the  Principle  of  Local  Variation  )ias  sway  over  this  problem. 

5  Rendering  of  Personal  Names 

|At  present,  certain  National  Catalogue  Codes  claiming  international  status 
presume  competence  to  prescribe  rules  for  the  rendering,  irt  heading,  of  a 
Name-of-Person  of  any  culture  whatever.  This  is  attempting  the  impossible. 
Considerable  research  awaits  to  be  done  to  delimit  the  boundary  of  the 
International  Catalogue  Code  in  this  respect.)  The  first  step  in  this  direction 
was  taken  by  Unesco  through  its  International  Advisory  Committee  on 
Bibliography  in  1952.  In  1951,  the  Indian  Library  Association  and  the 
Indian  National  Commission  for  Unesco  accepted  a resolution  of  mine  to 
Unesco  to  make  the  rendering  of  Asian  names  the  subject  of  one  of 
' • 1 -^-niects.  This  wqs.dope.  The  task  was  in  the  end  en- 


64 


imCNC^tfi  Of  t^OCAL 

truflM  to  n»*  Tbk  gftve  me  an  o{^;)ortiiiiity  to  ftoe  the  profalejn  s^nateiy, 
Itetdet^  of  this  UoMco  Project  are  giveo  in  Sec  Meetings 

with  several  cultural  grenips  slowly  allowed  some  awareness  to  dawn  on  the 
preMem.  Some  streak  oflight  has  fallen  on  tlie  problem. 

51  Entry  EtaoHnit 

was  the  Canon  of  Ftepotenoe  that  let  the  li^t  in . A modem  Nameof* 
Person  has  many  words.  The  potency  from  the  ankle  of  arrangement  is  not 
eduahy  incident  on  all  the  wor^.  In  many  names>  it  is  greatest  on  one 
Oenerally  speaking,  a prepotent  word  in  the  name  can  be  found, 

an  appreciable  number  of  fases,  potency  is  concentrated  most,  not 

on  one  word,  but  on  a doublet— that  iston  two  words*^  fSometiines  it  is 
$0^  over  even  three  words^  QVhether  a smgle  word  is  prepotent  or  a double 
or  a treble  word  is  prepotent;  it  is  obvious  only  to  a native  of  the  country  to 
^ch  the  name  belongs]  An  alien  cataloguer  cannot  ordinarily  'bcqulxe 
sufficient  competence  in  this  matter.  Even  if  a persevering  cat^oguer  is 
enterprising  enough  to  master  alien  names,  it  is  doubtful  if  he  can  do  it  for 
all  the  foreign  cultural  groups.  If  he  attempts  to  do  it,  he  will  become  a 
specialist  in  cultural  sociology  at  the  cost  of  his  loyalty  and  duty  to  the  library 
Profession  in  general  and  the  Cataloguing  Profession  in  particular.  Our 
experience  with  such  cultural-cum-linguistic  specialists,  functioning  as  cata- 
loguers, confirms  this  fear.  For,  by  the  sheer  impossibility  of  doing  two 
things  at  one  time,  they  are  found  to  be  naturally  un^informed  about  current 
progress  in  the  discipline  of  cataloguing  and  about  the  great  changes  coming 
over  library  service  in  our  own  days.  They  even  show  a tendency  towards 
bigotry  which  denies  even  the  very  existence  of  Library  Science  and  the 
Discipline  of  Cataloguing.  A step  in  the  right  direction  appears  to  be  to 
entrust  the  problem  of  “single-worded  or  multi-worded  entry  element*’  to 
the  care  of  me  respective  National  or  Linguistic  Catalogue  Codes.  It  is  the 
' 4uty  of  each  National  or  Linguistic  Catalogue  Code  to  devise  a method  by 
^^'Which  the  singleness  or  multiplcness  of  the  entry  element  could  be  mechani- 
.saHy  found  out  by  a cataloguer  of  an  alien  culture.  The  most  obvious 
me^od  will  be  to  append  to  the  "^^ational  Catalogue  Code  schedules  of  multi- 
worded  entry  elements,  assumib^  that  these  are  fewer  in  the  cultural  group 
concerned  than  the  single-worded  entry  elements.  Thwe  may  be  less  cumber- 
some methods  available  in  certain  cultural  groups.  For  example,  while 
discussing  this  problem  with  Sinhalese  scholars  in  Ceylon,  the  concept  of 
“Starter  Word”  emerged.  By  a “Starter  Word”  is  meant  a word  which  is  the 
first  of  a mUlti-worded  entry  element.  The  other  words  are  found  to  be  con- 
secutive to  the  Starter  Word,  exactly  as  they  occur  in  the  full  name  as  it  is 
uttered  or  printed  on  title-page.  Perhaps  a reprint  of  such  national  schedules 
may  be  separately  issued  for  use  by  other  national  groups, 

6 Script  and  Transliteratioii 

I 

^ Headings  in  many  catalogue  entries  are  proper  names.  They  are  names  df 
pmois,  geographical  entities,  or  corporate  bodies.  They  do  not 

€f 


word.) 


'tilJ^aSIED  CATALOGUE  CCHSS 

tran^tkm*  Fcv  tihey  aie  terms  of  eKtensi<m«  they  are  not  expressive 
Whatever  be  the  script  used  in  a catalogue  entry*  the  heading  should 
the  i»roper  name  phonetically.  This  indicates  transliteration.^  All  tibe  letters 
of  one  script  do  not  have  phonetic  equivalents  in  another  script.  Ihereforh* 
transliteration  U not  a simple  z^air.)  Till  now,  the  Roman  script  has  bes<ni 
lar^y  pla^g  the  part  of  the  host4cript.  This  has  been  due  to  historical 
circumstances.  For,  the  renaissance  phase  of  the  present  cultural  cycle  ap* 
peared  in  areas  of  Roman  script  a few  centuries  earlier  than  in  areas  of  any 
other  script;  Therefore,  during  the  last  few  centuries,  transliteration  had 
virtually  meant  transli^ration  into  Roman  script.  This  has  become  such 
a rigid  part  of  the  mental  set  of  the  cataloguers  of  the  West  that  the  reverse 
movement  of  transliteration  seems  to  have  very  little  chance  to  be  recognised, 
even  at  international  level.  This  is  again  due  to  a historical  factor.  For, 
international  bodiejyiave  been  all  along  effectively  confined  to  the  memberw 
ship  of  the  West,  ^^erefore,  the  idea  produced  by  reflex  action,  on  hearing 
the  term  transliterati^,  is  that  of  the  Roman  script  as  the  host-script.  Ther^ 
fore,  the  so-called  international  Catalogue  Codes  provide  only^for  one-way 
transliteration.^  This  is  a violence  to  the  Principle  of  Local  Variation.  The 
newly  awakening  countries  have  much  to  do  to  remove  this  violence.  In 
my  recent  experi^ice  with  the  Unesco  Project  on  the  Rendering  of  Asian 
Names,  1 had  found  this  mental  set  in  the  Librarians  of  the  West  too  rigid 
to  be  broken.  They  cannot  dissociate  transliteration  from  rendering.  Nor 
do  they  see  the  reciprocal  feature  of  transliteration.  For  them.  Rendering 
of  Asian  Names  is  mostly  transliteration  in  Roman  script.  This  is  a vexa- 
tious barrier  1 had  met  with  In  many  international  meetings.  The  West 
should  become  a little  more  aware  of  the  “whole  problem**.  Perhaps  it  is 
due  to  the  viscosity  of  the  mental  set  created  in  the  years  of  Western  domi- 
nance that  the  Indian  National  Bibliography  contemplated  the  adoption  , of 
Roman  script.  May  better  sense  dawn  upon  those  responsible  for  this  I 

7 Analytical  Entry 

The  extent  of  the  putting  in  of  subject  analyticals  and  author  analyticals  is 
subject  to  Local  Variation  of  a narrower  variety.  This  is  bound  to  vary  from 
library  to  library.  Therefore  a National  or  an  International  Catalogue  Code 
should  make  the  rules  on  such  entries  permissive,  and  not  compulsory^  The 
Supplementary  Catalogue  Code  of  a library  should  have  rules  defining  their 
permissible  extent  in  more  rigid  terms.  For  example,  a library  in  ludia^ 
need  not  give  analytical  entries  for  essays  in  English,  there  is  the  JSssay 
index  of  Wilson  and  Co.  But  it  should  give  analytical  entries  for  essays  in 
Indian  languages,  until  an  Essay  index  comes  to  be  published  for  them. 

8 Fleeting  Material 

In  a governmental  library  and  in  the  library  of  a business  body  or  an  acade* 
mic  institution,  a large  and  even  exhaustive  collection  may  have  to  be  made 
from  time  to  time,  in  connection  with  a particular  problem  engaging  attention 
at  the  moment.  After  the  problem  is  disposed  of,  the  collection  may  not  have 

68 


m 


PRimFLB  01?  tOCAL  VARlAllbN  CBS 

useiii  tlie  Itbraiy.  A few  yeais  ago,  ^ libmty  of  the  United  Katloi^  bad 
to  anuias  considerable  mat^t  on  the  Palestine  Probim.  After  ^ settle* 
me^  of  die  i»rob]ein»  that  library  could  not  afford  to  continue  to  keep  on  its 
shelves  the  entire  load.  Such  materials  have  only  a limited  period  of  use. 
We  shall  therefore  denote  them  by  the  term  ‘‘Fleeting  Material**.  The 
duration  of  the  accession  as  well  as  of  the  use  of  fleeting  material  may  be  too 
small  to  complete  their  cataloguing  except  by  putting  an  enormous  strength 
of  temporary  staff  on  it.  And  yet,  it  will  all  amount  to  a waste  after  a short 
while.  The  Canon  of  Local  Variation  would  allow  such  Fleetmg  Materials 
to  be  merely  shelf-listed;  perhaps  even  this  would  be  too  much  in  some  cases. 
It  will  be  sufficient  merely  to  arrange  them  on  the  shelves  and  deem  them  to 
stand  **self-catalogued^’  so  to  speak.  This  was,  for  example,  enunciated 
as  follows  by  the  United  Nations  International  Committee  of  Libraiy  Experts 
which  went  into  ‘*the  kinds  of  library  service  required  by  the  United  Nations 
and  the  methods  by  which  such  service  can  be  most  effectively  provided,’* 
during  its  meeting  from  2 to  9 August  1948.  I was  a member  of  that  Com- 
mittee. And  I had  to  stress  hard  this  point  of  Local  Variation  and  Fleeting 
Materials.  This  was  because  I had  seen  mad  proposals  of  librarians  in  India 
that  every  scrap  of  printed  paper  coming  into  the  library  had  an  absolute 
claim  to  a share  of  the  cataloguing  time  of  the  library.  Lay-managements 
are  often  misguided  into  this  absurd  insistence.  The  document  Library 
services  of  the  United  Nations  (Ul)  gives  the  recommendation  of  the  Inter- 
national Committee  in  the  following  terms : 

“No  attempt  should  be  made  to  build  up  the  collections  for  purposes  of 
general  historical  research  beyond  the  needs  of  the  United  Nations.  . . . 
The  library  should  be  free  to  provide  more  summary  treatment  for  much  of 
its  material  and  in  some  categories  may  omit  cataloguing  altogether.’* 

91  Selective  Cataloguing 

^ iEven  in  other  kinds  of  libraries,  the  Principle  of  Local  Variation  will 
presortbe  Selective  Cataloguing.  Materials  used  only  occasionally  may  have 
to  stand  on  the  shelves  or  in  vertical  files,  “self-catalogued”.  For  example, 
my  advice  to  the  Central  Secretariat  Library  in  New  Delhi  was  that  such  a 
treatment  might  be  given  to  the  large  mass  of  annual  reports  and  similar 
documents  of  various  governments  including  those  of  the  United  Nations, 
^ accumulated  for  years  in  that  library.  Ignorance  of  this  has  led  to  the  wastage 
of  the  meagre  library  fund  in  certain  places  and  to  other  kinds  of  havoc 
in  other  places.  At  the  same  time,  they  should  be  properly  classified  and 
catalogued  in  a research  library,  such  as  that  of  the  Gokhale  Institute, 
where  they  form  the  very  basis  of  much  of  the  work  in  the  Institute. 

92  Diffmntial  Rules 

(pother  application  of  the  Principle  of  Local  Variation  is  the  freedom 
given  to  an  individual-  library  or  to  a Local  Catalogue  Code  to  cut  down 
details  rigorously  for  entries  of  certain  kinds  of  materials.!  The  Prussian 


CP92  isuimm  cATAwam  <xm 

instm^im  (0$  gives  tiie  foQowixig  Hsi  of  calegories  of  doetuneius  wlm 
the  applic8lio&  of  sc^^ve  cataloguing  may  be  allovined  in  public  rdfeime 
libraries; 

1 Manuals  for  schools  or  sdfoducation; 

2 Guides  for  elementary  knowledge  including  books  on  sports,^ 

3 Materials  on  domestic  economy  lacking  scientific  intmst; 

4 Popular  informative  books,  especially  in  science,  medicine  and  law; 

5 Instructions  for  non-commissioned  officers  and  privates; 

6 Books  d superstitious  and  occult  content  (!); 

7 Light  reading  materials  and  songs  for  social  purposes; 

8 Juvenile  and  picture  books; 

9 Prayer  and  devotional  books; 

10  Minor  works  of  local  interest  such  as  reports  on  festivities,  exhibition 
catalogues  etc. 

For  these  books,  added  entries  are  almost  omitted,  various  editions  are 
combined  on  the  same  card  and  various  other  simplifications  are  made. 

Again,  cataloguing  may  have  to  be  done  to  different  degrees  of  fullness  for 
different  categories  of  materials.  Mere  shelf-listing  may  be  sufficient  for 
some.  At  the  other  extreme,  for  Incunabula,  for  instance,  detailed  biblio- 
graphical cataloguing  is  necessary.  A Local  Catalogue  Code  must  have  free- 
dom to  adopt  Differential  Rules  for  different  groups  of  materials.  The 
Principle  of  Local  Variation  will  call  for  all  degrees  of  play  of  Selective 
Cataloguing. 


93  Areas  for  Variation 

There  is  need  for  a hierarchy  of  catalogue  codes,  from  the  International 
Code,  through  Regional  and  National  Code,  through  Linguistic  Code, 
to  Local  Code.  There  are  limitations  in  the  competence  of  the  above  suc- 
cessive codes.  Where  a code  is  not  competent  to  lay  down  specific  rules, 
it  should  lay  down  broad  principles  to  guide  the  codes  lower  down  m the 
hierarchical  lines.  The  problems  in  cataloguing  have  all  been  analysed  apd 
found  to  fall  in  ten  levels.  It  is  also  possible  to  allocate  the  different  levels 
to  the  different  members  of  the  hierarchy  [RI2]. 


70 


CHAPTER  CG 


PRINCIPLE  Of  osmosis 

0  Priaciple  of  Osmosis. — ^The  principle  that,  when  a change  in 
the  CaUdogne  Code  or  in  the  Scheme  of  Classification  becomes 
necessary  in  defer^ice  to  the  Canon  of  Context,  on  and  after  a 
chosen  date 

1 All  the  new  accessions  be  catalogued  and  classified 
according  to  the  new  Catalogue  Code  and  the  new  Scheme 
of  Classification; 

2 Just  those  of  the  old  collection  as  are  known  to  be  in 
much  use  be  recatalogued  and  reclassified,  with  an  additional 
temporary  staff,  if  necessary,  during  the  first  few  months; 

3 llie  new  accessions  and  the  recatalogued  and  reclassified 
books  be  kept  in  a New  Collection  and  similaiiy  their  catalogue 
cards  too  kept  in  a New  Collection; 

4 The  rest  of  the  old  collection  be  kept  as  Old  Collection 
and  similarly  their  catalogue  cards  too  be  kept  as  Old  Collection; 

5 Readers’  attention  be  invited  by  the  Reference  Librarian 
to  the  existence  of  the  Two  Collections; 

6 If  any  book  is  taken  out  by  a reader  from  the  Old  Colleo 
tion,  on  its  return  by  him  it  be  recatalogued  and  reclassified  and 
absorbed  in  the  New  Collection  and  similarly  with  its  cat^ogue 
cards. 


1 Capitulatton  to  the  Dead  Past 

The  Canon  of  Context  will  bring  about  now  and  again  changes  in  the 
Rute  of  Catalogue  Code  and  in  the  Scheme  of  Classification.  At  present 
this  change  is  met  in  one  of  two  ways  in  cataloguing  practice. 

According  to  «)pe,  the  entire  collection  of  a library  is  recatalogued  and 
reclassified.  The  cost  of  this  is  enormous.  Often,  to  find  the  necessary 
money,  active  service  is  starved;  reference  service  is  cut  out;  book-fupd  is 
deplgted.  All  this  amounts  nearly  to  a criminal  waste  of  library  fund.  ; Law 
of  Parsimony  is  therefore  chagrined. 

In  the  second  wgy  of  practice,  eyes  are  closed  in  the  ostridt  way  to  the 
diange  in  the  Catalogue  Code  and  in  the  Scheme  of  dassification.  The 
obsolete  Code  and  Scheme  are  perpetuated  in  defiance  of  the  Canon  of  Con- 
^ and  of  the  Laws  of  Library  Science,  and  to  the  ne^ect  of  unex* 

71 


COi  ClJU9SIFliBD  CAt^^  b 

ptmsd  needs,  llib  vmy  amounts  to  tying  the  future  up  to  the  deitd  past 
This  capitulatiofi  to  the  dead  past  is  fatal  to  any  social  inftitutkm;  and  library 
is  a life-giving  sodal  Institution.  ^ 

2  Living  the  Present 

The  right  vfdy  riiown  by  the  Canon  of  Context  is  to  live  the  present,  »/We 
should  neither  waste  the  resources  nor  do  disservice  to  readers,  ^he 
Principle  of  Osmosis  helps  us  to  chalk  out  the  right  way.  According  to  It, 
the  documents  of  a library  fall  into  three  groups : 

1 New  docianents; 

2 Documents— usually  or  mostly  of  recent  past— continuing  to  be  in 
active  use;  and 

3 Old  documents  rarely,  or  only  occasionally,  in  use; 

When  the  Catalogue  Code  or  the  Scheme  of  Classification  has  to  be  changed, 
the  three  groups  should  be  treated  differently  [G3]. 

3  New  Documents 

. From  the  date  of  change  over,  all  the  new  documents  should  be  catalogued 
' by  the  New  Code  and  classified  by  the  New  Scheme  of  Classification.  Diese 
should  be  kept  as  “New  Collection^.  Their  catalogue  cards  also  should  be 
kept  as  a “New  Collection”,  according  to  the  Principle  of  Parallel  Movement 
enunciated  in  the  Library  administration  [RL3],  and  the  Library  manual 
[RL6].  This  does  not  mean  any  extra  cost. 

4  Recent  Documents  in  Active  Use 

Within  a short  period  after  the  date  of  change  over  to  the  New  Catalogue 
Code  and  to  the  New  Scheme  of  Classification  or  even  in  anticipation  of  it, 
the  active  documents  of  the  recent  past  should  be  rapidly  re-catalogued. 
In  some  cases,  no  serious  change  will  be  necessary.  The  only  work  to  be 
done  will  be  to  pick  out  their  cards  from  the  old  collection,  and  insert  them 
in  the  new  collection.  The  documents  themselves  should  be  similarly  trans- 
ferred from  the  old  to  the  new  collection,  as  and  when  the  cards  are  trans- 
ferred, according  to  the  Principle  of  Parallel  Movement.  A suitable  mark 
should  be  put  above  the  class  number  on  the  tag  in  the  back  and  in 
the  back  of  title  page  to  indicate  the  absorption  of  the  document  in 
the  New  Collection.  In  some  cases,  slight  changes  in  the  existing  cards  may 
prove  sufficient.  Only  in  a few  cases,  total  re-cataloguing  may  become 
neoessaiy.  In  all  cases  the  routine  of  absorption  should  be  completed  for 
each  quantum  of  documents  recatalogued  at  one  time  as  if  it  were  a single 
indivisible  job;  otherwise,  chaos  will  result.  The  quantity  of  man-hour 
needed  for  this  routine  of  absorption  will  depend  upon  the  number  of  docu- 
ments to  be  so  absorbed  within  the  short  time.  In  a Service-Libraiy,  eighty 
percent  of  use  is  estimated  to  be  confined  to  the  accessions  of  the  last  five 
years.  Even  this  eighty  percent  is  likely  to  be  distributed  as  follows:-— 50 
percent  of  the  current  year,  25  percent  of  the  last  year,  12  percent  of  the 

72 


OF 

«ec(md  Ittit  yiBar«  and  ao  on  in  diminishing  sequence,  spue  method  of 
matieal^pldklng  rattle  in  active  use  is  to  register  for  the  Catalogue 

ltevi»on  Section  all  the  documents  of  the  ‘*01d  Collection**  going  out  on 
loan.  Wmi  they  are  returned  by  readers,  the  documents  will  automatically 
go,^to  the  Catalogue  Revision  Section.  Their  catalogue  cards  should  be 
dKideed  up  ^d  the  routine  of  their  absorption  into  the  New  Collection 
should  be  completed.  The  pressure  of  this  work  will  be  high  only  for  about 
three  months  in  most  libraries.  Thereafter,  it  will  decrease  progressively. 
This  way  of  absorption  of  old  documents  in  current  use  will  require  additional 
staff  only  for  a short  period.^  The  number  of  volumes  to  be  so  treated  may 
not  exceed  10,000  in  a Service-Library.^  The  extent  of  extra  w<lrk  to  be 
done  on  this  kind  of  absorption  in  a National  Central  Library  can  be  worked 
out  from  experience.  Even  there,  the  proportion  of  the  special  staff  needed 
to  the  pennanent  staff,  and  the  duration  for  which  the  special  staff  will  be 
needed  will  not  be  very  different  from  that  of  a Service-Library. 

5 Osmotic  Pressure  of  Use 

^ After  the  first  few  months  of  high-pressure  absorption,  the  daily  quota 
of^ absorption  will  become  small.  It  will  go  on  thinning  almost  to  a vanishing 
point  in  about  five  years.  By  that  time,  all  the  “Live  Books’*  would  have 
been  transferred  by  the  “Osmotic  Pressure  of  Use”  from  the  Old  Collection 
to  the  New  CoUection.  The  “dead  books”  will  for  ever  remain  in  the  Old 
Collection,  without  any  harm  to  any  reader.  This  is  the  Prindple  of  Osmosis.} 
This  is  a contribution  of  the  Principle  of  Local  Variation  applied  in  one  of 
its  extreme  spheres  of  jurisdiction,  This  Principle  of  Osmosis  suggested 
itself  to  me,  while  visiting  many  aged  libraries  during  my  tour  of  Europe 
and  America  in  1948.  The  pathetic  look  of  the  younger  members  of  the 
cataloguing  sections  of  big  libraries  caught  ray  eye.  They  were  internally 
revolting  against  having  to  use  the  Catalogue  Codes  of  earlier  centuries. 
But  their  chiefs,  who  had  given  up  active  cataloguing  and  active  reference 
service  and  had  become  mere  administrators  and  committee  men,  did  not 
have  the  time  or  the  willingness  to  understand  the  urge  of  the  juniors  to  change 
over,  in  order  to  make  library  service  real.  Or,  cataloguing  was,  in  some  places 
done  by  the  old  guards  in  whom  mental  fibrosis  had  set  in  and  who  did 
cataloguing  without  any  awareness  of  the  latest  thought  on  library  service  or 
sensitiveness  to  the  social  changes  since  the  time  their  Catalogue  Codes  were 
framed.  When  their  thought  was  disturbed,  they  immediately  struck  the 
disturber,  crying,  ^Theory,  theory,  all  theory !”  This  made  me  think  out 
the  deeper  reason  for  such  wide-spread  resistance  to  any  change  in  cata- 
loguing and  classification.  It  was  found  to  be  the  cost  of  re<ata]oguing 
of  the  whole  of  a large  collection.  This  simmered  in  the  mind  for  some 
time.  The  Principle  of  Osmosis  came  forth  and  gave  a possible  solution  of 
the  problem. 


73 


PART  D 

EVOLUTION  OF  THE  CATALOGUE 


CHAPTER  DA 


FUNCTIONS  OF  THE  CATALOGUE 

1 Introductioo 

A Library  Catalogue  is  essentially  a tool.  Hence»  its  parts  and  detaib 
are  to  be  designed  so  as  to  make  it  an  efficient  tool.  This  means  that  in 
designing  the  Catalogue  we  must  take  its  chief  functions  into  consideration. 
The  functions  to  be  perfottned  by  a Library  Catalogue  have  been  discussed 
in  detail  in  the  light  of  the  Laws  of  Library  Science  elsewhere  [RF5].  That 
discussion  may  be  summarised  by  the  statement  that  a Vbmy  Catalogue 
should  be  so  designed  as  to 

1 Disdose  to  every  reader  his  or  her  document; 

2 Secure  for  every  document  its  reader; 

3 Save  the  time  of  the  reader;  and  for  this  purpose 

4 Save  the  time  of  the  staff. 

To  pursue  Cutter's  line  of  approach  and  restate  the  purpose  in  a more 
specific  way,  the  functions  of  a library  catalogue  are  to  [C3}; 

1 Enable  a person  to  find  a book  of  which  either  the 
A Author,  or 

B Title,  or 
C Subject  is  known; 

2 Show  what  the  library  has 
D by  a given  author, 

£ on  a given  subject,  and 
F in  a given  kind  of  literature;  and 

3 Assist  in  the  choice  of  a book  as  to  its 
G Edition,  and 

H Character. 


2 Museum  Tradition 

Historically,  however,  the  nature  of  the  Library  Catalogue  has. been  for 
long  influenced  bym  powerful  tradition.  In  this  tradition,  undue  emphasis 
was  placed  on  the  library  as  a museum,  where  books  are  housed  for  preser- 
vation. Under  its  influence,  the  primary  purpose  of  the  catalogue  was 
naturally  taken  to  be  that  of  serving  as  an  inventory  of  the  contents  of  the 
library.  To  make  this  inventory  catalogue  as  simple  as  possible,  it  was 
made  of  the  title-a-line  type,  listing  the  books  in  the  accession  sequence, 
with  the  books  themselves  arranged  on  the  shelves  in  the  same  accession 
sequence.  The  task  of  building  up  a catalogue  of  this  primitive  type  is  not 
difficult  and  calls  for  no  very  elaborate  code. 


77 


DA3  cxASsmm  catalogs  otm 

A Sgfeit  SdcawBiinaMp 

The  foioe  that  has  been  trying  to  oust  this  museum  tradition  imty  be  dei* 
cdbed  as  the  foroe  of  *Saleunan^p\  This  force  emanated  ftom  a near 
view  of  the  lilnaty.  According  to  this  view,  a library  is  an  institution  charged 
with  the  duty  of  converting  every  person  in  its  area  into  its  regular  costomor 
and  serving  the  dustomers  so  well,  so  promptly,  and  with  such  exact  rdhrenoe 
to  their  specific  heeds,  that  they  would  gladly  keep  on  as  customers.  A 
library  is  not  a museum  but  a workshop,  full  of  life  and  activiQr.  It  is  Vjpt 
the  book  which  gets  rapidly  worn  out  by  constant  use  that  should  worry  a 
library  according  to  this  view,  but  it  is  the  book  which  would  seldom  leave 
the  shelf  that  needs  anxious  attention  and  effective  treatment  This  view  is 
now  levohitionismg  everything  connected  with  the  library— book  sdection, 
shelf  arrangement,  architecture,  furniture,  location,  hours,  finance,  staffs 
attitude  towards,  readers,  and  last  but  not  least  the  Library  Cataloi^.  It  is 
also  among  other  things  tiying  to  relegate  the  spirit  of  inventory  to  its  legiti- 
mate far  off  place  in  the  back-ground  so  as  not  to  smother  the  nascent  ^irit 
of  service— service  at  any  cost,  service  at  any  risk— which  is  slowly  but  rightly 
enlivening  the  libraries  of  to-day. 

4 Struggle  of  the  Catalogue 
41  First  Victory 

The  first  struggle  over  the  Library  Catalogue  between  the  inventory  tradi- 
tion and  the  service  spirit  resulted  in  a compromise.  The  title-a-Iine  entry 
was  preserved  but  the  entries  were  to  be,  not  in  the  accession  sequence,  but 
in  the  alphabetical  sequence  of  the  names  of  authors.  This  replacement 
of  the  vagaries  of  accession  by  the  vagaries  of  the  alphabet  was,  to  some 
extent,  due  to  the  service  spirit  not  knowing  its  own  mind,  not  having  had 
^ough  experience  to  know  what  interested  readers  most — ^the  author  or 
the  subject-matter. 


42  Second  Victory 

But  it  did  not  take  long  to  see  the  importance  of  subject-matter.  The 
first  result  of  seeing  it  was  to  get  one  more  concession,  viz,  replacing  the 
single  alphabetical  sequence  by  a numb^  of  such  sequences— at  the  rate  of 
one  sequence  to  each  of  a few— say  fifteen  or  twenty— broad  classes  into 
which  knowledge  was  divided.  The  catalogues  of  a few  of  our  libraries 
are  still  at  one  or  other  of  these  stages. 

43  Emancipation 

The  real  emancipation  of  the  Library  Catalogue  from  the  hold  of  the 
inv^oiy  tradition  dates  from  the  invention  of  the  shelf-registo',  which,  as 
the  name  implies,  lists  the  books  on  the  basis  of  a title-a-line  entry,  in  a sequ- 
ence which  is  exactly  parallel  to  the  sequence  of  the  books  on  the  shelves. 
The  inventory  spirit  being  thus  cut  off  with  a special  registo  of  its  own,  the 
catalogue  began  to  develop  along  lines  natural  to  Itself  and  condudve  to 
the  fulfilment  of  the  new  service-spirit  of  the  Libraries. 

78 


CHAPTER  DB 


PARTS  OF  LIBRARY  CATALOGUE 

1 Ufiipirtite  CHctioiiiiry  Catalogue 

The  first  lifie  of  development  led  to  what  is  known  as  the  Dlcdonaiy 
Catalogue,  ft  consists  of  a single  part,  with  the  components  differentiated 
to  suit  the  different  functions  to  be  performed  by  the  catalogue.  Theper« 
fection  of  this  fotm  has  engaged  many  an  inventive  brain  firom  the  middle  of 
the  last  century.  It  has  developed  some  new  techniques~-the  fixing  of  subject 
headings  toeing  an  example  of  colossal  magnitude. 

11  New  Bigotry 

The  revolutionaries— the  tradition-breakers— of  one  generation  themselves 
become  the  conservatives  of  the  next,  fondly  clinging  to  the  new  tradtion, 
which  they  themselves  founded  in  tl^  place  of  those  broken  down  by  them. 
So  it  is  in  library  cataloguing.  The  fascination  of  grappling  with  the  difii- 
culties  with  which  the  dictionary  catalogue  bristles  seems  to  have  so  narrowed 
the  vision  that  the  immediate  and  next  stage  of  evolution  in  the  catalogue  is 
either  not  perceived  or  resisted  with  bigotry. 

2 Btpaitite  Classified  Catalogue 

The  next  stage  in  the  evolution  of  the  library  catalogue  consists  in  splitting 
it  into  two  parts,  on  the  basis  of  the  differences  of  function— one  part  holding 
all  the  components  giving  information  about  what  the  library  has  on  various 
subjects  and  the  other  holding  all  the  other  components.  The  arrangement 
in  the  former  is  by  Call  Numbers  and  Class  Numbers;  and  this  is  filiatory. 
Hie  arrangement  in  the  latter  is  alphabetical  as  in  a dictionary.  That  this 
bipartite  form  of  catalogue  is  a more  evolved  form  than  the  unipartite  dic- 
tionary catalogue  will  be  conceded  by  those  that  believe  that  evoluticm  means 
differentiation  in  structure  to  meet  differentiation  in  function.  Ibose  who, 
however,  hold  the  view  that  the  ultimate  stages  of  evolution  lead  to  unification 
and  not  to  differentiation,  must  learn  by  experience  the  enormous  difltoiltics 
of  a dictionary  catalogue  and  the  comparatively  easy  elimination  or  handling 
of  such  difficulties  in*the  classified  from  of  catalogue  emphasised  in  this  code. 

21  A Cause  for  Delay 

The  delay  in  the  emergence  of  the  bipartite  form  as  the  dominant  form 
has  been  due,  not  merely  to  the  resistance  of  the  practitioners  of  the  unipartite 
Dlaionary  Catalogue,  but  also  to  the  then  absence  of  a scheme  of  book^ 
dassification  which 

1 Individualises  specific  subjects  of  any  degree  of  intension  whatever; 


7a 


DB21  icLASSIFIBD  CAtALOOUE  CODE 

2 Airanges  specific  subject  at  aH  levels  in  an  amptobkfiliatcHrymiieiioe; 
and 

3 Individualises  the  different  books  in  a specific  subject. 

22  A Fallacy 

A subtle  fallacy  also  leads  to  the  ret^tion  of  the  Dictionary  Catalogue 
in  preference  to  the  Dassified.  The  ordinary  reader,  it  is  argued,  is  familiar 
only  with  alphabetical  arrangement  and  that  the  catalogue,  being  primarily 
for  his  use,  should  be  purely  alphabetical.  The  premises  of  this  argument  are 
correct  but  a fallacy  lurks  in  the  introduction  of  the  epithet  ‘purely’.  All 
that  the  premises  warrant  is  that  there  should  be  an  alphabetical  part  through 
which  the  ordinary  reader  can  enter  the  catalogue.  The  second  part  of  the 
bipartite  Classified  Catalogue  is  alphabetical  just  for  this  purpose. 


80 


CHAPTER  DC 


RIGHT  APPROACH 

1 A Deeper  FonctliMi 

If  the  reader’s  interest  is  for  a particular  book  or  a book  by  a particular 
author,  the  alphabetical  part  is  sufficient  by  itself  to  satisfy  his  want  But 
if  it  is  interest  in  a subject  which  takes  him  to  the  librazy,  his  wants  will  be 
better  served  if  the  catalogue  can  spread  before  him  a full,  connected,  pano- 
rama of  all  the  materials  on  his  specific  subject,  all  its  subdivisions,  and  all 
broader  subjects  of  which  it  is  itself  a subdivision.  Moreover,  few  readers 
are  able  to  name  their  specific  subjects  exactly.  It  is  a broader  or  a narrower 
subject  that  is  usually  thought  of.  But  whatever  is  brought  up  and  however 
wide  of  mark  it  may  be,  the  alphabetical  part  tells  him,  as  it  were,  *Tor  all 
books  on  the  subject  you  mention  and  on  all  connected  subjects,  look  up  the 
region  of  the  Classified  Part  covered  by  number  so  and  so.”  There  he  finds 
displayed  the  full  field  of  his  Interest.  When  he  enters  it,  he  finds  all  that  he 
was  vaguely  conscious  of  having  wanted;  and  indeed  it  is  only  then  that  he 
is  able  to  know  the  exact  subject  he  wanted. 

11  Unexpressed  Wants 

The  function  of  the  number  is  exhausted  as  soon  as  the  reader  enters 
. the  region  indicated  by  it.  Thereafter  the  numbers  do  not  occupy  this  thought 
or  distract  him.  His  mind  is  fully  occupied  with  the  helpful  filiatory  way 
in  which  the  names  of  his  books  follow  one  after  another.  He  is  delighted. 
This  delight  is  at  bottom  due  to  the  satisfaction  of  unexpressed  wants  and  to 
the  getting  of  something  which  he  did  not  know  how  to  ask  for.  This 
represents  a deeper  function  to  be  performed  by  the  library  catalogue. 

2 Duty  of  the  Library 

It  is  the  duty  of  the  library  to  meet  such  unexpressed  wants,  particularly 
because  an  ordinary  reader  does  not  know  how  to  give  shape  to  them  and  state 
them.  The  Dictionary  Catalogue,  with  its  inevitable  alphabetical  scattering 
of  subjects  instead  of  collocation,  cannot  satisfy  this  want.  Its  maze  of 
^See  also*  direction^  will  virtually  tire  out  the  ordinary  reader  by  sending 
him  from  pillar  to  post. 


3 Holism  in  the  Catalogue 

It  is  unchivalrous  to  say  to  the  reader,  as  it  were,  “You  say  you  can  enter 
the  catalogue  only  with  the  alphabetical  key.  Ergo,  then  you  shall  have  it ! 
But  you  will  have  to  use  the  alphabet  not  only  at  the  beginning  but  through- 
out and  to  the  very  end.”  This  is  too  great  a penalty  to  be  imposed  upon 
the  reader.  It  is  pushing  the  ‘alphabet’  beyond  its  legitimate  function.  Real 

81 


6 


DC3 


CLASSIFIED  CATALOGUE  CODE 


efGdency  a&d  gracefulness  consist  in  confining  the  use  of  egidhi  tool  to  the 
purpose  for  which  it  is  best  suited  or  designed.  To  display  the  lesouioes  of 
a library  in  a filiatory  sequence  the  correct  means  is  the  dassified  arrangement 
and  not  the  alphabetical  one. . As  the  library  catalogue  has  to  do  this  and 
as  the  reader  can  enter  it  only  with  the  alphal^tical  key,  a bipartite  catalogue 
with  a dassified  and  an  alphabetical  part  is  the  only  suitable  one.  Such  a 
holism  should  prevail  in  the  catalogue.  It  can  be  seen  that  the  Classified 
Part  is  designed  to  suit  the  fimctions  marked  by  Cutter  as  (C),  (£),  (F)»  (O) 
and  (H);  while  the  Alphabetical  Part  corresponds  to  the  functions  (A),  (B), 
(D)  and  to  some  extent  (H)  also.  It  can  also  be  seen  that  the  Alphatetical 
Part  is  virtually  the  Dictionary  Catalogue  mmus  the  Specific  Subject  Entries. 

4 Future  of  the  Catalogue 

If  the  bipartite  form  of  catalogue  comes  into  general  use,  it  will  doubtless 
lead  to  more  evolved  and  more  effident  forms  in  the  future.  For  the  time 
being,  however,  the  bipartite  Classified  Catalogue  should  be  popularised 
and  this  code  is,  therefore,  devoted  mainly  to  the  rules  relating  to  its  com- 
pdatioD.  And  yet  to  help  those  lagging  behind  in  the  times  of  the  Dictionary 
Catalogue,  supplementary  Rules  to  suit  this  form  of  catalogue  are  given 
wherever  warranted. 


82 


CHAPTER  DD 


PHYSICAL  FORM  OF  THE 
LIBRARY  CATALOGUE 

1  Book  Form 

The  book  form  of  the  Library  Catalogue,  whether  printed  or  manuscript, 
has  been  made  an  anachronism  by  the  Fifth  Law.  Nearly  a century  ago, 
Jewett  wrote  the  epitaph  of  the  printed  catalogue  in  his  addre^  to  a conference 
of  librarians  held  in  New  York  City: 

“While  the  catalogue  of  a large  library  is  passing  through  the  press, 
new  books  are  received,  the  titles  of  which  it  is  impossible  in  the  ordinary 
manner  of  printing,  to  incorporate  with  the  body  of  the  work.  Re- 
course must  then  be  had  to  a supplement.  In  no  other  way  can  the 
acquisitions  of  the  library  be  made  known  to  the  public.  If  the  number 
of  supplements  be  multiplied  as  they  have  been  in  the  Library  of  Congress, 
the  student  may  be  obliged  to  grope  his  weary  way  through  ten  cata- 
logues, instead  of  one,  in  order  to  ascertain  whether  the  book  which  he 
seeks  be  in  the  library.  He  cannot  be  certain,  even  then,  that  the  book  is 
not  in  the  collection,  for  it  may  have  been  received  since  the  last  appendix 
was  printed.  Supplements  soon  become  .intolerable.  The  whole 
catalogue  must  then  be  rearranged  and  reprinted.  The  expense  of  this 
process  may  be  borne  so  long  as  the  library  is  smaU,  but  it  soon  becomes 
burdensome,  and,  ere  long,  insupportable,  even  to  national  establishments. 

“There  is  but  one  course  left— not  to  print  at  all.  To  this  no  scholar 
consents,  except  from  necessity.  But  to  this  alternative,  grievous  as 
it  is,  nearly  all  the  large  libraries  of  Europe  have  been  reluctantly  driven.** 

2  Move  Forward 

India  has  been  reputed  to  be  the  dumping  ground  for  practices  discarded 
elsewhere.  Long  experience  of  this  seems  to  have  developed  even  a special 
fascination  for  the  antediluvian.  It  is  often  welcomed  and  fondled,  instead 
of  allowing  it  to  die  a peaceful  death.  The  printed  library  catalogue  evi- 
dently belongs  to  this  category.  There  may  not  be  enough  money  to  buy 
books,  to  maintain%n  adequate  staff,  to  get  the  books  better  circulated  and 
used,  to  extend  the  hours  of  the  library  or  to  light  or  furnish  it  attractively; 
but  money  is  found,  or  rather  whatever  money  there  may  be  is  diverted,  to 
print  or  reprint  the  catalogue.  Let  us  hope  that  this  will  not  continue  for 
ever  even  in  India.  India  should  move  forward. 

3  Evolution  to  Card  Form 

The  Five  laws  traces  the  evolution  of  the  physical  form  of  the  Library 
Catalogue  from  the  closely  written  bound  book,  through  the  interspaced  and 

83 


DD3  CLASSIFIED  CATALOGUE  CCWOT 

interleaved  one,  through  paste«down  form,  through  the  sheaf  form,  to  the 
present  card  form. 

4  Card  Fmm,  Not  the  Last  Word 

The  pressure  of  the  Fifth  Law  is  not  yet  felt  anywhere  in  India  to  the  same 
extent  as  in  Europe  and  America.  Most  libraries  still  maintain  their  cata- 
logues in  the  primitive  book  form.  Some  of  these  even  conspire  to  pull 
down  the  more  forward  ones  from  the  card  stage  they  have  reached  back 
to  the  old  book  stage.  Further,  even  in  the  libraries  that  have  adopted  the 
modem  card  form,  the  rate  of  growth  is  by  no  means  of  the  order  that  has 
become  common  in  the  West.  The  card  catalogue  is  thus  believed  to  be  the 
last  word  in  the  physical  form  of  the  catalogue.  But  it  is  not  wise  to  proceed 
with  that  belief.  The  inexorable  Fifth  Law  of  Library  Science  may  have 
something  in  store  for  the  next  stage  in  the  evolution  of  the  physical  form 
of  the  catalogue. 


5  Service  Library 

In  a local  Service  Library,  the  Fifth  Law  itself  would  put  a ceiling  to  the 
number  of  volumes  to  be  stored  in  it.  In  its  case  the  Fifth  Law  would  make 
the  growth  in  the  stock  of  the  library  take  the  form  of  replacement  of  the 
different  out-moded  and  worn-out  books  by  new  books  comparable  in  number. 
Therefore,  it  is  likely  that  the  card  form  of  catalogue  does  not  create  much 
difficulty  in  the  case  of  a local  Service  Library.  A card  form  may  continue 
for  a long  time  as  the  most  helpful  form. 

6  National  Central  Library 

The  position,  however,  is  different  in  the  case  of  a National  Central  Library 
and  even  of  a Regional  or  State  Central  Library.  In  their  case,  the  Fifth 
Law  would  allow  growth  by  continuous  addition  of  volumes  without  with- 
drawal of  old  ones.  The  size  of  the  catalogue  will  therefore  grow  continuously. 
It  will  soon  reach  a size,  obstructing  its  efficient  use.  In  fact,  such  a size  has 
already  been  reached  by  the  card  catalogue  of  libraries,  such  as,  the  Library 
of  Congress  (USA),  the  New  York  Public  Library,  and  the  Lenin  Library 
in  Moscow.  The  very  catalogue  room  of  such  a library  is  bigger  than 
the  entire  building  of  many  a.  service  library.  Apart  from  the  cost 
of  the  maintenence  of  such  a huge  catalogue,  the  readers  too  may  find 
using  of  such  a leviathan  catalogue  irksome  and  time-consuming.  What 
is  the  solution  ? ^ 


7  Micro  Film  Form 

One  possible  solution  may  be  to  have  the  catalogue  in  micro  form,  such  as 
micro  film  or  micro  card.  But  there  will  be  a practical  difficulty  in  using 
that  form.  The  Fifth  Law  itself  will  cause  that  difficulty.  In  a huge  library, 
about  a hundred  books  may  be  added  almost  every  day.  This  rate  of  growth 
in  the  stock  carries  with  it  the  implication  that  about  six  hundred  entries 
will  have  to  be  interpolated  at  different  conceivable  points  among  the  already 

84 


PHYSICAL  FORM  OP  THE  UBRARY  CATALOGUE  DD8 

enstiflg  entries.  What  will  technology  say  to  this  ? Can  the  micro  film 
technologists  handle  this  problm  succe^ully  and  at  a reasonable  cost  ? 

8 A Compromise 

If  they  cannot,  one  can  think  of  a compromise.  The  compromise  is 
suggested  by  the  Principle  of  Osmosis  already  described  in  Chap  CG.  Entries 
of  reading  materials,  other  than  those  in  cunent  use,  may  be  micro-filmed. 
The  entries  of  the  volumes  in  current  use  may  be  maintained  in  the  conven- 
tional card  form.  Then  the  catalogue  will  be  in  two  forms  and  sequences — 
one  in  micro-film  form  for  the  older  books,  and  the  other  in  card  form  for 
cunent  books.  This  may  be  a solution  for  the  present.  In  due  course, 
however,  a separation  of  the  entries  in  the  card  form  will  have  to  be  made 
again  into  those  to  be  reduced  to  the  micro-film  form  and  those  to  be  retained 
in  card  form.  To  pursue  this  matter  will  almost  amount  to  a speculation 
at  this  stage.  Moreover,  the  number  of  libraries  in  the  world  that  will  have 
to  face  this  situation  will  be  relatively  small. 


85 


CHAPTER  DE 


CENTRALISED  CATALOGUING 

1 Begtimlngs 

The  iirst  stage  in  the  national  centralisation  of  cataloguing  was  brought 
into  vogue  in  the  United  States  in  1901.  From  then»  the  Library  of  Congress 
prints  the  catalogue  card  of  each  book.  Copies  of  this  card  are  available 
for  sale.  I saw  such  a system  in  vogue  in  Denmark  also  during  my  tour 
in  1948.  The  Bibliographical  Institute  was  in  charge  of  the  work.  Since 
1950,  the  British  national  bibliography  is  unobtrusively  and  obliquely  influenc* 
ing  the  British  libraries  to  accept  centralised  classification  and  cataloguing. 
It  has  begun  to  supply  catalogue  cards  within  48  hours  of  order.  Often, 
the  catalogue  car^  arrive  even  before  the  books  arrive  [Wl].  Centralised 
Service  of  printing  catalogue  cards  is  also  practised  by  the  Deutsches 
Bucherei,  the  Central  Bibliographical  Institute  in  Leipzig.  It  seeks  to 
cover  all  German  books  in  whatever  country  published.  It  can  be 
no  wonder  if  the  Fifth  Law  of  Library  Science  dances  with  joy,  on  observing 
this  development  in  the  organisation  of  cataloguing  work. 

2  National  Saving 

If  Centralised  Cataloguing  is  done,  national  saving  will  be  as  much  as 
79  per  cent  [RH3]  in  respect  of  all  the  publications  in  the  countiy. 

3  International  Saving 

If  each  country  establishes  Centralised  Cataloguing  and  9II  countries 
cooperate  with  one  another  in  the  exchange  of  the  results  of  central  cataloguing, 
there  will  be  a saving  of  79  per  cent  [RH7]  in  respect  of  the  books  published 
in  all  the  cooperating  countries.  This  will  of  course  require,  as  condition- 
precedent,  prevalence  of  peaceful  intercourse  between  nations. 

4  Position  in  India 

There  is  a great  shortage  of  well-trained  cataloguing  man-power  in  the 
country.  But  the  libraries  are  growing  in  number  as  a 'result  of  the  current 
renaissance.  The  economical  method  of  meeting  the  situation  will  be  to 
adopt  Centralised  Cataloguing.  This  cannot  be  done  for  the  country  as  a 
whole.  There  should  be  a diversified  organisation  for  it.  In  each  of  the 
Constituent  States,  there  should  be  a State  Central  Cataloguing  Body  for  the 
books  in  the  language  of  the  State.  There  should  be  a Union  Central  Cata- 
loguing Body  to  take  charge  of  the  books  in  English,  Sanskrit,  and  in  any 
other  Indian  languages  in  which  books  are  published  in  different  parts  of 
the  countiy  [RIIJ. 

86 


CENTRAUSED  CATAIX)OUING  DBS 

5 Fre-Natal  Catatopring 

The  next  st^  in  the  evolution  of  the  organisation  for  cataloguing  will  be 
for  the  National  Central  Body  and  the  State  Central  Body  for  Cataloguing  to 
get  the  proof  copies*  of  books  even  before  they  are  published  and  provide 
the  call  number  and  the  catalogue  entries  for  each  book.  Then  the  class 
number  can  be  printed  in  the  back  of  the  title  page.  The  catalogue  cards 
can  be  printed  even  before  the  book  is  released.  This  is  called  Fre*Natal 
Cataloguing  [RPl]. 


87 


PART  B 


RECORDING 


CHAPTER  EA 


LANGUAGE  OF  ENTRIES 
1 FaTOured  Language 

The  language  in  which  the  majority  of  the  documents  of 
the  library  occur. 

Normally  the  language  of  the  country  or  region  or  State  is  likely  to  be 
the  Favoured  Language.  But  in  a specialist  library,  the  Favoured  Language 
may  be  different  from  the  language  of  the  country  or  region  or  State.  Due 
to  historical  causes,  English  is  now  the  Favoured  Language  in  many  of  the 
generalist  libraries  in  India. 


2  Scale  of  Languages 

A list  of  languages,  to  be  kept  by  a library,  in  which  the 
Favoured  Language  is  given  the  first  place  and  the  other 
languages  are  entered  in  the  descending  scale  of  popularity. 

It  is  not  easy  to  give  a definite  and  unique  sequence  of  popularity  for 
arranging  the  languages.  But  each  library  may  be  able  to  decide  from 
experience  some  working  scale.  All  that  is  wanted  is  that  this  should  be  a 
fixed  one.  For  example,  in  the  University  Library  at  Madras,  English  was 
used  as  the  Favoured  Language.  The  scale  of  languages  was  as  follows: 
English,  Tamil,  Malayalam,  Telugu,  Kanarese,  Sanskrit,  Hindi,  Urdu,  Frendh, 
German,  etc. 


3  Most  Popular  Language 

Among  a given  set  of  languages,  the  language  occurring  earliest 
in  the  scale  of  languages. 

4  Preference  of  Favoured  Language 

Generally  speaking,  an  entry  in  a library  catalogue  is  to 
be  in  the  Favoured  Language  of  the  Library.  The  Rules  in 
Sec  S of  this  Chap  deal  with  the  elements  in  an  Entry  to  be 
written  in  a different  language. 


91 


EA5  cxAssmED  catalogue  code 

5 Use  of  Non-favonred  Laiqiaage 
51  Proper  Noun 

Proper  Nouns  in  any  Entry  are  to  be  written  in  the  language  in 
which  it  occurs  on  the  title-page  and  its  over-flow  of  the  docu- 
ment, except  that  the  special  rules  of  Chap  JB  are  to  be  followed 
in  the  case  of  the  name  of  a Geographical  Entity. 

lliis  is  obvious.  It  is  wrong  to  translate  a Proper  Noun  on  the  basis  of 
the  dictionary  meanings  of  the  word(s)  constituting  it.  For  example,  it  is 
wrong  to  enter  my  name  in  an  entry  in  the  translated  form  ‘Lord  of  the  Stage*. 
It  is  equally  wrong  to  enter  the  name  of  my  collaborator,  in  this  edition,  in 
an  entry  in  the  trarrslated  form  ‘Blue  Cloud.’ 

52  Title  of  a Document 

The  title  of  a document  is  to  be  written  in  the  language  in  which 
it  occurs  on  the  title-page. 

521  POLYGLOT  TITLE 

If  the  title  of  a document  is  given  on  the  title  page  in  two  or 
more  languages,  it  is  to  be  written  in  the  Most  Popular  Language 
of  the  library. 


522  ADDITION  OF  TRANSLATION 

If  the  title  of  the  document  is  not  in  the  Favoured  Language  and 
it  is  not  a proper  noun  but  is  descriptive,  its  translation  in  the 
Favoured  Language  may  be  added  within  square  brackets  as  a 
separate  sentence  in  the  title  section,  either  in  the  Main  Entry 
alone  or  also  in  specific  Added  Entries  according  to  a subsidiary 
rule  to  be  framed  by  each  library  in  conformity  to  the  Principle  of 
Local  Variation. 


92 


CHAPTER  EB 


SCRIPT  OF  THE  ENTRIES 
1 Favoured  Script 

The  script  of  the  Favoured  Language  of  the  library;  and  in 
exceptional  cases  any  other  script  chosen  by  the  library  as  the 
Favoured  Script. 

For  example,  the  Favoured  Language  of  a Library  of  Books  in  Sanskrit 
in  USA  will  be  Sanskrit.  But,  it  may  choose  as  its  Favoured  Script,  not 
the  Nagari — ^i  e,  the  Sanskrit — Script,  but  the  Roman  Script. 

2 Preferaice  of  Favoured  Script 

Generally  speaking,  the  script  of  an  entry  in  a library  catalogue 
is  to  be  in  its  Favoured  Script. 

An  alternative  is  considered  in  Sec  S AS 

3 Transliteration 

If  the  title-page  is  not  in  the  Favoured  Script  of  the  library,  the 
words  takm  from  the  title  page  arc  to  be  transliterated  in  that 
Script  in  accordance  with  an  accepted  table  of  transliteration. 

The  script  of  this  book  being  Roman  all  the  examples  in  it  are  in  Roman 
script.  It  is  equivalent  to  saying  that  the  examples  are  printed  as  for  a library 
whose  favoured  script  is  Roman. 

31  Transliteration  Table 

The  table  given  in  the  Journal  of  the  Royal  Asiatic  Society  of  Great  Britain 
and  Ireland  or  any  other  standard  table,  put  up  as  an  international  or  national 
standard,  as  the  case  may  be,  is  to  be  used  for  the  scripts  covered  by  them. 

The  table  mentioned  first  in  the  above  Rule  is  based  on  the  agreement 
arrived  at  in  an  International  Congress  of  Orientalists. 

4 Li  Edition  1 

The  first  edition  of  this  book  reproduced  a slightly  modified  form  of  that 
table.  But  in  actual  practice,  we  found  it  unhelpful  because  it  did  not  indicate 
the  shapes  of  consonant-vowel  combinations.  Twenty  more  pages  would 
be  required  to  indicate  them.  It  was  felt  that  the  frequency  of  use  of  the 

93 


EB4  CLASSIFIED  CATALOGUE  CODE 

tables  would  not  justify  sparing  so  many  pages  for  them.  Further,  the  bodies 
of  the  types  of  the  different  languages  are  so  different  that  they  cannot  be 
composed  in  the  same  line.  This  necessitated  the  making  of  blocks  for  all 
the  pages  of  the  tables.  This  would  increase  the  cost  beyond  economic 
limits.  The  tables  have,  therefore,  been  omitted  in  this  edition. 

5 TnusUteration  into  Indian  Scripts 

At  present,  tables  exist  only  for  transliteration  into  Roman  Script.  Tables 
for  transliteration  into  most  other  scripts — particularly  the  Indian  scripts — are 
yet  to  be  standardised. 

We  cannot  expect  any  other  country  to  take  up  this  task.  The  Indian 
Standards  Institution  should  seize  this  task  and  complete  it  in  collaboration 
with  the  linguists  of  the  different  regions  of  the  country.  Its  EC2— Docu- 
mentation Committee-^should  co-opt  linguistic  scholars  and  establish  a 
standard  for  transliteration  from  western  scripts  into  Indian  scripts.  There 
is  another  task  even  more  urgent  than  this.  It  is  the  establishment  of  standards 
for  transliteration  from  one  Indian  script  to  another.  For,  apart  from  the 
Tamil  script  and  the  Urdu  script  differing  considerably  in  the  phonetic  make 
up  from  the  other  Indian  scripts,  even  among  the  other  Indian  scripts  there 
are  substantial  differences  in  respect  of  the  phonetic  values  of  a few  letters 
of  the  alphabet.  Thus  there  is  scope  for  considerable  work  to  be  done  in 
internal  transliteration  by  the  Documentation  Committee  of  the  Indian 
Standards  Institution.  The  present  drive  for  emotional  integration  through 
literature  service  calls  immediate  attention  to  this  problem  of  internal 
transliteration. 


94 


CHAPTER  EC 


ARTICLES  AND  CONTRACTIONS 


1 Articles 


Some  Rules  prescribe  omission  of  initial  articles.  The  following  list  of 
articles  is  given  to  facilitate  recognition: 


Arabic:  ad,  al,  ar,  as,  at,  ez. 
Dutch:  de,  het,  *t,  ecn,  eene. 
English:  a,  an,  the 
French:  le,  la,  les,  un,  une 
German:  das,  der,  die,  ein,  eine 
Hebrew:  Ha,  he 
Hungarian:  a,  az,  egy 


Italian:  gli,  gl,  j,  il,  1',  la,  le,  lo,  un, 
una,  uno 

Portuguese:  a,  as,  o,  um,  uma 
Scandinavian:  de,  den,  det,  en,  et, 
ett 

Spanish:  el,  la,  lo,  los,  un,  una 
Yiddish  : der,  di,  dos 


The  numeral  adjective  meaning  “one”  should  be  distinguished  from  an 
article  of  the  same  form  and  should  not  be  omitted. 


2 ONitractions 


The  following  are  the  contractions  to  be  used,  in  writing  entries: 


Abkiirzung 

, . Abkurz 

Director 

,.  Dir 

Abridged 

. , Abr 

Edited 

..  Ed 

Abteilung(en) 

..  Abt 

Edito 

..  Ed 

Annotated 

. . Annot 

Editor(s) 

..  Ed 

Annotation 

. . Annot 

Edition 

..  Ed 

Annotator(s)— 

. , Annot 

Edizione 

..  Ed 

Assistant 

. . Assis 

Epitome 

. . Epit 

Auflage(«n) 

..  Aufl 

Epitomised 

. . Epit 

Au$gabe(n) 

. . Ausg 

Epitomiser(s) 

. . Epit 

Ausgewahit 

Ausgew 

Erklarung(en) 

..  Erkl 

Authors) 

. . Auth 

Fascicule 

..  Fasc 

Band 

B 

Gckurzt 

..  Gek 

Bearbciter 

. . Bearb 

Gesammelt 

. . Ges 

Bcarbeitet 

. . Bearb 

Heft 

..  H 

Before  Christ 

?.  BC 

Hcrausgeber 

..  Her 

Century 

. . Cent 

Herausgegeben 

..  Her 

Commentary 

, . Comm 

Illustration 

..  Til 

Comraentator(s) 

. . Comm 

lllustrator(s) 

..  Ill 

Compiled 

. . Comp 

lllustrazione 

..  Ill 

Compilcr(s) 

. . Comp 

Introduction 

. . Introd 

Dedicated 

..  Ded 

Introduction 

.. 

Dedicatee(s) 

..  Ded 

writer(s) 

. . Introd 

Dedication 

..  Ded 

Introductory 

. . Introd 

95 


EC2  CLASSIFIED  CATALOGUE  CODE 


Introduzione 

. . Introd 

Joint 

..  J 

Nouveau 

. . Nouv 

Nouvelle 

. . Nouv 

Number(s) 

..  N 

Omarbcide(t) 

. . Omarb 

Oversat 

. . Overs 

Page(s) 

..  P 

Popular 

Pop 

Preface 

..  Pref 

Prologo 

. . Prol 

Pseudonym 

. . Pseud 

Redigirt 

.,  Red 

Report 

. . Rep 

Reported 

. . Rep 

Reporter 

. . Rep 

Revidiertc 

..  Rev 

Revised 

. . Rev 

Revision 

. . Rev 

Revisor(s) 

. . Rev 

Samlede  va^ker 

Sam 

Sammlung 

• • Sam 

Special 

..  Sp 

Tcil(e) 

..  Tc 

Tome 

..  T 

lYadotto 

..  Tr 

Traduction 

..  Tr 

Traduit 

..  Tr 

Traduzione 

..  Tr 

Translated 

..  Tr 

TransIation(s} 

..  Tr 

TranslatorCs) 

..  Tr 

Udgave(r) 

..  Udg 

Udgiver(e) 

..  Udg 

Obersetzt 

. . Ubers 

Obersetzung 

. , Ub«s 

Uitgaaf 

. . tJitg 

Vertaler 

..  Vert 

Volume(s) 

..  V 

3 Cognate  Words 

As  far  as  po$sible>  cognate  words  are  provided  the  same  contraction. 

4 Homonymous  Contractions 

Some  of  the  contractions  prescribed  are  homonymous.  For  example* 
the  contraction  ‘Tr’  denotes  ‘Translated,’  ‘Translation,’  and  ‘Translatoi(s)’. 
The  context  of  its  occurrence  will  resolve  the  homonym. 


96 


CHAPTER  ED 


STYLE  OF  WRITING 

1 Introduction 

The  style  of  making  the  entries  is,  to  some  extent,  to  depend  on  the  physical 
form  of  the  catalogue.  From  this  point  of  view,  three  physical  forms  may 
be  lecogaised-— the  bound-book  form;  the  loose-leaf  form;  and  the  card 
form.  The  choice  of  form  has  to  be  made  in  the  light  of  the  Fifth  Law  of 
Library  Science,  The  main  concern  of  the  Fifth  Law  is  to  give  full  weight  to 
the  need  for  casual  repairs  and  frequent  addition  of  entries  even  while  the 
catalogue  continues  to  be  in  use.  It  has  been  discussed  in  detail  in  the  Five 
laws  of  library  science  [RF9]. 

11  Physical  Form  of  the  Catalogue 

The  days  of  time-honoured  bound-book  form  are  gone  for  ever—never 
to  return — ^at  least  in  the  case  of  a growing  Service-Library.  The  loose-leaf 
form  and  the  card  form  arc  so  much  alike,  that  they  admit  of  nearly  the 
same  style  of  making  the  entries.  As  the  card  form  marks  a later  stage  of 
evolution,  as  it  is  rightly  more  popular,  and  as  it  is  desirable  to  make  the 
rules  definite,  this  chapter  deals  only  with  the  style  of  making  entries  for  a 
card  catalogue. 


12  Card  Catalogue 

In  order  that  the  right  sequence  of  all  entries— old  as  well  as  new  taken 
together— may  always  be  easily  maintained,  each  card  is  to  get  only  one  entry, 
except  where  rules  provide  for  the  consolidation  of  several  consecutive  entries 
into  a single  'Consolidated  I7ntry.’ 

Experience  has  singled  out  cards,  124  x 75  x 0.25  mm,  as  of  the  most 
convenient  size.  They  are  referred  to  as  ‘standard  cards’  for  cataloguing 
purposes.  If  the  catalogue,  as  a tool,  is  to  have  the  longest  lease  of  life 
possible,  it  is  desirable  that  cards  of  the  best  texture  should  be  used.  To 
secure  elegance,  it  is  better  to  have  ruled  cards. 

* 13  Printed  Card 

Next  to  the  choice  of  the  material  on  which  the  entry  is  to  be  made,  we 
have  to  examine  the  mode  of  making  the  entry.  Is  the  entry  to  be  printed, 
type-written,  or  written  by  hand  ? Printing  will  be  ideal,  if  economically 
possible.  As  the  cost  of  printing  goes  to-day,  it  is  not  economical  for  indi- 
vidual libraries.  It  may  be  possible  in  countries  where  co-operative  catalogu- 
ing is  practised.  The  number  of  such  countries  is,  however,  now  small 
IRT6]. 


97 


EDM 


CLASSIFIED  CATALOGUE  CODE 


14  Typed  Card 

A$  for  typing,  tiie  chief  problem  is  the  availability  of  the  right  sort  of 
ribbon  which  will  leave  behind  it  an  indelible  impression.  The  handling  of 
single  cards  need  not  be  considered  however  a serious  handicap,  as  it  may 
be  possible  to  produce  the  cards  in  reels  of  suitable  length.  Typing  may  be 
too  expensive  for  some  libraries. 

15  Written  Card 

Thus  writing  by  hand  may  be  the  only  mode  practicatde  ip  many  individual 
libraries — ^at  least  for  some  time  in  the  newly  developing  countries. 

i' 

16  Unit  Card  System 

No  library  can  get  on  with  a single  copy  of  the  catalogue.  Further,  the 
tendency  now  is  to  have  groups  of  small  libraries  knit  together.  This  organi- 
sation involves  having  a number  of  copies  of  the  catalogue.  The  number 
is  usually  too  small,  however,  to  make  printing  economical.  Hence  the 
library  world  is  now  engaged  in  carrying  on  various  experiments  in  the  matter. 
Many  near-printing  processes  have  now  come  into  use.  Libraries  which  use 
t^ese  processes  or  printing  itself  will  find  it  economical  to  use  the  *Unit  Card* 
system.  This  system  uses  copies  of  the  Main  Entry  Card  for  Added  Entries 
also  by  adding  the  Headings  of  the  latter  at  the  top  or  underlining  those  words 
in  the  title-portion  which  should  bp  regarded  as  Headings.  Detailed  rules 
for  these  are  easily  framed  by  individual  libraries. 

The  rules  of  this  chapter  bear  upon  the  style  of  writing  the  entries  in  cards 
in  individual  libraries.  This  brings  us  to  two  other  issues,  v/z,  the  writing 
fluid  to  be  used  and  the  hand  in  which  the  entries  are  to  be  written. 

2 Writing 

21  Writing  Fluid 

The  indelibility  of  the  ink  used  should  be  such  as  to  make  the 
entry  last  as  long  as  the  card  lasts. 

The  catalogue  is  a permanent  record  and  the  cost  of  renewing  it  wholesale 
would  be  prohibitive.  Hence  this  rule. 

22  Use  of  Pencil 

Call  Numbers  and  Class  Numbers  should,  however,  be  in 
pencil. 

These  are  liable  to  revision  and  change.  Hence  this  rule. 

98 


ED24 


STYLE  OF  WRITING 

23  Library  Hand 

All  words  and  numbers  in  an  Entry  are  to  be  in  a bold  upright 
hand,  their  letters  and  digits  being  detached  from  one  another. 

As  regards  the  handle  we  are  between  two  opposing  factors.  On  the  one 
side,  the  hand  in  which  a person  writes  is  singularly  personal.  The  science 
of  graphology  is  based  on  this  fact.  On  the  other  hand,  the  catalogue  of  a 
growing  library  accretes  to  itself  several  entries  from  week  to  week,  over  in 
indefinitely  large|^uaiber  of  generations.  Hence,  if  all  the  calligraphic 
idiosyncrasies  of^Uthe  successive  cataloguers  be  given  full  play,  the  catalogue 
would  (^rtainh^^^^gpn3e  an  unattractive  hotchpotch.  The  library  world 
would  rather  smiftce  the  individuality  in  the  handwriting  of  cataloguers  than 
make  the  heterogeneous  style  of  the  catalogue  offend  or  repel  the  readers. 
Accordingly,  it  has,  in  recent  years,  developed  an  impersonal  hand  and  dubbed 
it  the  library  Hand.’  It  is  claimed  that  even  a person  with  a bad  hand  can 
practise  it  with  success  and,  what  is  more,  can  write  it  fairly  fast.  Here  is 
Library  Hand  for  the  Roman  Script  and  the  Indo-Arabic  Numerals. 

ABCDEFGHIJ. 
KLMN  OPQRS 
TUV  WXYZ 


dbcdefghlj  kimnop 

c^r  sta'O'Ojxx^^ 
l2  3 45b78SO 

A similar  standard  should  be  established  for  the  favoured  script  of  a library 
and  implemented. 

24  Rules  on  Style  of  Writing 

Before  we  proceed  to  state  the  rules  of  this  chapter,  an  apology  is  due  to 
the  reader.  An  actual  demonstration  of  writing  the  various  kinds  of  cards 

99 


ED24  CXASSIHED  CATALOGUE  CODE 

would  be  more  etle^ive  than  a chapter  of  rules.  But,  as  the  author  of  a bode 
is  denied  the  privilege  of  personal  demonstration,  he  is  driven  to  the  circum- 
locutory mode  of  describing  them  by  rules.  Hence,  1 would  request  the  reader 
to  bear  with  me  in  this  matter  and  follow  the  rules  by  actually  writing  out 
sample  cards. 


25  Lines  in  an  Entry 

1 Leading  Line. — ^The  top-most  horizontal  line  of  a card. 

2 First  Vertical. — The  left-most  vertical  line  of  a card. 

3 Second  Vertical. — The  vertical  line  which  is  to  the  right  of 
the  First  Vertical  of  a card. 

In  what  follows,  some  of  the  definitions  given  in  Chap  B7  arc  assumed. 

* 

3 Leading  Section 

The  Leading  Section — that  is,  the  section-  beginning  on  the 
Leading  Line — and  all  its  continuation  lines  are  to  be  commenced 
at  the  First  Vertical. 


4  Other  Sections 
41  General 

All  the  other  Sections  except  an  Index  Number  Section,  an 
Accession  Number  Section,  and  the  Second  Section  in  a Series 
Index  Entry  are  to  be  commenced  at  the  Second  Vertical. 

42  Continuation  Lines 

The  continuation  lines  of  all  sections  are  to  be  commenced  at 
the  First  Vertical. 


43  Index  Number  Section 

« 

The  Index  Section  is  to  be  as  far  to  the  right  as  possible  in  the 
Section  preceding  it  or  in  the  first  line  after  the  said  last  line. 

44  Serial  Number 

The  Serial  Number  in  the  Second  Section  of  a Series  Index 
Entry  is  to  be  commenced  at  the  First  Vertical,  while  the  word 


100 


STHJB  OF  WKITim 


EDM 


which  follows  the  Serial  Number  is  to  be  commencecl  at  the 
Second  Vertical  or  as  far  further  to  its  right  as  may  be  necessary 
if  the  Serial  Number  is  so  long  as  to  go  beyond  the  Second 
Vertical. 


45  Accession  Number  Section 

The  Accession  Number  Section  is  to  begin  at  the  First  Vertical 
of  the  bottom-most  line. 

451  TWO  OR  MORE  ACCESSION  NUMBERS 

If  two  or  more  Accession  Numbers  are  to  be  written  in  the  same 
Main  Entry,  they  are  to  be  in  a sequence  parallel  to  that  of  the 
Book  Numbers  to  which  they  correspond. 

5 Typography 

51  Entry  Element 

The  words,  other  than  auxiliary  ones,  in  an  Entry  Element  in  a 
Block  in  a Heading  are  to  be  in  Block  Letters. 

52  Directing  Element 

A Directing  Element  is  to  be  underlined.  In  print,  it  is  to  be 
in  italics. 


53  Descriptive  Element 

A Descriptive  Element  is  to  be  underlined.  In  print,  it  is  to 
be  in  italics.  The  first  letter  of  each  word  in  it  other  than  an 
auxiliary  word  is  to  be  in  capital. 

54  Other  Words 

All  the  words  in  an  Entry,  other  than  those  covered  by  Sections 
ED51,  ED52,  and  ED53  are  to  be  written  in  ordinary  hand  as  in 
prose. 

The  word  “and”  connecting  two  Descriptive  Elements  also  should  be  in 
ordinary  hand  according  to  this  Section. 


101 


ED5S  CUSmiBD  cataloode  oodb 

55  Niadbrau 

All  numbers,  other  than  those  forming  part  of  the  name  of  a 
monarch  or  a pope  or  any  other  person  or  of  a corporate  body 
and  usually  written  in  Roman  Numerals,  and  other  than  Call 
Numbers  and  Class  Numbers  are  to  be  in  Indo-Arabic 
Niunerals. 

6  Sequmce  of  Words 

The  words  in  a section  are  to  be  in  their  normal  sequence, 
except  where  a different  sequence  is  specifically  laid  down  by  a 
Riile. 


7  Use  of  Capitals 

The  use  of  capitals  is  to  be  regulated  by  the  rules  of  grammar  of 
the  favoured  language  of  the  library,  subject  to  Sec  51  and  S3  of 
this  Chap. 


8  Punctuation  Marks 

Punctuation  marks  are  to  be  given  as  in  ordinary  prose,  subject 
to  Rules  81  to  84  of  this  Chap. 

It  cannot  be  said  that  the  rules  of  grammar  regarding  the  use  of  capitals 
and  punctuation  marks  are  very  rigid  or  definite.  They  are,  I believe,  made 
purposely  elastic  so  that  some  freedom  may  be  given  to  individual  tastes. 
But  the  result  of  giving  freedom  to  the  varying  tastes  of  the  individual  cata- 
loguers of  a library  will  make  the  Library  Catalogue  unseemly.  Hence,  it  is 
recommended  that  the  freedom,  given  by  the  rules  of  grammar,  should  not 
be  extended  by  a library  to  its  individual  cataloguers  but  that  each  library 
riiould  draw  up  its  own  rules  and  enforce  them  rigidly.  On  the  other  hand, 
it  is  felt  that  it  is  not  desirable  that  the  freedom  of  the  libraries  also  should 
be  cut  out  and  a uniform  set  of  rigid  rules  enforced  on  all  libraries.  But 
to,  make  cooperative  cataloguing  among  countries  possiUe,  the  International 
Catalogue  Code  itself  should  fix  the  rules  of  pimctuation  marks  for  all  the 
national  centres  of  cataloguing. 

81  A Comma  is  to  separate  two  consecutive  Blocks  in  a 
Heading. 

82  A Comma  is  to  separate  a Descriptive  Element  in  a Block 
in  a Heading,  from  what  it  describes. 


102 


STYLE  OP  WRmNG  ED912 

83  Circular  brackets  are  to  enclose  each  Individualising  and 
Secondary  Element. 

84  The  conjunction  between  Blocks  in  a Heading  may  be 

replaced  by  a comma.  If  this  is  done,  semicolon  should  precede 

a Descriptive  Element  instead  of  a comma. 

# 

This  rule  will  be  of  use  in  a language  calling  for  an  inflection  of  the  words 
conisected  and  instead  of  the  use  of  an  auxiliary  word  equivalent  to  ^nd* — 
for  example,  Tamil.  By  this  means,  the  words  can  be  in  the  nominative  case 
form. 


91  Varieties  of  Natitm 
910  .Inclusive  Notation 

A set  of  consecutive  numbers  represented  by  the  symbol  con* 
sisting  of 

1 The  first  number  of  the  set; 

2 A dash;  and 

3 The  last  number  of  the  set. 

Exanytle  : 3 — 18. 


911  Years 

Notwithstanding  Rule  910  of  this  Chap,  if  the  numbers  denote 
years,  the  second  member  of  the  inclusive  notation  is  to  consist  of : 

1 The  last  digit  alone  when  the  earlier  digits  are  common  to 
both  the  members; 

2 The  last  two  digits  alone  when  the  earlier  digits  are 
common  to  both  the  members;  and 

3 So  on. 

Example:  1962-3,  1952-963,  1852-963,  1963-2112. 

, 912  Open  Notation 

An  indefinite  continuation  of  consecutive  numbers  beginning 
from  a specific  number  and  represented  by  the  symbol  consisting 
of 

1 The  specific  number  forming  the  beginning;  and 

2 A dash. 

Exanqtle : 3 — 

103 


ED913 


CLASSIFIQ)  CATALOGUE  C(X>E 

913  Non-consecutive 


The  members  of  a sequence  of  non-consecutive  numbers  and 
non-consecutive  sets  of  consecutive  numbers  in  inclusive  notation, 
are  to  be  separated  by  commas. 

Example : 3—18,  41—57,  85— 


104 


CHAPTER  EE 


SIZE  OF  BOOK 

I Each  library  is  to  maintain  a specification  for  deciding 
whether  a volume  is  to  be  regarded  as 

1 Undersized;  or, 

2 Oversized;  or, 

3 Abnormal  for  the  reason  of  having  too  many  plates  or 
maps  or  for  any  other  peculiarity  in  its  build  or  for  any  other' 
reason  such  as  rarity. 

It  is  found  from  experience  that  it  is  convenient  to  have  the  pamphlets,  the 
giant  folios  and  the  other  abnormal  volumes,  arranged  in  separate  colIe<qtions 
of  their  own.  On  the  other  hand,  it  is  not  desirable  to  have  the  entries  cor- 
responding to  them  taken  out  of  their  natural  place  in  the  catalogue.  Hence, 
there  must  be  some  simple  method  of  showing,  in  their  entries,  the  collections 
in  which  they  will  be  found  in  the  stack-room. 

One  does  not  wish  to  be  dogmatic  in  fixing  the  size  for  a ‘pamphlet,’  ‘giant 
folio’  and  so  on.  That  is  why  this  rule  leaves  the  specification  in  the  hands 
of  individual  libraries.  It  is  expected  that  each  library  should,  in  the  light 
of  experience,  write  out  a specification  as  a supplement  to  this  rule. 

An  illustrative  specification  is  given  here. 

A volume  is  deemed  to  be  undersize  if  its 

I I Breadth  is  less  than  300  mm : and 

121  Thickness  is  not  greater  than  5 mm; 

or 

122  Thickness  is  not  greater  than  30  mm  and  its  height  is  less  than  150  mm. 

or 

123  Thickness  is  not  greater  than  50  mm  and  its  height  is  less  than  120  mm. 

or 

124  Thickness  is  not  greater  than  150  mm  and  its  height  is  less  than  50  mm. 

2 A volume  is  deemed  to  be  oversized  if  its  breadth  is  not  less  than  300  mm. 

3 A volume  is  deemed  to  be  abnormal  if 

31  It  contains  not  less  than  50  plates  or  maps  or  both  plates  and  maps 
taken  together; 

or 

32  The  paper  is  very  poor,  such  as  unpressed  paper  or  paper  loaded  with 
clay; 

or 

33  The  Reference  Section  recommends  its  inclusion  in  the  abnormal 
sequence  because  of  the  peculiar  nature  of  the  contents  or  the  scarcity  value  of 
the  volume. 


105 


CLASSIFI0>  CATAUIGDE  CXIDE 

2 The  Bo<^  Number  of  an  undersized  volume  is  to  be 

underlined.  ^ 

3 The  Book  Number  of  an  oversized  volume  is  to  be  overlined. 

4 The  Book  Number  of  an  abnormal  volume  is  to  be  both 
underlined  and  overlined. 

5 In  all  the  entries  of  a volume  put  in  any  other  collection,  an 
appropriate  collection  symbol  is  to  be  put  consistently  above  the 
Class  Number  or  below  the  Book  Num^r. 

In  a public  UbraTy,  the  sequence  symbol  may  indicate  the  branch  in  which 
the  volume  is  housed;  in  a university  or  college  library,  the  department  in 
which  it  is  housed  IRL4],  and  in  a school  library,  the  standard  to  which 
it  is  assigned  [RSI]. 

The  symbol  indicating  collection  should  be  inserted  in  all  the  Entries  of 
the  volume  concerned. 

It  must  be  remembered  that  the  primary  collection  has  no  symbol. 


106 


CHAPTER  EF 


CONTINUED  CARDS 

.1  If  an  Entry  is  too  long  for  one  card,  it  is  to  be  continued  in 
another  card;  Uic  connecting  phrase  ‘continued  in  the  next  card'  is 
to  be  at  the  right  end  of  the  bottom-most  line  of  the  earlier  card 
and  the  connecting  word  ‘continued'  is  to  be  at  the  right  end  of  the 
top  of  the  latter  card.  Further  the  Leading  Section  is  to  be 
repeated  in  all  continued  cards.  The  sequence  of  such  cards 
may  be  referred  to  as  a set  of  ‘Continued  Cards.’ 

2 A sequence  of  Main  Entries  of  periodical  publications, 
having  the  same  class  number  in  their  respective  Leaihng  Sections, 
written  in  different  cards  because  of  break  in  the  set,  or  change  of 
name  or  any  other  of  the  causes  covered  by  Rule  PA2  is  also  to  be 
treated  as  a set  of  ‘Continued  Cards.’ 

3 If  a set  of  ‘Continued  Cards’  consists  of  three  or  more  cards, 
the  first  card  is  to  have  the  connecting  phrase  at  the  bottom  only; 
the  last  card  is  to  have  the  connecting  word  at  the  top  only  and 
the  intermediate  cards  are  to  have  the  connecting  words  at  the 
top  as  well  as  at  the  bottom. 

4 The  ‘Continued  Cards’  are  to  be  numbered  serially,  the 
serial  number  being  written  after  the  connecting  word  'continued' 
near  the  top  of  the  card. 


107 


CHAPTER  EG 


ARRANGEMENT  OF  ENTRIES 
IN  CLASSIFIED  PART 

1 By  Class  Numbers  • 

1 The  entries  in  the  Classified  Part  are  to  be  arranged  by  the 
Class  Numbers  in  their  respective  Leading  Sections. 

The  ordinal  arrangement  of  Class  Numbers  would  depend  on  the  Scheme 
of  Classification  used.  If  the  Colon  Classification  is  used,  the  ordinal  arrange- 
ment is  governed  by  Rules  024,  025  and  0251  of  the  Colon  classification. 

11  Main  and  Cross  Reference  Entries 

2 The  entries  having  the  same  Class  Number  in  their  respec- 
tive Leading  Sections  are  to  be  arranged  among  themselves  in 
accordance  with  the  succeeding  Rules. 

Such  entries  will  be  either  Main  Entries  of  works  dealing  chiefly  with  the 
specific  subject  represented  by  the  Class  Number  in  question  or  Cross  Reference 
Entries  of  works  dealing  with  it  in  a subsidiary  way. 

2 Main  Entries 

21  Among  the  entries  with  the  same  Class  Number  in  their 
respective  Reading  Sections,  those  with  one  or  more  Book 
Numbers  are  to  have  precedence  over  those  without  them. 

The  result  of  this  Rule  is  to  separate  the  Main  Entries  and  Cross  Reference 
Entries,  relating  to  a given  specific  subject  and  to  give  precedence  to  the 
former  group. 

22  Entries  with  Book  Numbers  in  their  respective  Leading 
Sections  are  to  be  arranged  among  themselves  by  the  Book 
Numbers. 

The  ordinal  arrangement  of  Book  Numbers  would  depend  on  the  System 
of  Book  Numbers  used.  If  the  Colon  Classification  is  used,  the  ordinal 
arrangement  is  governed  by  Rules  03015  and  03016  of  the  Colon  classification. 


108 


EmiUES  m CXASSIFIED  PART  EG4 

23  The  position  of  a consolidated  Main  Entry  is  to  be  deter* 
mined  by  the  last  Book  Number  in  it. 

24  Entries  with  the  same  Class  Numbers  as  well  as  Book 
Numbers  in  their  respective  Leading  Sections  will  be  a sequence 
of  “continued”  entries  and  they  are  to  be  arranged  among  them- 
selves in  their  numerical  sequence. 

*3  Cross  Reference  Entries 

31  Entries  with  the  same  Class  Number  and  without  Book 
Numbers  in  their  respective  Leading  Sections  are  to  be  arranged 
among  themselves  by  the  Book  Numbers,  if  any.  in  their  respective 
Third  Sections. 

The  result  of  this  rule  is  that  the  Cross  Reference  Entries  for  a given  specific 
subject  will  get  grouped  by  the  languages  of  the  works  cross-referred  and 
those  in  each  language  group  will  get  arranged  chronologically  by  the  year 
of  publication  of  the  book  to  which  reference  is  made. 

32  Such  of  the  entries  coming  under  rule  31  of  this  Chap  as 
have  the  same  Book  Numbers  in  their  respective  Third  Sections, 
are  to  be  arranged  among  themselves  by  the  Class  Numbers 
occurring  in  their  respective  Third  Sections. 

This  is  simply  one  convenient  way  of  making  the  arrangement  definite. 

4 Periodical  Publications 

Entries  with  no  Book  Numbers  in  their  Leading  Sections  and 
no  Class  Numbers  in  their  respective  Third  Sections,  but  with  the 
same  Class  Number  in  their  respective  Leading  Sections  will  be 
a sequence  of  “continued'’  entries  of  a Periodical  Publication;  and 
they  arc  to  be  arranged  among  themselves  in  their  numerical 
sequence. 

The  result  of  this  rule  is  that  the  entries  for  a given  periodical  publication 
will  get  arranged  in  their  natural  sequence. 


109 


CHAPTER  EH 


ARRANGEMENT  OF  ENTRIES 
IN  ALPHABETICAL  PART 

1  By  Alphabet  • 

1 The  entries  in  the  Alphabetical  Part  are  to  be  arranged 
strictly  by  the  alphabet,  as  in  a dictionary  and  in  conformity  with 
the  succeeding  rules  of  tUs  chapter. 

The  possibility  and  advantages  of  ruthless  all>through  alphabetisation  are 
examined  in  the  paper  on  Alphabetical  arrangement  [RAl]. 

2  Initial  Articles 

2 In  the  alphabetical  arrangement  no  attention  is  to  be  paid 
to  initial  articles. 


3  Undant 

31  German  words  spelt  with  the  vowels  a,  o,  and  u are  to  be 
arranged  as  if  they  were  spelt,  a,  o,  and  u respectively. 

The  help  of  Cross  Reference  Index  Entry  is  to  be  sought  to  link  up 
umlauted  vowel  with  its  representation  with  an  ‘e’,  by  the  application  of 
SecLA3. 


4  Scotti^  Names 

Scottish  names  with  the  prefix  Mac  and  its  abbreviated  forms 
such  as  Me  and  M’  are  to  be  arranged  according  to  their  apparent 
alphabetical  make-up. 

The  help  of  Cross  Reference  Index  Entry  is  to  be  sought  to  link  up  the 
prefixes  Mac,  Me,  and  M’  by  the  application  of  the  Sec  LA3. 

5  ‘Saint’  and  its  Variants 

Names  beginning  with  St  and  Ste  are  to  be  treated  on  the 
analogy  of  Rule  4 of  this  Chap. 

110 


BNTIUES  IN  ALFHABBTICAL  PART 


EH72 


6  Superior  Comma 

The  superior  comma  in  a Scottkh  or  Irish  name  or  in  a 
possessive  case  is  to  be  ignored. 

7  Gestalt  Alphabetisation 

70  The  following  ascending  scale  of  ordinal  values  is  to  be 
borne  in  mind  in  arranging  the  entries  in  the  Alphabetical  Part: 

1 Section  space; 

2 Full  stop; 

3 Comma; 

4 Numerals  in  their  natural  sequence ; 

5 Bracket; 

6 Words  in  Roman; 

7 Words  in  italics,  or  underlined  words ; 

8 The  word  “and”,  or  its  substitute  semicolon;  and 
91  Etc. 


71  Certain  Terms 

The  priority  of  Section  Space  over  Full  Stop  may  be  called  the  Rule  of 
^'Section  before  Full  Stop,”  Similarly  we  can  speak  of  the  “Rule  of  Full 
Stop  before  Comma”;  the  Rule  of  “Comma  before  Bracket,”  the  Rule  of 
“Bracket  before  Words  in  Roman,”  and  Rule  of  “Words  in  Roman  before 
Words  in  Italics  or  underlined,” 

72  Abandonment  of  the  Rule  of  “Nothing  before  Something” 

The  above  prescription  omits  the  Rule  of  “Nothing  before  Something,” 
followed  in  other  methods  of  arrangement.  It  has  to  be  omitted  on  account 
of  the  uncertainty  and  the  inconsistency  with  which  authors  and  other  persons 
write  a word  in  their  names  either  as  a single  word  or  as  two  or  more  words 
with  empty  space  between  them,  or  with  hyphens  between  them.  This 
phenomenon  is  described  fully  in  Sec  HC5  and  its  Subdivisions.  For  exam- 
ple, one  and  the  same  name  may  occur  in  the  same  list  in  any  of  the  following 
three  forms: 

1 Sivasankaranarayana. 

2 Siva-Sankara-Narayana. 

3 Siva  Sankara  Narayana. 

The  “Nothing  before  Something”  rule  will  scatter  these  three  entries.  At 
the  same  time,  a person  who  looks  up  the  Alphabetical  list  cannot  be  sure  in 
which  of  these  three  forms  his  reference  is  likely  to  be  found.  It  is  for  these 

111 


EH72  CLASSIFIED  Catalogue  code 

reasons  that  the  Rule  of  '^Nothing  before  Something”  has  been  abandoned 
in  this  edition, 

73  Traditional  Method  of  Alphabetisation 

It  has  been  usual  to  direct  that  homonymous  words  and  phrases  should 
be  arranged  among  themselves  according  to  their  meaning,  say,  in  the  sequence : 

1 Names  of  places; 

2 Names  of  subjects; 

3 Names  of  books ; 

4 Names  of  things;  and 

5 Names  of  persons. 

But  such  a direction  implies  deliberation  of  a delicate  nature  during 
alphabetisation,  which  ought  to  be  a purely  mechanical  affair  {RT8].  In 
this  Code,  absolute  mechanisation  of  arrangement  is  sought  to  be  secured  by 
specifying  the  Rules  of  Writing  and  the  Rules  of  Alphabetisation  in  a fully 
integrated  manner.  This  is  indeed  an  attempt  to  apply  the  Gestalt  Theory 
of  Alphabetisation  enunciated  in  the  Theory  of  library  catalogue, 

74  Oscillation  between  Extremes 

In  the  first  three  editions  of  this  Code,  the  Gestalt  Principle  was  imple- 
mented to  a severe  degree.  Between  1951,  the  year  of  edition  3 and  now, 
some  re-thinking  has  been  done.  As  a kind  of  extreme  swing  away  from  the 
severe  Gestalt  Alphabetisation,  the  All-through  Alphabetisation  was  practised. 
The  Documentation  Section  of  the  Indian  Standards  Institution  established  a 
Standard  on  the  basis  of  the  latter.  In  this  standard,  arrangement  is  to  be 
guided  only  by  what  is  visible.  For  example  “Mac”  and  “Me”  are  not  to 
be  equated  at  all.  It  also  refused  to  give  different  ordinal  values  to  the 
dilferent  styles  of  writing.  In  the  Indian  Standards  Convention  held  at 
Madras  in  December  1957,  these  two  extreme  positions  were  reviewed.  It 
was  decided  that  what  could  be  truly  helpful  to  the  users  of  an  alphabetical 
list,  should  be  found  somewhere  midway  between  these  two  extremes. 

75  Midway  Position 

The  present  edition  of  this  Code  has  made  an  attempt  to  find  this  midway 
position.  The  Rules  on  the  Style  of  Writing  given  in  Chap  ED,  and  the 
Rules  on  Alphabetical  Arrangement  given  in  this  Chap  are  so  co-ordinated 
as  to  implement  that  midway  position. 

76  Example 

The  combined  effect  of  these  two  co-ordinated  sets  of  Rules  is  illustrated 
by  the  sequence  in  which  the  following  entries  get  arranged.  The  Headings 
alone  are  given  in  most  cases.  The  word  “Cambrije”  has  been  improvised 
just  for  purpose  of  illustration. 

1 Cambridge. 

Three  hundred  years’  progress. 


112 


ENTRIES  m ALPHABETICAL  PART 


EH76 


2 Cambridoe. 

See  also 

Cambrue. 

3 Cambridge,  Bibliography. 

4 Cambridge,  Education  Committee. 

5 Cambridge,  Geography. 

6 Cambridge,  Library  Committee. 

7 Cambridge,  Taxation  Committee. 

8 Cambridge,  Pseud, 

9 Cambridge  (City). 

10  Cambridge  (City),  Library  Committee. 

1 1 Cambridge  (Duke  of)  1 . 

1 2 Cambridge  (Duke  of)  2. 

13  Cambridge  (John). 

Aesthetics. 

14  Cambridge  (John). 

Metaphysics. 

15  Cambridge  (John),  Drama. 

16  Cambridge  (John),  Philosophy. 

17  Cambridge  (John),  Ed, 

1 8 Cambridge  (John),  Tr, 

19  Cambridge  (John)  and  Ross  (E  B). 

20  Cambridge  (John)  and  Ross  (E  B),  Ed, 

21  Cambridge  (John)  and  Smith  (John). 

22  Cambridge  (Massachusetts). 

23  Cambridge  Archaeological  Society. 

24  Cambridge  Gown. 

25  Cambridge  Philosophical  Society. 

26  Cambridgeshire. 

27  Cambridge  Trophy. 

28  Cambrue. 

29  New  Shakespeare  Society. 

30  New  South  Wales. 

31  Newall(JT). 

32  Newark. 

33  New  York. 

34  New  Zealand. 

35  Shivasankar/Cnarayana  Ayyar  (Ramanathan). 

36  Shiva-Sankara-Narayana  Ayyar  (Subramaniyam). 

37  Shiva  Sankara  Narayana  Ayyar  iruvcllore). 

38  Shivasankaranarayana  Pillai. 

In  alphabetical  works  of  reference  such  as  Wftd*s  who  and  Telephone 
directory^  punctuation  marks  and  italics  are  not  likely  to  occur.  Therefore, 
the  compromise  between  strict  All-through  and  Gestalt  arrangements  is  not 
likely  to  cause  any  serious  difficulty  to  the  users  of  such  reference  works. 

113 


8 


EH8  CLASSIFIED  CATALOGUE  CODE 

8 Guide  Card 

In  the  Alphabetical  Part,  one  guide  card  for  about  every  three  inches  may 
prove  sufficient.  The  Classified  Part  must  be  guided  more  profusely.  The 
fact  that  the  guide  cards  should  be  separated  sufficiently  so  as  to  stand  out 
distinctly  is  the  only  limiting  factor.  Subject  to  this,  every  possible  Class 
should  be  guided.  Even  this  limiting  factor  may  be  evaded  to  some  extent 
by  putting  an  inclusive  class  on  the  tab  and  featuring  its  subclasses  in  two 
or  three  columns  on  the  body  of  the  card  to  which  the  tab  is  affixed. 


114 


JPART  F 

XERMINOLOOY 


CHAPTER  FA 


WORK 

1 Knowledge-Unit. — An  assumed  term. 

It  may  extmd  in  print  to  several  volumes  at  one  extreme  or  to  only  a single 
sentence  or  even  a single  word  at  the  other  extreme.  For  example,  the 
Knowledge-Units,  contained  in  and  denoted  by  the  following,  stand  arranged 
in  the  decreasing  sequence  of  size: 

1 En^rclopaedia  of  general  knowledge; 

2 Encyclopaedia  of  library  science; 

3 This  book  \istXl— Classified  catalogue  code  with  additional  rules  for 
dictionary  catalogue  code; 

4 Part  F of  this  book — ^Terminology  (of  cataloguing); 

5 Chap  FA  of  this  book— Terms  connected  with  “Work”;  and 

6 The  definition  given  in  the  Sec  in  the  first  line  of  this  Chap. 

2 llioaglit. — Knowledge-unit. 

This  term  is  introduced  for  brevity.  We  often  speak  of  the  Thought- 
Content  of  a book  or  of  the  work  that  it  embodies. 

21  Macro  Thought  and  Micro  Thought. — These  are  relative 
terms,  with  meanings  loosely  fixed  by  convention.  Examples  1, 
2,  and  3 given  under  Sec  FAl  may  be  taken  to  denote  Macro 
Thought.  And  examples  4,  5,  and  6 may  be  taken  to  denote 
Micro  Thought.  Ordinarily,  a book  greater  in  size  than  a 
pamphlet  may  be  said  to  embody  Macro  Thought.  So  also,  a 
pamphlet,  an  article  in  a periodical,  a section  of  a book,  a picture, 
or  a map,  may  be  s^aid  to  embody  Micro  Thought. 

3 Expressed  Thought. — Thought  expressed  in  language,  or 
symbols,  or  in  any  other  mode,  and  thereby  made  communicable. 

The  above  definition  itself  is  Expressed  Thought.  It  is  expressed  in  the 
English  language.  A picture  is  also  Expressed  Thought.  A mathematical 
or  a chemical  formula  is  again  Expressed  Thought.  A gesture  is  equally  an 
Expressed  Thought. 


117 


FA4 


CLASSIFIED  CATALOGUE  CODE 


4 Work. — ^Expressed  thought. 

This  term  is  introduced  for  brevity  and  elegance. 

41  Abridgement. — Reduced  form  of  a work  got  by  condensa- 
tion and/or  omission  of  details,  but  retaining  the  whole  general 
sense  and  the  unity  of  the  original  work. 

For  example.  Chap  1 of  my  Library  numual  gives  an  Abridgement  of  my 
work  entitled  Five  laws  of  library  science. 

42  Adaptation. — ^A  version  of  a work,  re-writtcn  for  a parti- 
cular purpose,  but  not  so  changed  as  to  be  deemed  an  independent 
work  on  the  basis  of  the  quality  of  its  thought  and  expression.  The 
Adaptation  may  be  either  in  the  language  of  the  original  work  or 
in  any  other  language. 

For  example,  the  chapter  on  Cataloguing  in  my  Library  manual  is  an 
Adaptation  of  the  work  contained  in  this  book,  for  use  in  small  libraries. 
So  also,  the  chapter  on  Classification  in  my  Library  manual  is  an  Adaptation 
of  the  work  contained  in  my  Colon  classification  and  of  the  work 
contained  in  the  Decimal  classification.  The  Ramayana  of  Kamban  may 
appear  to  be  an  Adaptation  of  the  Ramayana  of  Valmiki.  But  it  is  an  inde- 
pendent work  on  account  of  its  own  individualistic  quality  of  thought  and 
expression.  So  also,  the  Bengali  and  the  English  versions  of  the  Gitanjali  of 
Tagore  should  be  taken  as  independent  works  and  not  as  Adaptations  of 
each  other. 

5 Sacred  Work. — Basic  work  of  a religion,  generally  accepted 
as  such  among  its  followers. 

Vedas,  Upaniskads,  Tantras,  Tripitakas,  Talmud,  Bible,  New  Testament, 
and  Koran  are  examples.  A Sacred  Work  is  often  treated  as  if  it  were  a class 
or  subject.  To  distinguish  such  a class  or  subject  from  a normal  class  or 
subject,  it  is  called  a quasi-class  or  quasi-subject.  Bach  part  of  a Sacred 
Work  is  also  treated  as  a quasi-class  which  is  a subclass  of  it.  Chains  of  such 
subclasses  of  it  are  usually  enumerated  in  an  articulated  sequence. 

6 Work  of  Literature. — Work  in  the  form  of  a poem,  drama, 
fiction,  prose,  champu,  or  any  other  literary  form,  of  which  the 
outstanding  qualities  are  taken  to  be  beauty  of  form,  emotional 
or  intuitional  appeal,  and  endless  layers  of  suggestions  in  regard 


118 


WORK  FA91 

to  meaning,  and/or  which  is  of  intuitive  or  trans-intellectual 
origin. 

For  example,  Ramayana,  Iliad,  Sakuntda,  Canterbury  tales,  Handet,  Hound 
of  heaven.  Post  office,  and  Apple  cart  arc  Works  of  Literature.  A work  of 
Literature  is  treated  as  if  it  were  a class  or  a subject.  That  is,  it  is  regarded 
as  a quasi-dass  or  quasi-subject. 

7 Classic. — Work  usually  having  embodiments  in  several 
versions,  adaptations,  and  translations,  attracting  other  works  on 
itself,  and  getting  copied  out  and/or  brought  out  in  print  even 
long  after  its  origin. 


For  example,  Aristotle*s  Poetics,  Newton’s  Principia  and  Marx’s  Capital 
are  Classics.  A Classic  too  is  often  treated  as  if  it  were  a class  or  a subject. 
That  is,  it  is  regarded  as  a quasi-class  or  quasi-subject. 

8 Quasi-Class. — Work  which  is  treated  as  a class  in  a classi- 
fication scheme,  or  whose  title  is  used  as  a subject-heading  in 
cataloguing  practice. 

As  we  have  seen  in  Sec  FAS,  FA6  and  FA7,  a Quasi-Class  is  usually 
a Sacred  Work,  or  a Work  of  Literature,  or  a Classic.  Such  works  are  usually 
governed  by  special  rules  in  a Cataloguing  Code. 

91  Pedestrian  Work.— Work  not  eligible  to  be  made  into  a 
Quasi-Class  or  a Quasi-Subject. 

Most  of  the  works  published  today  arc  Pedestrian  Works.  They  are  not 
Sacred  Works  of  religion.  Nor  are  they  Classics.  All  works  passing 
for  poems,  dramas,  or  any  other  form  of  work  of  literature  may  not,  in  reality, 
deserve  to  be  treated  as  Quasi-Classes  or  Quasi-Subjects.  Some  may  be 
only  Pedestrian  Works.  And  yet,  it  is  the  practice  in  cataloguing  to  treat 
them  as  if  they  arc  Quasi-Classes  or  Quasi-Subjects.  This  is  because  the 
line  of  demarcation  between  a true  Work  of  Literature  and  a Pedestrian 
Work  in  verse,  drama  or  any  other  literary  form  is  not  sharp  enough.  To 
distinguish  them  and  treat  them  as  Pedestrian  Works  would  amount  to  a 
violation  of  the  Canon  of  Reticence  on  the  part  of  the  classifiers  or  the  cata- 
loguers as  the  case  may  be.  However,  a poem  whose  value  is  the  exposition 
of  Positive  Knowledge,  need  not  be  taken  as  poetry.  So  also  with  other 
forms  of  exposition. 


119 


CHAPTER  FB 


TITLE 

1 Title,— Name  of  work. 

For  example,  Classified  catalogue  code  with  additional  rules  for  dictionary 
catalogue  code  is  the  Title  of  the  work  contained  in  this  book. 

2 Subtitle, — A secondary  or  subordinate  title  usually  explana- 
tory, and  forming  part  of  the  title. 

For  example,  in  the  full  title  of  my  book  Heading  and  canons:  Comparative 
study  of  five  catalogue  codes,  the  part  Comparative  study  of  five  catalogue 
codes  is  Subtitle. 

3 Alternative  Title.— A subtitle  introduced  by  “or”  or  its 
equivalent,  and  forming  part  of  the  title. 

For  example,  in  the  full  title  of  my  work,  contained  in  the  book  Social 
bibliography  or  physical  bibliography  for  librarians,  authors,  and  publishers^ 
the  part  Physical  bibliography  for  librarians,  authors,  and  publishers  is  Alter- 
native Title. 

4 Short  Title  or  Abbreviated  Title. — The  name  of  a work, 
more  brief  than  its  full  title,  without  prejudice  to  intelligibility 
and  help  in  identifying  the  work. 

For  example.  Library  development  plan  is  the  Abbreviated  Title  of  my  work 
contained  in  the  book  with  the  title  Library  development  plan,  with  draft 
library  bills  for  the  Union  Government  and  the  Constituent  States. 

Generally  speaking,  initial  words  other  than  an  article, — such  as,  Elements, 
Handbook,  Introduction,  Primer  and  Treatise — may  havcjo  be  preserved. 

5 Half-Title. — Title,  usually  short,  given  on  the  page  of  a 
printed  book,  usually  found  before  the  page  containing  the  full 
title  of  the  work  contained  in  the  book. 

For  example,  ‘‘Classified  Catalogue  Code”  is  printed  as  the  Half-Title  of 
the  work  contained  in  this  book.  It  is  so  printed  in  the  half-title-page  which 
is  on  the  recto  of  the  leaf  preceding  the  title-leaf. 

120 


■nTLE  , FB93 

6 Rnniiiiig  Htte. — Short  title  usually  found  printed  in  the  top 

line  of  each  verso  page  or  all  the  pages  of  a book. 

% 

For  example,  ^‘Classified  Catalogue  Code”  is  printed  as  Running  Title 
in  the  top  of  each  verso  page  of  this  book. 

7 Binder's  Title. — Short  title  usually  found  tooled  on  the 
spine  of  a book. 

For  example,  “Classified  Catalogue  Code”  is  tooled  on  the  spine  of  this 
book  as  the  Binder*s  Title. 

8 Tell-Tale  Title.— Title  that  discloses  the  subject  of  the  work. 

For  example,  the  title  of  this  book  is  a Tell-Tale  Title. 

91  Uniformised  Title. -Title  uniformiscd  by  popular  or 
cataloguing  usage  in  lieu  of  listless,  and  often  unintended,  variants 
of  the  title  of  one  and  the  same  work  in  different  editions  or  the 
titles  of  different  volumes  of  one  and  the  same  work. 

For  example,  the  work  which  had  for  its  original  title  Code  civil  des  Frangtds 
was  later  given  the  title  Code  Napoleon.  It  is  helpful  to  use  one  uniform  title 
for  it  in  the  place  of  its  variants.  Generally,  a Sacred  Book  of  a religion  is 
given  slightly  varying  titles  from  time  to  time,  without  any  significance. 
There  is  therefore  a need  for  adopting  a Uniformised  Title  for  it.  Bible^ 
Vedas,  and  Talmud  are  examples  of  such  Uniformised  Titles.  The  same 
thing  happens  also  in  the  case  of  Classics  and  Works  of  Literature.  Many 
Governmental  and  other  Annual  Reports  change  their  titles  listlessly.  For 
example,  it  may  be  Administration  report  on  agriculture  in  one  year.  Annua/ 
report  on  agriculture  in  another  year,  and  Review  of  agriculture  in  a still  another 
year.  This  is  also  a case  where  a Uniformised  Title  is  called  for.  Uni- 
formisation  of  the  title  may  also  be  necessary  in  respect  of  a Periodical  Con- 
ference. This  is  a case  in  which  the  Canon  of  Ascertainability  is  not  followed 
rigidly. 

• 

92  Fanciful  Title.  ■ -Title  that  does  not  disclose  the  subject  of 
the  work. 

93  Proper  Name  Title. — Either  a Fanciful  Title  or  a Title 
beginning  with  a Proper  Noun  and  for  this  or  other  reason  having 
the  status  of  a Proper  Name. 


121 


FB93  CLASSIFIED  CATALOGUE  CODE 

For  example,  the  title  Library  cheque-book  of  five  leaves^  which  is  the  name 
of  a work  of  mine  given  as  an  address  to  the  German  Library  Confeienoe 
in  Berlin  in  1956  and  published  as  an  article  in  the  Oranthalaya,  the  organ  of 
the  Hyderabad  Library  Association,  in  the  same  year,  is  a Fanciful  Title 
or  a Proper  Name  Title.  For,  its  thought-content  is  my  Five  Laws  of  Library 
Science.  This  subject  of  the  work  is  hot  disclosed  by  its  title.  In  fact,  most 
of  the  people  in  the  conference  felt  intrigued  by  the  title  announced  for  my 
address,  until  they  listened  to  the  address.  A title  like  Oxford  book  of 
English  prose y which  contains  a proper  noun,  may  also  be  taken  to  be  a Proper 
Name  Title. 

94  Title  Proper  of  a Periodical  Publication. — Includes  the 
name  of  the  sponsor  if  it  occurs  at  the  beginning  and  excludes 
it  if  it  occurs  at  the  end. 

Examples: 

1 AsHb  proceedings. 

2 Library  Association  record. 

3 Unesco  bulletin  for  libraries. 

4 Annals  only  in  the  case  of  the  Annals  of  the  Indian  Library 
Association. 

5 Journal  only  in  the  case  of  the  Journal  of  the  Indian  Mathe- 
matical Society. 

6 Transactions  only  in  the  case  of  the  Transactions  of  the  Royal 
Society. 


122 


CHAPTER  FC 


% 


AUTHOR 

1 Person.— An  assumed  term. 

2 Corporate  Body. — 

Sense  1 A number  of  persons  taken  collectively— usually 
as  united,  or  organised,  or  coming  together  informally,  in  a 
common  cause  or  for  common  action  such  as  governmental 
business,  or  commercial  or  industrial  or  service  or  political  or 
any  other  business,  or  for  deliberation,  or  for  collective  expression 
of  opinion  or  statement. 

Sense  2 A number  of  corporate  bodies,  in  sense  1,  taken 
collectively — usually  as  united,  or  organised,  or  coming  together 
informally,  in  a common  cause  or  for  common  action  such  as 
governmental  business,  or  commercial  or  industrial  or  service 
or  political  or  any  other  business,  or  for  deliberation,  or  for 
collective  expression  of  opinion  or  statement. 

For  example.  Government  of  India,  Madras  Chamber  of  Commerce, 
Union  of  Textile  Mill  Owners  of  Coimbatore,  Ramakrishna  Mission,  Indian 
National  Congress,  Indian  National  Trade  Union  Congress,  Constituent 
Assembly  of  India,  Villagers’  Gathering  at  Ubhiavedantapuram,  District 
Board  of  Tanjavur,  Corporation  of  Madras,  Panchayat  Board  of  Siricali, 
Madras  Library  Association,  Indian  Mathematical  Society,  and  Old  Boys’ 
Association  of  the  Hindu  High  School  (Sirkali)  are  corporate  Bodies  in  sense  1 . 

United  Nations,  Afro>Asian  Conference,  International  Federation  of 
Library  Associations,  Federation  of  Indian  Chambers  of  Commerce,  Inter- 
University  Board  of  India,  and  Commonwealth  Universities’  Conference 
are  Corporate  Bodies  in  sense  2. 

21  Organ  bf  a Corporate  Body. — Non-autonomous  part  of 
a corporate  body  formed  by 

1 The  constitution  of  the  parent  body;  or 

2 A legislative,  executive,  or  administrative  measure,  for 
administrative  or  deliberative  work  for  an  indefinite  period, 
within  the  field  of  function  of  the  parent  body;  or 

3 A legislative,  or  executive,  or  administrative  measure  for 

123 


FC21 


CLASSIHED  CATALOGUB  CODE 


a specific  piece  of  work  for  a specified  duration^  within  the  field 
of  function  of  the  parent  body. 

211  Constitutional  Organ.— Organ  of  the  category  1 men* 
tioned  in  Sec  FC  21. 

212  Administrative  Organ. — ^Organ  of  the  category  2 men- 
tioned in  Sec  FC  21. 

213  Permanent  Organ. — Organ  of  the  categories  1 or  2 
mentioned  in  Sec  FC  21. 

214  Tenqmrary  Organ. — Organ  of  the  category  3 mentioned 
in  Sec  FC  21. 

215  Organ  of  the  First  Remove. — Organ  intrinsic  to  the 
constitution  of  the  parent  body. 

216  Organ  of  the  Second  Remove. — Organ  of  any  organ  of 
the  first  remove. 

217  Organ  of  the  Third  Remove. — Organ  of  any  organ  of  the 
second  remove. 

218  Organ  is  itself  a corporate  body. 

For  example,  1 The  President  of  India,  the  Parliament  of  India,  the  Supreme 
Court  of  India,  the  Governor  of  Madras,  the  Madras  Legislative  Assembly, 
the  High  Court  of  Madras,  the  Madras  Council  of  Ministers,  the  Senate,  the 
Academic  Council,  the  Syndicate,  and  the  Faculties  of  the  Vikram  University, 
the  Council  of  the  Madras  Library  Association  are  all  Constitutional  Organs 
of  their  respective  parent  bodies. 

2 The  Ministry  of  Education  of  the  Government  of  India,  the  Library 
Committee  of  the  Vikram  University,  the  Publication  Committee  of  the 
Madras  Library  Association,  the  Reception  Committee  of  the  Indian  Mathe- 
nmtical  Conference  of  1957,  and  the  Professors*  Council  of  the  Vivekananda 
College  are  Administrative  Organs  of  their  respective  parent  bodies. 

4 The  Indian  Taxation  Enquiry  Commission  of  1956  was  a Temporary 
Organ  of  the  Government  of  India. 

6 The  Privileges  Committee  of  the  Lok  Sabha  is  an  Organ  of  the  Second 
Remove  of  the  Government  of  India. 

* 

7 The  Subcommittee  of  the  Privileges  Committee,  and  the  Advisory 
Committee  for  Secondary  Education  of  the  Ministry  of  Education  are  Organs 
of  the  Third  Remove  of  the  Government  of  India. 

22  Goyenunent. — 

Sense  1 Corporate  body  with  full  or  limited  sovereign 
power  over  a territory.  It  has  generally  functions  of  execution, 

124 


AUTHOR 


FC24 


legislation,  justice,  and  administration.  Other  functions,  such 
as  defence,  taxation,  regulation  of  commerce,  public  transport, 
cohimunication  etc,  will  vary  with  the  degree  of  limitation  in 
the  sovereign  power. 

Sense  2 Local  Authority  in  charge  of  the  regulation, 
promotion,  and/or  provision  of  specified  local  public  services  in 
an  area,  under  power  delegated  by  the  government  within  the 
territory  of  which  its  own  area  lies,  and  with  a defined  extent 
of  autonomy. 

Sense  3 Organ  of  Government  in  sense  1 or  2 defined 
above. 

For  example,  1 the  Government  of  India,  the  Government  of  Madras, 
and  the  Government  of  the  United  Kingdom  are  Governments  in  sense  1. 

2 The  District  Board  of  Tanjavur,  the  Corporation  Madras,  and  the 
Panchayat  Board  of  Sirkali  are  Governments  in  sense  2. 

3 The  President  of  India,  the  Parliament  of  India,  the  Supreme  Court 
of  India,  the  Council  of  Ministers  of  Madras,  and  the  Council  of  the  Corpo- 
ration of  Madras  are  Governments  in  sense  3. 

23  Institution. — 

Sense  1 Independent  or  autonomous  corporate  body 
other  than  a government.  It  may  be  created  by  a government, 
or  constituted  under  a statute,  or  formed  voluntarily — either 
formally  or  informally.  It  has  or  it  is  intended  to  have  continued 
existence  and  functions  beyond  that  of  merely  convening  a 
conference. 

Sense  2 Organ  of  an  Institution  in  sense  1 defined  above. 

For  example,  the  Madras  Library  Association  is  an  Institution  in  sense  1. 
And  the  Council  of  the  Madras  Library  Association  is  an  Institution  in 
sense  2.  Instances  of  autonomous  bodies  are  discussed  in  Part  G. 

24  Conference. — Sense  1 Ad  hoc  assembly  for  deliberation 
or  formulation  and  expression  of  opinion  or  sentiments 

1 Not  convened  by 

11  A Government  and  made  up  solely  of  its  own  per- 
sonnel or  as  a Constituent  Assembly  to  form  a Sovereign  State, 
or 


125 


FC24 


CXJ^SSIFIED  CATALOGUE  CODE 


12  An  Institution  and  made  up  solely  of  its  members 
or  as  a Foundation  Assembly  to  form  an  Institution,  or 

13  More  than  one  Government  jointly  and  confin^ 
solely  to  their  own  personnel,  or 

14  More  than  one  Institution  jointly  and  confined 
solely  to  their  members; 

2 Convened  and  conducted  by 

21  A number  of  persons  and/or  corporate  bodies,  spon- 
taneously, to  consider  matters  of  common  interest,  or 

22  A body  with  no  function  or  existence  beyond  the 
conference  convened  and  held  by  it,  or 

23  A body  with  only  the  convening  and  holding  of 
conferences  at  intervals,  as  its  primary  function. 

For  example,  the  Indian  Mathematical  Conference  of  1957  is  a 
Conference  in  sense  1.  The  Reception  Committee  of  the  Indian  Mathenta- 
tical  Conference  of  1957  is  a Conference  is  sense  2. 

241  Organ  Conference. — Any  category  of  Assembly  ex- 
cluded from  the  definition  of  a Conference  in  Sec  FC4.  It  is 
an  Organ  of  the  Corporate  body  (ies)  convening  it. 

3 Anthor  of  a Work. — 

Sense  1 Person  creating  the  work,  that  is,  the  thought  and 
the  expression  constituting  it. 

Sense  2 Corporate  body  owning  responsibility  for  a work 
that  is,  for  the  thought  and  the  expression  constituting  it. 

31  Personal  Author. — ^Person  as  author,  the  responsibility 
for  the  thought  and  the  expression  constituting  the  work  resting 
solely  on  his  private  capacity  and  not  on  the  capacity  of  any 
office  being  held  by  him  within  a corporate  body,  nor  on  the 
capacity  of  that  body. 

For  example,  S R Ranganathan  is  the  Personal  Author  of  ed  4 of  the  work 
contained  in  this  book,  although  he  holds  the  office  of  President  of  the  Madras 
Library  Association  which  sponsored  that  edition.  For,  the  responsibility 
for  the  thought  and  the  expression  constituting  the  work  rests  solely  on  him 
in  his  private  capacity,  and  not  at  all  on  the  Madras  Library  Association  or  on 
him  in  his  official  capacity  as  its  President. 

32  Corporate  Auffior. — ^Corporate  body  as  author,  the 
responsibility  for  the  thought  and  expression  constituting  the 


126 


AUTHOR  FC6 

work  resting  solely  on  it  or  any  organ  of  it,  and  not  on  the  private 
capacity  of  any  person  or  persons  forming  part  of  or  heading 
o^ce  in  or  in  any  other  way  connected  with  that  body. 

For  example,  1 the  Library  Committee  of  the  University  of  Rangoon  is 
the  Corporate  Author  of  the  Catalogue  of  periodicals  in  the  University  and 
other  libraries  of  Rangoon^  1937,  though  it  might  have  been  actually  compiled 
by  the  librarian  of  that  University. 

2 The  work  contained  in  the  book  entitled  Rulings  of  S Satyamurti,  the 
Mayor  of  Madras^  1940,  does  not  have  Satyamurti  as  its  personal  author. 
But  it  is  of  Corporate  Authorship.  The  Author  is  the  Mayor  of  Madras. 
As  the  Mayor  of  Madras  is  elected  only  for  a period  of  one  year,  it  had  been 
necessary  to  add  the  name  of  Satyamurti  also,  not  as  name  of  the  personal 
author,  but  as  a means  of  individualising  the  particular  Mayor  who  gave  the 
Rulings.  The  Rulings  were  given  not  in  his  private  capacity,  but  only  in  the 
capacity  of  Mayoral  Office. 

3 The  work  contained  in  the  book  Despatch  including  a report  as  to  irri* 
gation  projects  on  the  Upper  Nile^  1901,  by  the  Agent  and  Consul^ieneral 
of  Great  Britain  in  Cairo  is  of  Corporate  Authorship  and  not  of  personal 
authorship.  For  the  Despatch  was  written  by  the  gentleman  working  as  the 
Agent  of  the  Government  of  Great  Britain  iii  Cairo  not  in  his  private  capacity 
but  in  his  corporate  capacity  as  an  organ  of  the  Government  of  Great  Britain. 

4 Compiler, — Author,  personal,  or  corporate,  making  up  a 
work  by  collecting  information  from  various  sources  and  arrang- 
ing them  in  a particular  way. 

For  example,  the  so  called  compiler  of  the  Concordance  to  the  Bible^  or  of  the 
Concordance  to  Keats,  or  of  a Directory,  or  of  a Who’s  Who,  or  of  any  other 
kind  of  serial  is  in  reality  its  Author. 

5 Joint  Authors.—  Two  or  more  authors,  personal  or 
corporate,  sharing  responsibility  for  the  thought  and  expre- 
ssion constituting  the  work,  the  portion  for  which  each  is 
separately  responsible  not  being  either  specified  or  separable. 

• 

For  example,  the  responsibility  for  the  thought  and  expression  constituting 
the  work  contained  in  the  book  Library  mannual,  1951,  by  S R Ranganathan 
and  K M Sivaraman  is  shared  by  the  two  authors.  The  portion  for  which 
each  is  separately  responsible  is  neither  specified  in  the  work  nor  is  it  separable. 
Therefore  this  work  is  of  Joint  Authorship. 

6 Pseudonymous  Author.— An  author  assuming  a false  or 
fitcitious  name  or  any  other  specification  different  from  the  real 


127 


FC6 


CLASSIFIED  CATALOGUE  CODE 


name.  A pseudonym  may  also  be  given  by  others  to  an  author 
or  it  may  even  get  started  in  a casual  way,  either  in  his  own  time 
or  in  later  times.  ^ 

The  motive  for  the  suppression  of  the  real  name  may  be  various — diffidence; 
sense  of  shame;  fear  of  consequences;  freakishness;  joking,  mystifying,  or 
hoaxing  instinct;  and  so  on.  1 myself  used  the  pseudonym  ‘Arithmeticus* 
in  an  article  to  the  Educational  review  of  Madras  in  1922,  and  the  pseudonym 
‘Libra’,  made  up  of  the  first  five  letters  of  the  word  ‘Librarian*,  in  articles 
contributed  in  1931  to  the  Hindu^  a daily  of  Madras,  as  it  was  found  expedient 
not  to  disclose  my  identity.  While  the  psychology  of  such  motives  may  be  of 
interest  for  its  own  sake,  it  is  not  directly  relevant  to  cataloguing.  But  the 
various  degrees,  to  which  the  element  of  fiction  and  concealment  is  introduced 
in  the  pseudonym  assumed  or  given,  are  not  without  interest. 

1 At  one  extreme,  there  is  the  adoption  or  the  gift  of  what  appears  like 
a regular  name,  though  different  from  the  real  name.  George  Eliot  is  an 
example.*  The  author’s  real  name  might  have  been  forgotten  and  he  may  be 
remembered  by  some  other  name. 

2 Secondly,  the  words  constituting  the  real  name  may  be  permuted.  For 
example,  Arthur  Travers  Crawford  used  the  pseudonym  T C Arthur. 

3 Thirdly,  the  letters  in  the  essential  word  in  the  real  name  or  in  all  or  some 
of  its  words  may  be  permuted.  For  example,  Anne  Lake  wrote  under  the 
pseudonym  Ekalenna.  While  such  anagrams  occur  at  alt  times,  there  appear 
to  be  some  periods  in  the  history  of  each  community  when  the  anagrammatic 
mood  is  in  an  epidemic  phase. 

4 Fourthly,  the  anagram  may  involve  the  omission  of  some  of  the  letters. 

5 Fifthly,  the  real  name  may  be  disfigured  by  the  inteipolation  of  letters 
or  words  among  the  legitimate  letters  and  words. 

6 Sixthly,  the  real  name  may  be  replaced  by  the  initial  letter  of  its  words, 
or  their  end-letters,  or  by  any  combination  of  these,  with  or  without  inter- 
vening punctuation  marks.  When  the  initial  letters  are  strung  together,  they 
are  said  to  form  Initionym,  For  example,  Edward  Hamilton  Aitken  adopted 
the  initionym  Eha.  Pronounceable  initionyms  are  nowadays  frequently 
used  to  denote  corporate  bodies.  Here  are  a few  examples: 

Uno= United  Nations  Organisation.  , 

Une$co= United  Nations  Educational  Scientific  and  Cultural  Organisation. ' 

Ifla^  International  Federation  of  Library  Associations. 

Afla— Asian  Federation  of  Library  Associations. 

lnsdoc»=  Indian  National  Scientific  Documentation  Centre. 

Scapa— Society  for  Checking  the  Abuses  of  Public  Advertising. 

Socony— Standard  Oil  Company  of  New  York. 

7 Seventhly,  a single  pseudonym  may  be  used  to  represent  two  or  more 
joint  authors;  and  conversely,  a double  pseudonym  may  be  used  to  represent 

128 


AUTHOR 


FC61 

a single  author^  producing  the  illusion  of  joint  authorship.  For  example^ 
the  two  joint  authors  1 Zangwill  and  L Cowen  used  the  pseudonym  *J  Freeman 
Be^;. 

8 Eighthly,  the  same  pseudonym  may  be  used  by  different  authors;  and 
conversely,  the  same  author  may  assume  diderent  pseudonyms  for  differ^t 
works  of  his.  Voltaire  is  reported  to  have  used  137  pseudonyms,  and  Frank-^ 
lin  57  pseudonyms. 

9 Ninthly,  the  real  name  may  be  replaced  by  the  name  of  place  of  birth, 
place  of  residence,  nationality,  or  profession;  academic  or  titular  distinctions; 
real  or  assumed  relationship;  horoscopic  peculiarities;  personal  peculiarities; 
political  leanings;  authorship  of  previous  publications;  pictures  or  diagrams; 
and  in  every  other  conceivable  way. 

61  Unmasking  of  Pseudonyms 

The  unmasking  of  fictitious  names  and  anonymity  is  a recognised  field  for 
bibliographical  and  cultural  scholarship. 

Germany  appears  to  have  been  one  of  the  first  countries  to  devote  attention 
to  this  problem.  Two  results  are: 

1 Placcii  (Vincentii).  Theatrum  anonymonim  ct  pseudonymorum. 
1708. 

2 Mylius  (Johenn  Christoph).  Bibliotheca  anonymonim  et  pseu- 
donymorum  detcctorum.  2 V.  1740. 

France  soon  followed  with 

1 Barbier  (Antoine  Alexandre).  Dictionnaire  des  ouvrages  anonymes 
et  pseudonymes.  4 V,  1806 

2 Querard  (Joseph  Marie)  Les  superchcries  litteraires  devoilees.  7 V. 

Italy  was  later  provided  with 

1 Melzi  (Gaetano).  Dizionario  di  opere  anonime  e pseudonime  di 
scrittori  italiani.  3 V.  1848 

The  Scandinavian  countries  own  jointly 

1 Collin  (E).  Anonymer  og  pseudonymer.  1869. 

The  Netherlands  has  been  supplied  by 

1 Doominck  (Jan  Izaac  van).  Vermonde  en  naamlooze  schrijvers 
opgespoord  op  het  gebiet.  2 V.  1883 

The  Anglo-Saxon  ccRintries  are  armed  with  the  following  publications; 

1 Halkett  (Samuel)  and  Laing  (John).  Dictionary  of  anonymous  and 
pseudonymous  English  literature.  7 V.  1926-32. 

2 Stonehill  (Charles  A)  etc.  Anonyma  and  pseudonyma.  4 V. 
1926. 

3 Taylor  (Archer)  and  Mosher  (Frederic  J).  Bibliographical  history 
of  anonyma  and  pseudonyma.  1951. 

The  Indian  languages  are  yet  to  be  provided  with  such  bibliographical  tools. 

129 


9 


FC7  CLASSIFIED  CATiU.OGUE  CODE 

7 ABMqmoiis  Woik.— Work  of  unknown  authorship  either 
personal  or  corporate. 

Many  of  the  sacred  books  are  anonymous.  Some  of  the  clas^  of  old 
are  also  anonymous.  A few  pedestrian  books  also  occasionally  come  out 
anonymously.  In  the  German  library  practice,  a work  of  corporate  author- 
ship also  is  treated  as  an  anonymous  work. 


130 


CHAPTER  FD 


’ft 


COLLABORATOR  AND  SPONSOR 

1 Cdlabwator. — Person  or  corporate  body  associated  with 
a work  and/or  its  author  or  authors  in  a secondary  capacity  not 
amounting  to  authorship — ^for  example,  director,  guide,  assistant, 
commentator,  illustrator,  engraver,  translator,  reviser,  editor, 
reporter,  writer  of  introduction  or  foreword,  epitomiser,  adapter, 
libratist,  writer  of  the  words  in  a musical  composition,  writer 
of  the  words  in  a pictorial  book. 

For  example,  in  the  work  contained  in  the  book  Manual  of  chemical  tech- 
nology (1904)  by  Rudolf  Von  Wagner,  it  is  stated  that  the  work  was  revised 
by  Ferdinand  Fischer,  that  it  was  translated  from  the  German  edition  13  by 
William  Crookes,  and  that  it  was  also  edited  by  the  same  Crookes.  We 
therefore  say  that  Fischer  and  Crookes  are  collaborators  associated  with  the 
work  contained  in  the  book  in  secondary  capacities  not  amounting  to 
authorship. 

2 Sponsor. — Person  or  corporate  body  with  whose  good 
will,  authority,  or  finance  or  under  whose  auspices  a work  is 
published,  though  the  responsibility  for  the  thought  and  the  ex- 
pression constituting  the  work  does  not  at  all  rest  with  the  said 
person  or  corporate  body,  but  rests  solely  on  the  author  of  the 
work  as  a whole  or  on  the  respective  authors  of  the  different 
contributions  in  the  work. 

A sponsor  is  not  author.  But  a periodical  publication  is  often  traced  by  a 
reader  through  the  name  of  its  sponsor.  This  tradition  is  more  than  a century 
old.  Cataloguing  practice  has  to  strive  hard  to  get  away  from  the  tradition 
of  treating  the  sponsor  as  if  he  were  the  author. 


131 


CHAPTER  FE 


DOCUMENT 

1 Embodied  Thought -Record  of  work  on  paper  or  other 
material,  fit  for  physical  handling,  transport  across  space,  and 
preservation  through  time. 

This  book  itself  is  Embodied  Thought.  It  is  recorded  on  paper  by  the 
process  of  printing.  The  record  is  bound  in  stiff  board  in  order  to  make  it 
fit  for  physical  handling.  Because  it  is  so  embodied,  it  is  possible  to  send  it 
to  any  part  of  the  world.  If  it  be  not  embodied  as  a record,  it  will  soon  be 
forgotten;  and  the  work  embodied  in  it  cannot  be  preserved  through  time 
accurately,  or  preserved  at  all.  The  work  known  as  the  Vedas  was  not 
recorded  in  a document,  for  a long,  long  time.  It  could  therefore  be  com-* 
municated  to  others  in  those  far  off  days  only  by  word  of  mouth.  It  could 
not  therefore  be  known  all  through  the  world  in  those  days,  as  it  is  today  after 
being  embodied  in  a document.  Again  it  has  to  be  handed  down  from  gene- 
ration to  generation  only  through  word  of  mouth.  This  had  necessarily 
led  to  hundreds  of  versions  of  the  same  work.  So  it  was  with  the  ancient 
epic  poems  the  Ramayana  and  the  Iliad, 

Such  ancient  works  were  first  recorded  on  materials  such  as  leaves,  silk 
cloth,  and  stones.  Later  they  came  to  be  recorded  on  other  materials  and 
finally  on  paper.  But  even  then,  enough  copies  could  not  be  produced 
economically  for  being  sent  out  to  many  distant  places.  The  invention  of 
printing  from  movable  metallic  types  and  the  continuous  improvement  of 
it  have  led  to  the  overcoming  of  all  such  difficulties. 

2 Document. —Embodied  thought. 

This  term  is  introduced  for  brevity.  It  was  brought  into  use  a few  decades 
ago  to  emphasise  embodied  micro  thought.  It  is  now  extended  in  use  to 
include  any  embodied  thought,  micro  or  macro. 

I# 

3 Macro  DocnineDt. — Usually  a work  expressing  macro 
thought  is  embodied  into  a document  all  by  itself.  Such  a 
document  may  be  called  Macro  Document. 

4 Micro  Document. — Usually  a work  expressing  micro 
thought  is  not  embodied  into  a document  all  by  itself.  Several 
micro  documents  are  embodied  in  one  and  the  same  document. 

132 


DOCUMENT  FES 

Then  we  say  that  the  several  Micro  Documents  are  clubbed 
tocher  in  a single  macro  document. 

'S  Host  Document. — macro  document  is  called  the  Host 
Document  for  each  of  the  micro  documents  embodied  in  it. 

For  example,  a periodica]  is  a macro  document.  Each  article  in  it  is  a 
micro  document.  The  periodical  is  the  Host  Document  for  each  of  the  articles 
contained  in  it.  So  also,  a book  is  the  Host  Document  for  each  of  its  chapters 
and  sections,  which  may  be  looked  upon  as  micro  documents. 

6 Locus. — The  Host  Document  in  which  a Micro  Document 
occurs  and  its  exact  position  within  it. 

For  example,  the  Locus  of  the  micro  document  Indian  national  biblu^raphy 
by  me  is  the  Annals  of  library  science.  4;  1957;  65-72 — that  is  pages  65  to  72 
of  volume  4,  of  the  said  periodical,  which  was  published  in  1957. 

7 Volume. — Several  leaves  of  paper  or  other  material  used 
for  recording,  cither  the  whole  or  a part  of  a work,  fastened 
together  so  as  to  be  opened  at  any  desired  place. 

A volume  is  an  independent  physical  unit. 

8 Thought-Content. — Expressed  thought  embodied  within 
a document  or  a volume  of  it. 


133 


CHAPTER  FF 


KINDS  OF  DOCUMENTS 

I Conventitnal  Docmnent  of  Kind  1. — Document  with  paper 
as  basic  material  and  with  the  work  recorded  on  it  in  the  phonetic 
symbols  fomung  the  script  of  an  articulate  natural  or  artificial 
language,  with  or  without  illustrations  used  as  a help  in  the 
communication  of  the  thought*content.  The  recording  is  done 
by  printing,  or  by  some  near-printing  process;  or  the  record  is 
a reproduction  of  the  above  or  of  the  original  manuscript  of  it 
by  photographic,  chemical,  or  any  other  so-called  mechanical 
process,  to  a size  more  or  less  the  same  as  that  of  the  original. 

For  brevity,  this  may  be  denoted  by  the  term  Printed  Botdr, 
using  it  in  a general  sense. 

The  conventional  book,  the  periodical  publication,  and  a fascimile  repro- 
duction of  either  are  common  examples.  This  book  is  a Conventional  Docu- 
ment of  Kind  1.  The  quarterly  Anmds  of  library  science  is  also  so.  A 
facsmile  copy  of  this  book  made  by  photographic  process  will  also  be  a 
Conventional  Document  of  Kind  1. 

I I Periodical  Publication. — Conventional  Document  of  Kind  1 
with  the  following  attributes: 

1 A volume,  or  a small  group  of  volumes  of  it,  is  intended 
to  be  published  or  completed  normally  once  in  a year  (or  at 
other  regular  intervals),  though  irregularity  in  interval  is  not 
ruled  out; 

2 Each  successive  volume,  or  periodical  group  of  volumes, 
is  usually  distinguished  by  the  year  of  publication  and/or  by  a 
number  belonging  to  a system  of  simple  or, complex  ordinal 
number.  Such  a number  is  usually  called  a Volume  Number. 

3 The  intention  had  been  to  continue  the  publication  of  the 
volumes  for  ever,  though  not  actually  carried  out;  and 

4 The  intention  had  been  to  continue  the  same  title  in  all 
the  volumes,  though  not  actually  carried  out. 

The  term  Periodical  Publication  is  also  used  to  denote  any 
single  volume  of  a Periodical  Publication  as  defined  above. 


134 


KINDS  ae  DoctnoNTS 


FF2I 


111  PotodkaL— Periodical  publication  of  which  eadi  volume 
is  made  up  of  distinct  and  independent  contributions,  not  form- 
ic a continuous  exposition,  normally  by  two  or  more  persona! 
authors  and  normally  the  specific  subjects  and  the  authors  of 
the  contributions  in  successive  volumes  also  being,  in  general, 
dilferent,  but  all  the  subjects  falling  within  one  and  the  same 
region  of  knowledge,  contemplated  to  be  brought  mthin  its 
purview.  It  is  not  usually  released  complete  as  a volume  but 
only  in  fascicules  or  numbers,  as  they  are  called.  It  essentially 
expounds  knowledge  and  not  repeat  the  same  kind  of  information, 
usually  in  the  same  pattern,  in  each  of  its  volumes  just  bringing 
the  information  up-to-date  from  volume  to  volume. 

The  term  Periodica]  is  also  used  to  denote  any  single  volume 
of  a periodical  as  defined  above. 

Examples: 

1 Annals  of  library  science. 

2 Proceedings,  Royal  Society  of  London. 

3 Zeitschrift,  Deutschen  Morgenlandischen  Gesellschaft. 

112  Serial. — Periodical  publication  of  which  each  volume 
or  each  periodical  group  of  volumes  embodies  more  or  less 
the  same  kind  of  information,  usually  in  the  same  pattern,  mainly 
relating  to  its  year  (or  other  period)  of  coverage.  It  is  usually 
released  complete  as  a volume.  It  is  not  made  of  diverse  contri- 
butions each  forming  a continuous  exposition  of  knowledge. 

The  term  Serial  is  also  used  to  denote  any  single  volume  of 
a serial  as  defined  above. 

Examples: 

1 Annual  report  of  the  Director  of  Agriculture,  Madras. 

2 Madras  telephone  directory. 

3 Statesman's^  year-book. 

4 Who’s  who  in  America. 

5 Year-book  of  the  Carnegie  Institution  of  Washington. 

21  Indexing  Periodical. — A periodical  giving  a bare  catalogue 
of  articles  bearing  on  a stated  subject  and  appearing  in  the 
current  fascicules  of  periodicals.  It  may  also  include  bare 
entries  of  books  currently  published. 


135 


FF21 


CLASSIFIED  CATALOGUE  CODE 


Exitmpksi 

1 Agricultural  index. 

2 Technical  index. 

3 Law  index. 

22  Abstracting  Periodical. — A periodical  giving  a catalogue 
of  articles  bearing  on  a stated  subject  and  appearing  in  the 
current  fascicules  of  periodicals,  each  entry  being  provided  with 
an  abstract  of  the  article  described  by  it.  It  may  also  include 
annotated  entries  of  books  currently  published. 

Examples: 

] Biological  abstracts. 

2 Library  science  abstracts. 

3 Science  abstracts:  Electrical  engineering. 

23  Reviewiii^  Periodical. — A periodical  giving  in  narrative 
form  an  account  of  the  contributions  bearing  on  a stated  subject 
and  appearing  in  the  fascicules  and  the  books  published  during 
its  period  of  coverage. 

Examples: 

1 Year’s  work  in  librarianship. 

2 Reports  on  progress  in  physics. 

3 Annual  review  of  biochemistry. 

3 Book. — Conventional  Document  of  Kind  1,  other  than 
periodical  publication — that  is,  it  has  been  completed  or  has 
been  intended  to  be  completed  in  a finite  number  of  volumes. 
It  is  generally  in  one  volume.  Some  are  in  many  volumes. 

The  above  definition  really  connotes  what  is  commonly  understood  by  the 
term  Book.  This  book,  for  example,  is  a “Book”  according  to  the  above 
definition. 

31  Molti*Volumed  Book. — Book  in  two  or  more  volumes 
giving  a continuous  exposition,  and,  for  this  or  for  any  other 
reason  in  the  distribution  of  thought  among  the  volumes,  com- 
pelling the  treatment  of  all  the  volumes  as  an  inseparable  set, 
I e as  if  they  together  formed  a single  volume. 

Examples: 

1 The  book  Principles  of  economics  of  Frank  William  Taus  published 
in  two  volumes  in  1920. 

136 


KINDS  OF  DOCUMENTS  FF6 

2 The  book  Letters  of  Sir  Waiter  Scott,  edited  by  H J C Orietson 
and  publisNd  from  1932  onwards  in  several  volumes. 

The  book  Dictionary  of  the  inorganic  compounds  edited  by  M K 
Homnann  and  published  in  1921  in  four  volumes.  This  book  is  said  to 
be  in  three  volumes.  But  the  first  volume  consists  of  two  parts  published 
as  independent  volumes. 

4 Conqposite  Book. — Book  with  two  or  more  contributions, 
each  with  its  own  title,  not  forming  a continuous  exposition  and 
often,  though  not  necessarily,  by  different  authors. 

41  Ordinary  Composite  Book. — Composite  book  provided 
with  a single,  generic  title  to  denote  all  the  contributions 
collectively. 

Anthology  of  several  authors,  christomathy,  hymn-book, 
prayer-book,  song-book,  symposium,  Festschrift  and  similar 
compilations  come  under  this  category. 

Examples: 

1 The  book  Happy  baby,  published  in  1926.  It  has  contributions  from 
L Emmett  Holt,  Ralph  Lo^nstine,  Harvey  J Burkhart,  and  Henry  L K 
Shaw. 

2 The  book  University  of  Saint  Andrews,  Five-hundredth  anniversary: 
Memorial  volume  of  scientific  papers,  published  in  1911.  This  contains 
contributions  by  several  authors. 

3 Science  and  religion,  a symposium,  published  in  1931, 

42  Artificial  Composite  Book. — Composite  book  without  a 
generic  title  to  denote  all  the  contributions  collectively. 

An  Artificial  Composite  Book  may  be  created  by  the  publisher  by  issuing 
two  or  more  different  books  within  one  and  the  same  cover,  but  without  a 
common  title-page.  U may  also  be  created  by  a library  by  binding  several 
books  together  into  a single  volume. 

5 Contribution. — Work  forming  a part  of  a composite  book, 
or  a periodical,  or  a serial. 

51  Article. — Contribution  in  a periodical. 

52  Contributor. — Author  of  a contribution. 

6 Simple  Book. — Book  which  is  not  composite,  that  is 
which  embodies  work  by  a single  author  or  by  joint  authors. 
It  may  also  be  anonymous. 


This  book  is  a Simple  Book. 


FF7  cxAssmsD  catazxwue  code 

7 iBcmabala. — A book  printed  within  a few  decade  of  the 
invention  of  modem  printing — say  in  the  fifteenth  century. 

$ Restricted  field  of  this  Code. — ^This  code  confines  itself  to  the  cataloguing 
of  convenitional  books  and  periodical  publications  mentioned  in  Sec  FFl  to 
FF  6 only.  This  restricts  its  field  to  modem  books  and  periodicals  without 
any  special  features  of  physical  bibliography  needing  description.  In  parti- 
cular, it  does  not  provide  Rules  for  Descriptive  Cataloguing  or  for  the  Cata- 
loguing of  Incunabula.  These  are  of  interest  only  to  historical  bibliographers 
and  not  to  ordinary  readers.  A Supplementary  Code  is  necessary  for  each 
of  these  excluded  categories. 

91  Conventional  Document  of  Kind  2.— Document  similar  to 
Conventional  Document  of  Kind  1 but  the  recording  being  in 
a non-conventional  script,  such  as  braille,  stenograph,  music 
in  notatoin,  and  cipher. 

92  Conventional  Document  of  Kind  3. — Document  similar  to 
Conventional  Document  of  Kind  1,  except  that  the  graphic 
medium  is  not  phonetic  symbols  but  essentially  drawings,  pictures, 
maps,  and  similar  ones. 

93  Conventional  Document  of  Kind  4, — Document  similar  to 
Conventional  Document  of  Kind  1,  but  the  recording  being 
done  by  handwriting.  This  is  usually  called  Manuscript. 

931  Non>Conveational  Manuscript. — Manuscript  using 

material  other  than  paper. 

94  Non-Convmitional  Document  of  Kind  1. — ^Photograph  ie, 
chemical,  or  any  other  so  called  mechanical  reproduction  of  any 
Kind  of  Conventional  Document  on  an  extremely  reduced  scale 
needing  the  use  of  special  reading  apparatus. 

Micro  card,  micro  film,  micro  filmstrip  and  kindred  materials  are  examples. 
One  micro  card  of  size  12Sx7S  mm  may  contain  the  reproduction  of  a 
hundred  pages  of  a normal  book. 

95  Reprograph. — Non-conventional  document  of  kind  1 or 
a photographic,  chemical,  or  any  other  so-called  mechanical 
reproductions  of  any  kind  of  conventional  document  to  a size 
more  or  less  the  same  as  that  of  the  origina]. 

96  Non-Convmitional  Document  of  Kind  2. — Document  made 
of  sound-record,  whether  of  articulate  sound  or  of  music.  This 
is  called  Audio  Document. 


138 


KINDS  OF  DOCUMENTS  FF99I 

961  S^peakiog  Bedi. — ^Printed  book  with  a companion- 
attachment  of  the  sound-record  of  tim  words  in  it. 

97  Non-CoBTOitional  Document  of  Kind  3. — Document  made 
of  cinema  reels.  This  is  called  Visnal  Document. 

98  NoD-ConT«Btional  Document  of  Kind  4. — ^Document  made 
of  talkie  reels.  This  is  called  Audio-Visual  Document. 

991  Nmi-Conveational  Document  of  Kind  5. — Document  made 
of  record  of  natural  or  social  phenomena  made  directly  by  an 
instrument,  without  being  passed  through  human  mind  and 
without  being  woven  into  thought  created  and  expressed  by 
human  mind.  This  may  be  called  Instrnmmit-Record  of 
Phmiomena. 

An  account  of  all  these  kinds  of  documents,  and  particularly  of  the  new 
kind  called  Instrument-Record  of  Phenomena  will  be  found  in  a paper 
entitled  Document:  Conventional  and  non-conventional  [RD  2). 

Supplementary  Catalogue  Codes  are  necessary  for  cataloguing  each  of  the 
varieties  described  in  Sec  FF7  and  Sec  FF91  to  FF991  respectively.  The 
Rules  in  this  Code  form  only  the  basic  Rules  for  such  documents. 


139 


CHAPTER  FG 


PRELIMINARY  PAGES 

1 Tide«Page. — ^Page,  of  a document  or  a volume  of  it, 
containing  its  Title-Statement.  Usually,  it  also  contains  the 
Author-Statement,  the  Collaborator-Statement,  and  the  Imprint. 
It  also  indicates  the  Edition  in  many  cases. 

Page  3 of  this  book  is  its  Title-Page. 

2 Over-Flow  of  Title-Page. — Page  (s)  immediately  succeeding 
or  preceding  the  title-page  of  a document  or  a volume  of  it  and 
containing  part  of  the  information  usually  given  on  the  title-page 
and/or  some  of  the  statements  mentioned  in  Sec  FL4,  FL7 
and  FL81,  and  information  about  other  additional  factors  such 
as  the  Series  to  which  the  document  may  belong. 

Pages  1,  2 and  4 form  the  Over-Flow  of  the  Title-page  of  this  book. 

21  In  the  case  of  a Composite  Book,  Over-Flow  of  Title- 
Page  is  deemed  to  include  every  page  in  which  the  names  (s)  of 
the  author  (s)  and  collaborators  and  the  title  of  any  of  the 
contributions  or  constituent  works,  as  the  case  may  be,  are  found. 

3 Title-Leaf. — ^The  leaf  of  which  the  recto  is  the  Title-Page. 

In  this  book  the  verso  of  the  title-leaf  contains  the  Entry 

Statement  for  Author,  the  Edition-Statement,  and  the  Call 
Number  which  is  virtually  the  Subject-Statement. 

4 Half-Title  Page. — ^The  recto  of  the  leaf  usually  preceding 
the  title-leaf  and  containing  the  half-title  of  the  document. 

Page  1 of  this  book  is  its  Half-Title  Page.  , 

5 Half-Title  Leaf. — The  leaf  of  which  the  recto  is  the  Half- 
Title  Page. 


140 


CHAPTER  FH 


SERIES 

1 Series. — A set  of  books,  not  constituting  a multi-volumcd 
book,  and  with  the  following  attributes: 

1 The  books  are  issued,  normally  successively  by  one 
publisher  or  by  one  sponsoring  body  or  person,  usually  in  a 
uniform  style,  and  having  some  similarity  of  subject  or  standard 
or  purpose; 

2 Each  book  has  normally  a distinct  and  independent  title 
and/or  other  features  of  its  own; 

3 Each  book  has  normally  a different  author; 

4 There  is  a collective  name  to  denote  the  set,  called  the 
Name  of  the  Series  and  given  in  all  or  at  least  in  one  of  the  books 
of  the  set;  and 

5 Each  book  is  or  can  be  assigned  a distinct  number, 
called  the  Serial  Number.  It  may  belong  to  a system  of  simple 
or  complex  ordinal  numbers  such  as  1,  2,  3,  etc;  3.1,  3.2,  3.3, 
etc;  or  1957.  1,  1957.2,  1957.3,  etc. 

For  example,  this  book  belongs  to  the  Ranganathan  Series  in  Library 
Science.  Its  serial  number  is  2.  Other  examples  of  Series  are : 

1 Broadway  oriental  library. 

2 Cambridge  tracts  in  mathematics  and  physics. 

3 Library  of  philosophy. 

4 Modem  world  series. 

5 University  of  Delhi,  library  science  series. 

There  is  a list  of  such  publishers*  series,  current  in  Great  Britain,  in  the 
earlier  pages  of  the  English  catalogue  of  any  year. 

§ 

2 Pseudo-Series  of  Kind  1.— A set  of  books  not  constituting 
a multi-volumed  book  and  with  the  following  attributes; 

1 All  the  books  are  of  common  authorship; 

2 All  the  books  belong  to  the  same  edition  in  sense  2; 

3 The  title  of  each  book  has  a distinctive  part  in  addition 
to  the  name  of  the  edition  in  sense  2; 


141 


FH2 


CLASSmSD  CATAjpOOUE  CXXIE 

4 Each  book  is  or  can  be  assigned  a Serial  Nnnriier  belong- 
ing to  a system  simple  or  complex  ordinal  numbers;  and 

5 The  name  of  the  author  taken  along  with  the  name*^of 
the  edition  in  sense  2 is  suitable  to  be  rised  as  if  it  were  the  Name 
of  a Series. 

Extmgfk: 

Consider  the  book,  wdiose  spine  has  the  following  words;  Works  of  Leo 
Tolstoy  I Qiildhood,  Boyhood  and  Youth  / Centenary  Edition  / 3 / 1928. 

It  belongs  to  the  Pseudo-series  of  Kind  1 . It  may  be  named  Tolstoy 
(Leo).  Centenary  ed. 

3 Pseudo-Series  of  Kind  2. — A set  of  books,  not  constituting 
a multi-volumed  book  and  with  the  following  attributes: 

1 All  the  books  are  of  common  authorship; 

2 The  titles  of  the  various  books  have  a common  part 
capable  of  being  used  as  their  common  generic  title; 

3 The  title  of  each  book  has  a distinctive  part  of  its  own 
in  addition  to  the  generic  part; 

4 Each  book  is  or  can  be  assigned  a Serial  Number  belong- 
ing to  a system  of  simple  or  complex  ordinal  numbers;  and 

5 The  name  of  the  author  taken  along  with  the  generic 
title  is  suitable  to  be  used  as  if  it  were  the  Name  of  a Series. 

Exanyile: 

Consider  the  book  whose  title-page  reads  as  follow^:  E Grimsehl  / 
Text-book  of  physics  / Edited  by  R Tomaschek  / Volume  4 Optics.../ 
Translated  ...  by  L A Woodward  / 1933.  It  belongs  to  the  Pseudo- 
series of  Kind  2. 

It  may  be  named  “Grimsehl  (E):  Text-book  of  physics  ed  by  R 
Tomaschek”. 

4 Pseudo-Series  of  Kind  3. — ^A  set  of  books  mot  constituting 
a multi-volumed  book  and  with  the  following  attributes: 

1 All  the  books  are  not  of  a common  authorship; 

2 The  titles  of  the  various  books  have  a common  part 
capable  of  being  used  as  a common  generic  title; 

3 The  title  of  each  book  has  a distinctive  part  of  its  own 
in  addition  to  the  generic  part; 

142 


SERIES  FH4 

• 

4 Each  book  is  or  can  be  assigned  a Seihd  Nunber  belong- 
ing  to  a system  of  simple  or  complex  ordinal  numbers;  and 
\ S The  generic  title  is  suitable  to  be  used  as  if  it  were  the 
Name  of  a Series. 

Example  I 

The  volumes  edited  by  Charles  Oman  under  the  generic  title  “History 
of  England”. 


143 


CHAPTER  FJ 

f 

RELATED  DOCUMENTS 

1 Related  Books. — A set  of  books  whose  Main  Entries  will 
not  always  hie  consecutively,  but  which  all  the  same  call  for  their 
being  linked  up  by  the  catalogue  on  account  of  their  being  related 
to  one  another  for  some  important  reasons. 

Five  kinds  of  Related  Books  have  so  far  been  isolated.  These  are  des- 
cribed in  succeeding  Rules.  In  a sense,  the  books  belonging  to  a series  may 
also  be  considered  as  forming  a kind  of  Related  Books.  But  these  usually 
contain  in  themselves  all  the  necessary  information  about  the  Series  unlike 
the  other  kinds  given  in  this  chapter.  Therefore,  “Series”  has  been  treated 
in  a separate  chapter — Chap  FH. 

2 Extract. — A document  which  embodies  a portion  of  another 
document. 

Examples-. 

1 The  book  Library  science  and  scientific  method  is  an  Extract  from  the 
book  Five  laws  of  library  science,  cd  2,  1957. 

2 The  book  Libraries  in  the  District  of  Columbia  (1921)  by  W I Swanton 
is  an  extract  from  Special  libraries.  12;  1921. 

3 Separate. — A portion  of  a document — usually,  but  not 
necessarily,  a periodical  publication — tissued  in  the  same  format 
as  the  original,  whether  printed  from  the  types  or  plates  of  the 
original,  or  reset. 

4 The  word  Reprint  is  loosely  used  to  denote  either 

1 A separate;  or 

2 A reproduction  of  an  edition  of  a work  without  alteration. 

5 Merger  Book. — A book  formed  by  the  merging  of  two  or 
more  books. 

Examples: 

1 The  book  “Theory  of  economic  dynamics,  an  essay  on  cyclical  and  long- 
range  changes  in  capitalistic  economy”  (1953)  by  M Kalaeck  contains  the 
note  “Published  in  lieu  of  the  second  ^itions  of: 


144 


RELATED . DOCUMENTS 


FJ6 

^Essays  in  the  theory  of  economic  fluctuations’;  and 

’Studies  in  economic  dynamics.”* 

2 , The  book  “Economics  and  economic  policy  of  dual  societies  asexempli- 
fled  by  Indonesia”  (1953)  by  J H Boek  contains  the  note  “Revised  and  en* 
larged  version  of  the  author's  two  earlier  studies  published  separately  under 
the  titles: 

‘Structure  of  the  Netherlands  Indian  economy’  (1942);  and 

‘Solutions  of  the  Netherlands  Indies  economy’  (1946)”. 

6 Other  Kinds  of  Related  Books. — 

Examples: 

1 The  books  “Short  history  of  the  British  Empire”  (1934)  by  Anderson 
and  Marsdon;  and  “Teacher’s  hand«book  to  Anderson  and  Marsdon’s 
Short  history  of  the  British  Empire”  (1955). 

2 The  books  “Elementary  practical  physics”  (1938)  by  N H Black  Davis; 
and  “Laboratory  experiment  in  elementary  physics:  To  accompany  Black 
and  Davis’s  “Elementary  practical  physics”  (1938)  by  N H Black. 


10 


145 


CHAPTER  FK 


EDITION 

1 Edition  in  Sense  1.— One  of  the  different  printings  or 
reproductions  of  a document  with  or  without  slight  change  in 
thought-content,  each  being  distinguished  form  the  others, 
either  numerically  or  by  some  other  equivalent  term  such  as 
“New^\  “Revised”,  and  “Enlarged”. 

2 Edition  in  Sense  2.— One  of  the  different  forms  in  which 
one  and  the  same  work  is  published,  each  form  having  a distinc- 
tive name  almost  amounting  to  a proper  noun — such  as  “Arden 
Edition”,  “Variorum  Edition”,  “Memorial  Edition”,  and  “Loeb 
Classics”. 

An  edition  in  sense  2 forms  Pseudo-Series  of  Kind  1.  [See  Sec  FH2). 

3 Each  book  in  a series  or  a pseudo-series  may  be  brought 
out  in  seccessive  Editions  of  Kind  1,  independently  of  one 
another. 

Examples: 

1 This  book  in  the  Ranganathan  Series  in  Library  Science  is  in  edition  5, 
whereas  the  book  Colon  classification  in  the  same  series  is  now  in  edition  6. 

2 The  Variorum  Editions  of  the  different  plays  of  Shakespeare  are  now 
in  different  editions  of  kind  1 . Some  are  in  edition  1 ; some  are  in  edition  2; 
and  so  on. 

3 The  same  usually  happens  also  in  respect  of  pseudo-series  of  all  kinds. 

Sections  FKl  and  FK2  show  that  the  term  edition  is  used  in  two  senses. 

When  it  is  used  in  sense  2,  the  application  of  sense  1 also  becomes  possible. 
It  will  be  a convenience  if  this  homonym  is  resolved  and  different  terms  are 
used  to  denote  the  two  different  senses.  c 

Even  in  respect  of  sense  I,  the  term  edition  is  not  used  alike  by  all  the 
publishers.  Some  call  a mere  reprint  also  a new  edition  and  give  it  a new 
number.  At  the  other  extreme  some  give  the  new  number  to  the  edition  only 
if  there  is  considerable  change  introduced.  Between  these  two  extremes 
there  are  all  kinds  of  usages  depending  upon  the  degree  of  change  introduced. 
It  is  the  continuity  of  the  degree  of  changes  between  the  editions  that  makes 
it  difficult  to  arrive  at  a definite  standard  for  the  denotation  of  the  term 
Edition. 


146 


CHAPTER  FL 


CATALOGUER’S  NEEDS 

1 Fonnat. — ^A  statement  of  the  size  of  the  leaf  of  a document. 

2 Collatim). — ^A  statement  of  the  number  of  volumes,  pages, 
plates,  maps,  and  other  illustrations,  of  a conventional  docu- 
ment, and  an  equivalent  statement  in  the  case  of  a non-con- 
ventional  document. 

A statement  of  Format  and  Collation  is  essential  in  a catalogue  of  incu- 
nabula and  of  documents  of  all  kinds  other  than  the  conventional  documents 
of  kinds  1 to  3.  It  is  necessary  also  in  a National  Bibliography,  State  Biblio- 
graphy, and  other  bibliographies  even  of  modem  conventional  books  and 
periodicals.  But  it  is  not  necessary  in  a library  catalogue  of  modem  con- 
ventional books  and  periodicals  in  a Service-Library  of  the  normal  kind. 

3 Imprint. — Record,  in  a document  or  a volume  of  it,  of  the 
name(s)  of  its  publisher  (s),  of  the  name  (s)  of  the  place  (s)  of  its 
publication,  and  of  the  year  of  its  publication. 

4 Edition-Statement. — Record,  in  a document  or  a volume 
of  it,  of  the  number  of  each  of  the  successive  editions  of  it  or  of  a 
distinctive  edition  of  it  with  a proper  name,  along  with  the  year 
of  publication  of  each. 

‘Edition’  and  ‘Distinctive  edition’  are  defined  in  Chap  FK.  Page  4 of 
this  book  gives  the  Edition-Statement. 

5 Title-Statenient. — Record,  in  a document  or  a volume  of  it, 
of  the  title  of  the  work  embodied  in  it. 

6 Author-Statement. — Record,  in  a document  or  a volume 
of  it,  of  the  name(8)  of  the  author(s)  of  the  work  embodied  in  it. 

Page  3 of  this  book  contains  the  Title-Statement  as  well  as  the  Author- 
Statement  of  the  work  embodied  in  it. 

7 Entry  Statement  for  Author. — Record,  in  a document  or 
a volume  of  it,  of  the  year  of  birth  (and  also  the  year  of  death  in 
the  case  of  a deceased  person),  and  of  the  alternative  name(s), 

147 


FL7  CLASSOTED  CATALOGUE  CODE 

if  any,  of  each  author  of  the  work  embodied  in  it,  and  in  addition 
an  indication  of  the  Entry  Element  and  the  Secondary  Element 
in  ^ch  name. 

‘Entry  element*  and  ‘Secondary  element’  are  defined  in  Sec  FN. 

It  has  not  yet  become  a common  practice  to  give  the  Entry  Statement  for 
Author  in  documents. 


71  Homonym 

But  cataloguers  find  that  the  years  of  an  author  are  the  sharp  elements  to 
resolve  homonyms  in  the  names  of  authors.  On  account  of  universal  literacy 
and  cheap  methods  of  printing,  several  authors  with  the  same  name  are  now 
producing  works  which  are  embodied  into  documents.  It  becomes  difficult 
to  distinguish  the  different  authors  with  the  same  name.  For  some  years, 
certain  libraries  have  been  endeavouring  to  ascertain  the  years  of  birth  of  the 
authors,  in  order  to  use  them  for  resolving  homonyms.  The  Library  of 
Congress  of  U S A has  been  doing  this  work  for  all  authors  in  the  world, 
whose  works  it  gets.  But  the  response  is  not  always  satisfactory.  In  1946 
1 attempted  to  get  the  years  of  birth  of  several  authors  whose  names  were  not 
found  in  Who  is  who.  Appeal  through  newspapers  brought  little  information. 
Addresses  of  many  authors  could  not  be  found  out.  Even  when  found  out, 
requests  did  not  elicit  replies. 

72  Alternative  Name 

Again,  cataloguers  need  help  from  Entry  Statement  for  Author  to  link 
up  the  different  alternative  names  including  pseudonyms,  which  an  author 
might  have  used  in  different  works  of  his.  If  this  help  is  not  given  by  each  of 
the  documents  embodying  the  several  works  in  respect  of  each  of  the  earlier 
documents,  the  cataloguer  has  to  make  inquiries  to  find  them  out.  This 
would  involve  waste  of  cataloguing  time.  This  waste  will  occur  in  all  the 
hundreds  of  libraries  acquiring  documents,  by  the  same  author.  Thus  the 
total  wastage  involved  will  be  huge  in  any  community.  The  magnitude  of 
this  wastage  is  not  easily  realised.  For,  it  is  scattered  into  many  libraries 
and  is  thus  hidden.  Such  a wastage  is  easily  avoided  by  each  document  giving 
the  Entry  Statement  for  Author, 

73  Choice  of  Entry  Element 

Thirdly,  a new  phenomenon  is  gaining  in  its  dimensions  in  our  own  days. 
Firstly,  authors  are  appearing  in  many  more  countries  than  in  the  past. 
Secondly,  books  of  any  one  country  are  acquired  in  many  other  countries 
far  more  than  in  the  past.  These  factors  result  from  practically  every  country 
coming  out  of  its  cultural  exhaustion  and  throwing  forth  many  creative 
citizens  on  the  one  side,  and  the  great  increase  in  international  exchange 
of  thought  and  documents  on  the  other.  When  the  books  of  other  countries 
come  into  a country,  they  bring  with  them  new  problems  in  cataloguing. 

148 


cataloguer''$  needs 


FL75 


These  new  problems  are  greatest  in  determining  the  Entry  Element  and  the 
Secondary  Element  in  the  name  of  an  author.  A modem  name-of-person  is, 
in  mc^t  cases,  multi-worded.  Three  words  may  be  taken  as  the  avenge  in 
a name-of-person.  All  the  words  do  not  have  equal  potency  in  individualising 
the  name.  The  cataloguer  has  therefore  to  find  out  the  most  potent  word 
or  word-group  and  use  the  same  as  the  Entry  Element  in  the  heading  of  the 
entry.  But  different  cultural  groups  often  put  the  most  potent  elements  in 
a name,  as  it  is  in  public  usage,  in  different  positions  in  the  name.  For 
example,  the  Chinese  put  it  at  the  beginning  of  a name.  The  British  put  it 
at  the  end.  In  some  cultural  groups,  the  potent  Element  consists  of  two 
words,  or  three  words  of  which  one  is  a conjunction.  In  the  names  in  some 
cultural  groups,  the  potent  word  carries  with  it  the  preceding  conjunction  or 
preposition,  and  the  Entry  Element  has  to  include  it.  In  some  cultural  groups, 
a name-of-person  has  honorific  and  other  removable  words.  Even  within 
a single  culture  such  as  that  of  India,  each  linguistic  subgroup  of  a cultural 
group  follows  different  practices  in  this  matter.  It  is  not  easy  for  a cataloguer 
born  in  one  cultural  group  to  spot  out  such  removable  words  in  the  name  of 
person  of  every  other  cultural  group.  The  situation  is  best  met  by  the  author 
of  a document  and  its  publisher  indicating  the  Entry  Element  and  the 
Secondary  Element  in  the  name  of  the  author,  in  the  Entry  Statement  for 
Author  to  be  recorded  in  the  document  itself  in  a standard  place. 

74  Enunciation  of  the  Problem 

The  third  of  the  above  problems  formed  the  subject  of  an  appeal  in  my 
Theory  of  library  catalogue  (RTl  1].  The  appeal  read  as  follows : 

“Library  Associations  throughout  the  world  should  put  their  heads  to- 
gether and  arrive  at  an  agreed  set  of  rules  for  the  treatment  of  names-of-persons. 
Such  an  international  code  is  very  necessary  now-a-days  when  the  libraries  of 
almost  every  country  have  books  by  authors  belonging  to  almost  every  one 
of  the  others.” 

It  is  now  realised  that  the  production  of  such  an  international  code  is  not 
practicable  and  simple  as  each  book  giving  the  necessary  information  on  the 
back  of  its  own  title  page. 

75  Problem  Takfn  to  Unesco 

The  following  calendar  of  events  shows  how  the  problem  was  taken  by 

me  to  the  level  of  Unesco, 

• 

1938  Appeal  made  in  my  Theory  of  library  catalogue, 

Nov  1949  Unc.sco’s  Conference  in  Paris  on  the  Improvement  of 

Bibliographical  Services. 

14  Mar  1951  The  following  resolution  was  tabled  by  me  for  the  Second 
Conference  in  Delhi  of  the  Indian  National  Commission 
for  Unesco: 

“That  the  following  items  be  recommended  for 
inclusion  in  the  agenda  for  the  proposed  Conference 

149 


FL75 

25  Mar  1951 

13-14  May  1951 

14  Sept  1951 

25  Nov  1951 

26  Nov  to 

10  Dec  1951 

6 Jan  1952 

Mar  1952 
21-25  Apr  1952 

12  May  1952 
May-July  1952 

31  July  1952 
150 


CLASSIHED  CATALOGUE  CODE 

of  National  Commissions  to  be  held  at  Bangkok 
in  1951: 

*That  an  Asian  Committee  be  set  up  to  pro<]bce  an 
authoritative  set  of  rules  for  the  rendering  or  Asian 
Names  in  bibliographical  entries.” 

Approval  of  the  above  resolution  by  the  Delhi  Conference, 
on  being  supported  by  Torres-Bodet,  the  Director 
General  of  Unesco,  who  was  present  at  the  Conference. 

Approval  of  the  above  resolutions  by: 

1 the  First  Conference  of  Asian  Librarians  held  at 
Indore;  and 

2 the  Ninth  All  India  Library  Conference  held  at 
Indore. 

The  document  Unesco/Reg  Conf  11/16  contained  the 
remark  that  the  proposed  Project  would  be  in  keeping 
with  the  Unesco’s  programme. 

Meeting  of  the  Head  of  the  Libraries  Division  of  Unesco 
with  a group  of  Indian  librarians  in  Delhi  and  formula- 
tion of  the  contents  and  the  stages  of  the  Project. 

Passing  of  the  following  resolution  by  the  Second  Regional 
Conference  of  Unesco  National  Commissions  in  South 
Asia  and  South  Pacific,  held  at  Bangkok; 

“(4)  That  consideration  should  be  given  to  the  pro- 
posals from  the  Indian  Library  Association  to 
undertake  the  tasks  outlined  in  document, 
Unesco/Reg  Conf  11/16  as  follows: 

(a)  Establishment  of  a committee  for  framing 
standard  rules  for  the  rendering  of  Asian 
names  in  bibliographical  and  catalogue 
entries.” 

Circulation  of  my  draft  Working  Paper  on  the  Project  to 
all  the  probable  participating  countries,  soliciting 
opinion. 

Receipt  of  general  approval  from  several  countries  and 
communication  of  the  same  to  Unesco. 

Approval  of  the  Project  by  Unes9o’s  Provisional  Inter- 
national Committee  on  Bibliography  and  Documenta- 
tion held  in  Paris,  and  its  assignment  to  India. 

Assignment  of  the  Project  to  me  by  the  Indian  Library 
Association. 

Field-work  and  Group-Meetings  in  the  regions  of  the 
following  Languages:  Marathi,  Kannada,  Tamil, 
Malayalam,  and  Telugu. 

Finalising  the  Contract  on  the  Project. 


CATALOGUER  S NEEDS 


FL76 


August  1952 

Scpl952 

Dec  1952 
Dec  1952 

Jan  1953 
Mar  1953 
20-23  Apr  1953 

21  May  1953 


1-4  June  1953 
July  1953 
29  August  1953 
M4Scpt  1953 
22-29  Sept  1953 

8 Oct  1953 
11  Oct  1953 


12-18  Oct  1953 
31  Oct  1953 


Circulation  of  the  provisional  findings  of  the  Groups 
Conferences  of  May  to  July  to  other  linguistic  regions 
in  India  and  the  other  participating  countries.  ^ 

Field-work  and  Group-Meeting  in  Gujarathi  linguistic 
region  and  the  testing  and  the  enlargement  of  the 
findings. 

Field-work  and  Group-Meeting  in  Bengali  linguistic 
region. 

Discussion  in  Calcutta  with  some  nationals  of  Pakistan^ 
Indonesia,  Malaya,  and  Siam,  about  the  structure  etc, 
of  the  names  in  the  respective  languages. 

Field-work  and  Group-Meetings  in  Hindi  and  Punjabi 
areas. 

Circulation  to  participating  countries  of  a pamphlet 
embodying  the  findings  arrived  at  up  to  March  1953. 

Presentation  of  interim  report  to  the  First  Session  of 
Unesco’s  International  Advisory  Committee  on 
Bibliography,  held  in  Paris. 

Circular  letter  to  all  National  and  Regional  Rapporteurs 
and  to  other  helpers  in  all  participating  countries, 
furnishing  a copy  of  the  latest  findings  and  asking  for  the 
final  report  to  be  sent  within  three  months — ^that  is  by 
the  end  of  August  1953. 

Meetings  with  Muslim  scholars  in  Hyderabad. 

Receipt  of  hints  from  Siam,  Indo-China,  and  Indonesia. 

Reminders  sent  to  all  participating  countries  and  regions. 

Meetings  with  Muslim  authors  and  scholars  in  Delhi. 

Field-work  and  Group-Meetings  in  Sinhalese  region  in 
Ceylon. 

Receipt  of  report  from  Viet  Nam. 

Discussion  of  the  draft  rules  for  Indian  names  at  a meeting 
of  the  Expert  Committee  for  Documentation  (=EC2) 
of  the  Indian  Standards  Institution. 

Correspondence  with  Pakistan  on  the  draft  rules  for 
Muslim  names. 

Despatch  of  tlie  final  report  to  Unesco,  Paris. 


76  General  Findings  in  the  Unesco  Project 


Though  there  is  demand  for  the  above  Report  of  mine  to  Unesco  on  the 
Rendering  of  South  Asian  nameSf  Unesco  has  not  yet  published  that  report. 
One  year  was  spent  in  getting  opinions  from  France,  Great  Britain,  and  the 
United  States  of  America.  The  French  report  gave  general  approval.  The 
British  report  had  no  relevant  substance  in  it.  The  American  report  was  a 
long  one.  It  largely  dealt  with  style  and  terminology.  It  also  contained  a 

151 


FL76 


CLASSIFIED  CATALOGUE  CODE 


few  useful  suggestions.  My  remarks  on  the  three  leports  were  sent  to  Unesco 
promptly  from  Zurich  in  October  1954.  But  nothing  more  has  been  heard  of 
the  further  action  intended  to  be  taken  by  Uncsco  on  this  matter  of  great 
importance  to  the  library  profession.  ^ 

It  is  worth  mentioning  here  that  the  report  mentioned  the  following  general 
findings  in  the  sections  72  and  81  of  its  annexure: 

“72  It  is  impossible  to  make  all  the  cultural  groups  of  the  world  to  conform 
to  a single  efficient  standard  in  Name-Formation.  But  it  is  possible  to  agree 
upon  a single  efficient  standard  for  printing  the  name  on  the  title-page.  This 
will  easily  guide  readers  in  changing  over  from  Title-Page-Name  to  Entry- 
Name  and  vice-versa. 

“81  Laying  down  of  a standard  for  Title-Page-Namc  by  all  concerned 
including  Unesco,  Iso,  Ifla,  Fid  and  the  corresponding  bodies  in  the  several 
countries,  (along  lines  suggested  below  or  in  alternative  ways). 

1 The  Entry  Word  or  Entry  Word-Group,  as  the  case  may  be,  should  be 
printed  in  Black  Face. 

2 The  Honorific  Words,  to  be  omitted  in  the  Entry  Name,  should  not 
be  printed  on  the  Title-page.  If  printed,  they  should  be  in  Roman 
Cap  and  lower  case,  preferably  in  different  lines  and  in  a font  of  smaller 
size. 

3 Any  titular  word,  which  should  be  included  among  the  Additional 
Words  following  the  Entry  Word  (or  Entry  Word  Group)  should  be 
printed  in  italics. 

4 Pseudonym  should  be  separated  from  real  name  and  printed  in  a 
distinctive  style  in  a separate  block. 

5 Compound  Family  Names  and  Compound  Individual  Names  should 
be  hyphenated  if  the  practice  of  the  language  does  not  admit  of  their 
being  written  as  one  word  or  if  the  author  habitually  separates  them.” 

77  Indian  Standard 

By  the  end  of  1954,  it  was  possible  to  guess  that  there  was  some  reluctance 
in  some  quarters  in  Unesco  either  to  give  wide  publicity  to  my  Report  or  to 
take  any  further  positive  action  on  it.  This  might  have  been  partly  due  to 
the  racial  discrimination  which  is  slow  to  die  out.  1 felt,  however,  that  the 
hard  work  put  into  it  for  two  years  should  not  be  totally  wasted.  Therefore 
1 took  action  at  the  national  level  in  India,  as  the  Chairman  of  the  Expert 
Committee  for  Documentation  (~EC2)  of  the  Indian  SVindards  Institution. 

I requested  that  Committee  to  take  action  on  the  General  Findings  in  my 
Unesco  Report,  quoted  in  the  preceding  Section.  It  really  went  up  to  the 
Committee  as  a general  proposal  to  establish  Standards  for  the  Preliminary 
Pages  of  a book.  The  most  difficult  of  these  Standards  was  the  one  relating 
to  the  Entry  Statement  for  Author.  The  Committee  co-opted  representatives 
of  the  publishing  and  printing  trades  for  this  purpose.  It  struggled  long 
and  experimented  with  various  styles  of  printing  the  Entry  Statement  for 
Author  and  with  various  places  in  the  preliminary  pages  where  it  could  be 

152 


CATALOGUER  S NEEDS 


FL81 


printed.  The  final  standard  arrived  at  is  elegance  itself.  According  to  it, 
the  Entry  Statement  for  Author  is  to  be  printed  near  the  top  of  the  b^k  of 
the  title-page  in  small  type.  Words  in  the  name,  which  are  removable  while 
rendering  the  name  in  the  heading  of  a catalogue  entry,  should  be  omitted. 
The  Entry  Element  alone  in  the  name  should  be  in  antique  face.  The  other 
irremovable  words  in  the  name  should  be  printed  in  Roman.  It  costs  nothing 
extra  to  print  it.  This  Indian  Standard  does  not  interfere  with  the  creative 
freedom  of  the  artist  in  designing  the  title-page.  The  Entry  Statement  for 
Author  printed  on  page  4 of  ed  4 of  this  book  is  in  accordance  with  the 
Indian  Standard.  It  would  have  given  additional  lines  for  the  alternative 
names  of  the  author,  if  he  had  any,  and  for  joint  authors  and  collaborators 
if  there  were  any. 

78  International  Standard 

In  the  Indian  Standard,  all  the  information  necessary  for  a cataloguer  in 
rendering  the  name  of  an  author  in  catalogue  entry  will  be  readily  found  in 
the  preliminary  pages  of  the  book  itself.  In  other  words  the  Canon  of 
Ascertainability  (Sec  BBO)  can  have  full  sway  in  the  matter.  To  make  this 
possible,  the  Indian  Standard  in  question  throws  a definite  responsibility  on 
the  authors  and  the  publishers.  The  information  needed  for  the  Entry 
Statement  for  Author  is  best  known  to  the  author  himself.  The  publisher 
can  get  it  from  him  without  any  difficulty  when  he  gets  the  press-copy  and 
can  print  it  in  the  book  as  prescribed  in  the  Indain  Standard.  A stitch  in 
time  saves  nine,  as  the  saying  goes.  If  the  publishers  implement  the  Standard, 
it  will  save  the  cataloguing  time,  the  cataloguing  man-power,  and  the  cost 
of  cataloguing  now  involved  in  the  search  for  the  necessary  information  by 
several  libraries.  It  often  happens  that  the  source  of  information — the 
author  himself— is  no  longer  available.  In  view  of  this,  the  Indian  Standards 
Institution  entrusted  me  with  the  task  of  proposing  the  Indian  Standard  for 
consideration  and  adoption  by  ISO/TC46— the  Documentation  Committee 
of  the  International  Standards  Organisation.  1 did  so  at  the  Stutgart  meeting 
of  ISO/TC46  in  June  1956.  All  the  cataloguers  of  the  world  should  make 
common  cause  to  get  this  Standard  accepted  at  the  international  level,  and  to 
get  it  implemented  universally  by  all  the  publishers  in  their  respective  countries. 

8 Collaborator-Statement. —Record,  in  a document  or  a 
volume  of  it,  of  the  name  (s)  of  collaborator  (s)  in  respect 
of  the  work  eihbodied  in  it,  along  with  an  indication  of 
the  role  of  each. 

Whenever  warranted,  a modern  document  gives  the  Collaborator-Statement 
in  the  page  giving  the  Title-Statement  and  the  Author-Statement. 

81  Entry  Statement  for  Collaborator. — Record,  in  a document 
or  a volume  of  it,  of  the  year  of  birth  (and  also  of  the  year  of  death 


153 


FL81  CLASSIFIED  CATALOGUE  CODE 

in  the  case  of  a deceased  person),  and  of  the  alternative  name(s), 
if  any,  of  each  collaborator  in  respect  of  the  work  embodied  in 
it,  and,  in  addition,  an  indication  of  the  Entry  Element  and  |^e 
Secondary  Element  in  each  name. 

Commentary  on  this  Rule  is  similar  to  that  on  Sec  FL  7. 

91  Anonymous  Document. — A document  without  Author- 
Statement. 


154 


CHAPTER  FM 


CATALOGUE 

1 Library  Catalogue. — List  of  the  documents  in  a librarry 
or  in  a collection  forming  a portion  of  it. 

For  brevity  we  shall  use  in  this  book  the  term  Catalogue  in  the  sense  of 
“Library  Catalogue.”  Whenever  any  other  kind  of  catalogue  is  meant,  a 
suitable  epithet  will  be  added.  A catalogue  may  be  printed;  or  it  may  be  in 
manuscript.  It  may  be  in  cards,  or  in  loose  leaves.  It  may  be  in  the  form  of  a 
continuous  book,  or  in  the  paste-down  form  with  gaps  for  the  interpolation 
of  new  entries  in  between  existing  entries. 

2 Union  Catalogue. — List  of  all  the  documents  in  two  or  more 
libraries  giving  the  names  of  all  the  libraries  where  copies  of  each 
document  can  be  found. 

A Union  Catalogue  may  cover  all  kinds  of  documents  or  any 
restricted  kind  of  them. 

Examples: 

1 Union  catalogue  of  learned  periodical  publications  in  the  libraries  of  South 
Asia^  brought  out  in  1953  by  S R Ranganathan. 

2 Union  list  of  serials  in  libraries  of  the  United  States  and  Canada^  cd  2, 
brought  out  in  1943  by  Winiefred  Gregory. 

3 List  of  scientific  periodicals  in  the  Bombay  Presidency^  sponsored  in  1 931 , 
by  the  Royal  Institute  of  Science,  Bombay. 

3  Documentation  List. — List  of  documents  listed  together  for 
some  purpose. 

The  purpose  is  usually  to  bring  to  the  notice  of  reader  an 
exhaustive  or  select  list  of  documents  relevant  to  the  pursuit  of 
his  enquiry  or  study. 

This  term  is  used  to  emphasise  the  inclusion  of  micro  documents.  The 
fortnightly  Insdoc  Hsu  published  by  the  Indian  National  Scientific  Documenta- 
tion Centre,  is  an  example.  It  is  usual  for  a library  to  prepare  special  Docu- 
mentation Lists  on  particular  topics  in  anticipation  or  on  demand  by  individual 
readers  or  by  groups  of  readers. 


155 


FM4 


CLASSIFIED  CATALOGUE  CODE 


4 Bibliography^ — ^The  older  name  for  Documentation  List. 

Originally  it  was  mostly  a list  of  macro  documents.  Now  it  may  inclu^ 
also  micro  documents.  It  is  differently  named  according  to  the  group  of 
persons  to  be  served  by  them,  or  according  to  the  agency  which  prepares 
them.  These  are  enumerated  and  discussed  in  Reference  service  and  bibiio^ 
graphy  [RZSUJ. 

41  Micro  Bibliography. — Bibliography  exclusively  or  mostly 
of  Micro  documents. 

42  Macro  Bibliography. — Bibliography  exclusively  of  Macro 
documents. 

5 National  Bibliography  in  Sense  1. — List  of  the  books  and 
periodicals  published  in  a country. 

It  is  now  becoming  the  practice  for  each  nation  to  publish  its  National 
Bibliography  on  a periodical  basis.  For  example,  the  British  national  biblio- 
graphy is  being  published  as  a weekly,  with  monthly,  quarterly,  annual,  and 
five-yearly  cumulations  or  versions.  The  Indian  national  bibliography  began 
in  1958.  In  my  article  on  the  subject  [RIl]  in  the  Annals  of  library  science^  I 
have  outlined  a scheme  for  producing  the  Indiart  national  bibliography  on 
economic  and  helpful  lines.  An  account  of  the  British  national  bibliography 
by  A J Wells  is  also  given  in  the  same  issue  [W4]. 

51  National  Bibliography  in  Sense  2. — List  of  books  published 
in  a country,  and  books  published  on  the  country  and  on  the 
citizens  of  the  country,  and  books  written  by  any  citizen  of  the 
country,  in  whatever  country  they  may  be  published. 

6 State  Bibliography. — List  of  the  books  and  periodicals 
published  in  a Constituent  State  of  a country. 

Remarks  similar  to  those  on  National  Bibliography  are  applicable  to  State 
Bibliography. 

7 Linguistic  Bibliography. — List  of  the  books  and  periodicals 
published  in  a language. 

Examples: 

1 Deutches  Bucheriiy  of  the  Leipzig  Bibliographical  Institute,  is  planned 
to  cover  all  the  books  published  in  the  German  language  in  any  country 
whatever. 


156 


CATALOGUE  FM7 

2 The  Cumulative  book  index:  World  list  of  books  in  the  English  language 
of  H W Wilson  and  Co  of  New  York. 

ljS  The  Abstracting  Periodical  defined  in  Sec  FE22  and  the  Indexing 
Periodical  defined  in  Sec  FE24  are  also  catalogues.  They  do  not  list  docu- 
ments in  a particular  library  or  libraries.  Like  the  national,  state,  or  linguistic 
bibliography,  they  list  documents  which  have  been  published. 

9 This  Code  gives  the  Basic  Rules  needed  for  ail  kinds  of  catalogues 
and  bibliographies  of  modem  conventional  books  and  periodicals. 

They  are  by  themselves  sufficient  to  construct  the  Catalogue  of  a Service- 
Library. 

This  Code  gives  also  the  Supplementary  Rules  necessary  for  Union 
Catalogues,  National  Bibliographies,  Abstracting  Periodicals,  and  Indexing 
Periodicals. 


157 


CHAPTER  FN 


ENTRY 

I Entry. — Ultimate  unit-record  in  a catalogue  or  a docu- 
mentation list. 

The  examples  given  in  the  succeeding  Rules  are  taken  mostly  from  the 
examples  in  the  later  parts  of  this  book. 

I I Specific  Entry. — Entry  mentioning  a specific  document. 

Examples: 

1 2: 55N3  N58 

Ranganathan  (Shiyali  Ramamrita)  (1892). 

Classified  catalogue  code  with  additional  rules  for  dictionary  catalogue 
code.  Ed  4. 

(Madras  Library  Association,  publication  series.  24). 

{For  extract  see  2:  55  y (PHI)  N58) 

122519 

2 Ranganathan  (Shiyali  Ramamrita)  (1892). 

Classified  catalogue  code.  Ed  4.  2:  55N3  N58 

3 Madras  Library  Association,  Publication  Series. 

24  Ranganathan:  Classified  catalogue  code.  Ed 4.  2:55N3  N58 
The  above  three  examples  of  specific  entry  pertain  to  a book.  It  can  be 
seen  that  each  of  these  entries  mention  a specific  book. 

12  General  Entry. — Entry  not  mentioning  any  specific 
document. 

Examples: 

1 Classihed  Catalogue  Code. 

For  books  in  this  Class  and  its  Subdivisions  sec  the  Classified  Part  of 
the  catalogue  under  the  Class  Number  2:55N3 

2 Classified  Catalogue. 

For  books  in  this  Class  and  its  Subdivisions  see  the  Classified  Part  of 
the  catalogue  under  the  Class  Number  2:55A5 

3 Catalogue,  Library  Science. 

For  books  in  this  Class  and  its  Subdivisions  see  the  Classified  Part  of 
the  catalogue  under  the  Class  Number  2:55 


158 


ENTRY 


FN32 


4 Library  Science. 

For  books  in  this  Class  and  its  Subdivisions  see  the  Classified  Part  of 
the  catalogue  under  the  Class  Number  2 

5^  Bharat. 

See 

India. 

2 Consalidated  Entry. — ^Two  or  more  entries  consolidated 
into  a single  entry. 

21  Consolidated  Specific  Entry. — Entry  mentioning  two  or 
more  specific  documents. 

Example: 

t 2:55N3  N34,  N45,  N51 

Ranoanathan  (Shiyali  Ramamrita)  (1892). 

Classified  catalogue  code.  Ed  1,  2»  3. 

(Madras  Library  Association,  publication  series.  4,  13,  17). 

63421,  87453,  111601 

22  Consolidated  General  Entry. — General  entry  replacing  two 
or  more  general  entries. 

Examples: 

1 Library  Science. 

See  also 

Booic  Selection. 

Catalogue,  Library  Science. 

Classification,  Library  Science. 

2 Ranoanathan. 

Variant  Forms  of  the  above  word  to  be  looked  up. — 

Ranganadan. 

Rfnganathan. 

Runganathan. 

31  Number  Entry. — Entry  beginning  with  a Call  Number 
or  a Class’ Number. 

Examples: 

The  Entries  given  as  Example  1 under  Sec  FN 1 1 and  as  Example  1 under 
FN2L 

32  Word  Entry. — Entry  beginning  with  a Word,  or  in  rare 
cases,  with  a symbol  given  in  the  author-statement  of  a document 
as  a substitute  for  name  of  author. 


159 


FN32 


CLASSIFIED  CATALOGUE  CODE 


Examples: 

The  Entries  given  as  Examples  2-3  under  Sec  FN1I»  Examples  1-5  under 
Sec  FN12,  and  Examples  1-2  under  Sec  FN22. 

4 Varieties  of  Entry 

41  Main  Entry. — Specific  entry  giving  maximum  information 
about  the  whole  of  a document.  All  the  other  entries — ^specific 
or  general — relating  to  the  document,  are  normally  derived  from 
the  Main  Entry. 

Examples: 

The  Entries  given  as  Example  1 under  Sec  FNll  and  as  Example  1 under 
Sec  FN21,  and  the  following  entry: 

1 Ranoanathan  (Shiyali  Ramamrita)  (1892). 

Classified  catalogue  code  with  additional  rules  for  dictionary  catalogue 
code.  Ed  4. 

(Madras  Library  Association,  publication  series.  24). 

122519  2:55N3  N58 

42  Added  Entry. — Entry  other  than  main  entry. 

43  Specific  Added  Entry. — Added  entry  mentioning  a specific 
document. 

In  the  book-form  and  the  multiple-card-system  of  catalogue,  it  is  briefer 
than  the  main  entry. 

In  the  unit-card-system  of  catalogue,  it  differs  from  the  main  entry  only 
in  its  top-most  line,  which  is  filled  up  by  hand  or  by  typing. 

It  does  not  usually  draw  any  information  from  outside  the  main  entry  or 
its  back. 

Examples: 

The  Entries  given  as  Examples  2 and  3 under  Sec  FNl  1. 

44  General  Added  Entry. — Added  entry  not  mentioning  any 
specific  document. 

Examples: 

Entries  given  as  Example  1-5  under  Sec  FNl 2,  and  as  Examples  1-2  under 
See  FN22. 

45  Cross  Reference  Index  Entry. — General  added  entry 
160 


ENiHY  FN46 

referring  from  one  word  or  set  of  words  to  another  synonymous 
word  or  set  of  words. 

451  Referred-To  Heading. — ^The  word  or  the  word-group 
with  which  a Cross  Reference  Index  entry,  or  a See  also  Sulv 
ject  Entry  in  a Dictionary  Catalogue  ends. 

The  Referred-to  Heading  in  a cross  Reference  Index  Entry  is  usually  the 
name  of  a person,  a geographical  entity,  a series,  or  a document,  which  is 
preferred  for  use  in  the  Main  Entry. 

The  Referred-to  Heading  in  a See  also  Subject  Entry  in  a Dictionary 
Catalogue  is  usually  the  name  of  a Specific  Subject  of  a document. 

452  Refenred-FVom  Heading. — ^The  word  or  the  word-group 
' with  which  a Cross  Reference  Index  Entry  or  a See  also  Subject 

Entry  in  a Dictionary  Catalogue  begins. 

It  is  usually  an  alternative  name  of  the  person,  the  geographical  entity,  the 
series,  or  the  document  respectively,  named  in  the  Referred-to  Heading.  It  is 
likely  to  be  brought  up  by  some  readers  while  looking  up  the  catalogue. 

Examples: 

Entry  given  as  Example  2 under  Sec  FN22  and  the  following  entry: 

1 Salwbury, 

See 

Howard  (Henry) 

In  this  example,  “Howard  (Henry)”  is  the  Refcrrcd-To  Heading.  And 
“Salisbury”  is  the  Referrcd-From  Heading.  This  means  that  documents 
arc  entered  under  the  name  “Howard  (Henry)”.  But  the  author  is  also 
known  as  “Salisbury”.  This  is  an  alternative  name  for  him.  Some  reader 
may  look  up  for  his  books  under  “Salisbury”.  To  him,  the  catalogue  gives  the 
direction  that  “Howard  (Henry)”  should  be  looked  up. 

The  Referred-From  Heading  in  a See  also  Subject  Entry  of  a Dictionary 
Catalogue  is  usually  the  name  of  a subject  forming  an  upper  link  in  the  chain 
having  the  Main  Heading  of  the  Referred-To  Heading  as  the  last  link.  It  is 
likely  to  be  brought  up  by  some  readers  while  looking  up  the  Catalogue  {See 
end  of  Chap  KZD).* 

Example: 

Entry  given  as  Example  1 under  Sec  FN22. 

A Cross-Reference  Index  Entry  may  draw  information  from  outside  the 
main  entry  and  even  from  outside  the  document. 

46  Author  AnalyticaL — Specific  Added  Entry  referring  from 
the  name  of  the  Author  and  the  Title  of  a Contribution  occur- 


11 


161 


FN46 


CLASSIFIED  CATALOGUE  CODE 


ring  in  a host  document,  to  its  Locus,  that  is,  the  host  document 
and  the  place  of  occurrence  in  it. 

Example: 

1 Webb  (Sydney)  (1859). 

Diseases  of  organised  society. 

Forming  part  of 

Adams:  Modem  state.  W N35 

47  Title  AnalyticaL — Specific  Added  Entry  referring  from 
the  Title  of  a Contribution  occurring  in  a host  document,  to 
its  Locus,  that  is,  the  host  document  and  the  place  of  occurrence 
in  it. 

Example: 

1 Diseases  of  organised  society. 

' By  Webb. 

Forming  part  of 

Adams:  Modern  state.  W N35 

5 Subject  Entry 

51  Subject  Entry. — Entry  giving  information  about  a subject. 

52  Specific  Subject  Entry. — Subject  entry  which  mentions 
a document  in  which  the  subject  is  treated. 

Examples: 

The  Entries  given  as  Example  1 under  Sec  FNll,  and  as  Example  1 under 
Sec  FN21,  and  the  following: 

1 Classified  Catalogue  Code. 

Ranganathan  (Shiyali  Ramamrita)  (1892):  Classified  catalogue 
code.  Ed  4.  2:  55N3  N58 

53  Cross  Reference  Entry. — Specific  subject  entry  which 
mentions  a portion  of  a document,  in  which  the  subject  is  treated. 

It  may  also  be  called  a Subject  Analytical. 

Examples: 

1 B»vM87 

See  also 
B;cM87  N27 
Ramanujan. 

Collected  papers,  P.  xi-xix. 


162 


fiNTRY 


FN6I 


* 2 BiocatAFHY,  Ramanujan  (S)  (1887-1919). 

Ramanujan  (S):  Collected  works*  Pxi-xix.  BxM87  N27 

^ Class  Index  Entry. — ^Subject  entry  which  refers  from  the 
name  of  a class  to  its  class  number. 

Exan^les: 

The  Entries  given  as  Examples  1-5  under  Sec  FN12,  and  Example  1 under 
SecFN22. 

55  Chain  Procedure. — Procedure  for  deriving  Class  Index 
Entry  from  a class  number,  in  a more  or  less  mechanical  way. 

Chain  Procedure  is  used  to  derive  Class  Index  Entries  in  Classified  Catalogue, 
and  Specific  Subject  Entries,  Subject  Analytical,  and  See  also  Subject  Entries 
in  Dictionary  Catalogue. 

The  Rules  of  Chain  Procedure  are  given  in  Part  K. 


6 Names  of  Entries 

61  A Specific  Entry  is  usually  named  after  the  occupant  of 
its  first  section,  which  is  called  its  Leading  Section. 


Serial  Name  of  Entry 

Nitmber 


1 Call  Number  Entry 

1 1 Specific  Subject  Entry 

2 Class  Number  Entry 

3 Author  Entry 

31  Joint  Author  Entry 

4 Collaborator  Entry 

41  Joint  Collaborator  Emry 

42  Commentator  Entry 

43  Editor  Entry 

44  Illustrator  Entry 

45  Reviser  Entry 

46  Translator  Entry 

5 Title  Entry 

6 Series  Entry 

61  Pseudo  Series  Entry 

7 Related  Book  Entry 

71  Extract  Entry 


Example:  Entry  given  as 


Example  1 under  Sec  FNll  and 
Example  1 under  Sec  FN21 
Example  I under  Sec  FNII  and 
Example  1 under  Sec  FN52 
Example  1 under  Sec  FN53 
Example  2 under  Sec  FNll  and 
Example  1 under  Sec  FN4I 
Example  2 under  Sec  MK211 
Example  5 under  Sec  MK211 
Example  7 under  Sec  MK211 

Example  5 under  Sec  MK211 

Example  1 under  Sec  MK221 
Example  6 under  Sec  MK221 
Example  1 under  Sec  FN47 
Example  1 under  Sec  MK231 

Example  1 under  Sec  MK6 
Example  1 under  Sec  MK4 


163 


FN62  CLASanED  CATALOGUE  CODE 

62  A General  Entry  is  usually  called  after  its  fum^on. 


Exam^es: 

I 


Serial 

Number 

Name  of  Entry 

Example:  Entry  given  as 

1 

(Hass  Index  Entry 

Examples  1-5  under  Sec  FN12 

2 

(Hoss  Reference  Index 

Example  2 under  Sec  FN22  and 

Entry 

Example  1 under  Sec  FN45 

3 

See  also  Subject  Entry 

Example  1 under  Sec  FN22 

63  An  tintry  may  also  be  called  as  shown  below  according 
to  the  kind  of  name  occupying  its  Leading  Section : 

Serial 

Number 

Name  of  Entry 

Example:  Entry  given  as 

1 

Personal  Name  Entry 

Example  2 under  Sec  FNll 

2 

Corporate  Name  Entry 

3 

Subject  Name  Entry 

Example  1-4  under  Sec  FN12  and 

1 under  Sec  FN22 

7 Niimlier  of  Entries 


Every  book  or  periodical  publication  will  get  at  least  one  entry — v/z  Main 
Entry.  But  it  may  also  get  one  or  more  Added  Entries. 

While  each  entry  is  made  in  relation  to  a particular  document,  once  it  is 
written  out,  its  assignment  to  the  appropriate  part  of  the  catalogue  and  its 
relative  position  among  the  entries  in  its  part  are  determined  entirely  by  the 
numbers  and  the  words  written  in  it.  In  other  words,  the  document  to  which 
it  relates  may  be  eliminated  from  view,  while  arranging  the  entries  so  as  to 
form  a catalogue. 

To  put  it  in  a different  way,  each  entry  forms  one  of  the  fundamental  units 
out  of  which  the  catalogue  is  made — one  of  the  ultimate  bricks  which  are 
built  into  the  structure.  Just  as  the  bricks  needed  for  a structure  are  made  in 
several  patterns,  so  also  the  entries  in  a catalogue  are  of  several  species  and 
varieties  and  carry  different  names. 

The  number  of  each  species  or  variety  of  entry  will  vary  with  the  document 
catalogued.  The  relation  between  a document  and  the  number  of  its  entries 
may  be  described  as  1 to  n,  where  n is  at  least  1 and  may  be  any  integer  what- 
ever. 


71  Main  Entry 


There  is  one  and  only  one  Main  Entry  for  each  document.  It  enters  it 

164 


ENTRY  FN74 

under  its  chief  SpeojUc  Subject.  It  is«  as  its  name  implies,  the  basic  ^itty  tot 
the  document.  All  the  other  entri^  are  derived  from  it.  It  gives  us  more 
information  about  the  document  than  any  other  entiy.  Further,  as  can  be 
seen^m  Chap  MH  and  its  subdiwions,  it  acts  as  a key  whichletsus  know 
what  Added  Entries  the  document  has  received  in  the  catalogue.  Qiap  MA 
and  MB  and  Chap  MZD  are  on  its  construction. 

72  Cross  Reference  Entry 

The  number  of  Cross  Reference  Entries  to  be  given  for  a document  is 
variable.  It  may  be  zero  or  one  or  two  or  three,  etc, — even  quite  a large 
number.  The  why  of  this  variability  will  be  appreciated  if  the  purpose  of  the 
Cross  Reference  Entry  is  understood.  This  question  has  been  fully  discussed, 
in  the  light  of  the  Laws  of  Library  Science,  in  the  Five  laws  of  library  science 
[RF4].  A Cross  Reference  Entry  enters  a document  under  one  or  other  of  the 
classes  other  than  its  dominant  focus  or  class.  And  a document  is  to  get  as 
many  Cross  Reference  Entries  as  there  are  different  subsidiary  classes  so  dealt 
with  by  it. 

This  variety  of  entry  is  necessitated  by  the  inevitable  composite  nature  of 
most  of  the  documents.  Few  are  of  the  monograph  type.  Very  often  a 
document,  whose  chief  interest  is  in  a certain  class,  may  devote  a chapter  or 
a few  pages  to  some  other  topic.  It  may  also  happen  that  throughout  a work, 
primarily  devoted  to  a particular  class,  information  about  some  others  is 
diffusely  scattered.  If  a catalogue  lists  a work  only  under  its  dominant  class 
and  makes  no  attempt  whatever  to  give  analytical  cross  references,  it  will 
offend  the  Laws  of  Library  Science.  At  the  same  time,  practical  consi- 
deration, such  as  staff,  finance,  and  the  policy  of  the  library,  may  not 
permit  of  the  cross-referencing  work  to  be  done  as  profusely  and  as  thoroughly 
as  the  Laws  would  demand  [RT5]. 

Thus,  the  nature  of  the  document  and  the  limitations  of  the  library  would 
make  the  number  of  Cross  Reference  Entries  of  a document  vary  widely. 
Chap  MJ  is  devoted  to  the  construction  of  this  variety  of  entries. 

73  Class  Index  Entry 

Each  document  has  also  associated  with  it  Index  Entries  which  index 
names  of  classes.  These  direct  the  reader  to  the  region  of  the  Classified  Part 
where  he  can  find  his  materials  enumerated  and  featured  in  a filiatory  way. 
Normally,  every  document  will  have  at  least  one  Class  Index  Entry  relating 
to  it.  Part  K is  devoted  to  the  construction  of  this  variety  of  entries. 

74  Cross  Reference  Index  Entry 

A Cross  Reference  Index  Entry  occurs  only  occasionally.  It  is  only  a* 
very  small  percentage  of  documents  that  gives  rise  to  this  variety  of  entries. 
It  is  devised  to  economise  in  the  number  of  Index  Entries.  It  usually  directs 
the  reader’s  attention  from  one  heading  to  another  synonymous  one  in  the 

165 


FN74  CLASSIFIED  CATALOGUE  CODE 

Alphi^betical  Fart.  Part  L is  devoted  to  the  construction  of  this  variety  of 
entries. 

75  Book  Index  Entry  r 

The  number  of  Book  Index  Entries  for  a document  is  also  variable.  Govem- 
mental  and  similar  annual  and  other  periodical  reports,  of  an  administrative 
nature,  do  not  get  any  Book  Index  Entry.  Normally  every  other  document 
will  get  at  least  one  such  entry.  It  may  get  more,  but  seldom  more  than 
half  a dozen. 

These  entries  enable  a reader  to  get  his  document,  provided  he  has  some 
information  or  other  about  it.  For,  the  Book  Index  Entries  enter  a document 
under  the  names  of  authors,  editors,  translators,  etc,  under  the  name  of 
series  and,  in  certain  cases,  under  the  title.  Chap  MK  and  other  Sec  in  Part 
N onwards  are  devoted  to  the  construction  of  this  variety  of  Entries. 


166 


CHAPTER  FP 


% 


CLASSIFIED  CATALOGUE 

1 Classified  Catalogue.— Catalogue  in  which  some  entires  are 
Number  Entries  and  some  are  Word  Entries. 

Consequently  a Classified  Catalogue  consist  of  two  parts— the  Gassified 
Part  and  the  Alphabetical  Part. 

2 Classified  Part.— The  part  of  a Classified  Catalogue  con- 
taining all  its  Number  Entries. 

21  Its  entries  arc  arranged  by  their  Call  Numbers  and  Class  Numbers^ 
as  the  case  may  be. 

22  It  serves  as  a Classified  or  Systematic  Subject  Catalogue. 

23  It  helps  a reader  to  get  a panoramic  view  of  the  entries  of  all  the  docu- 
ments in  the  specific  field  of  his  interest,  arranged  by  their  specific  subjects 
in  a helpful  sequence. 

3 Alphabetical  Part.— The  part  of  a Classified  Catalogue 
containing  all  its  Word  Entries. 

31  The  entries  are  arranged  alphabetically  as  in  a dictionary. 

32  It  serves  as  an  Alphabetical  Catalogue. 

33  It  serves  also  as  an  Alphabetical  Index  to  Classes  of  Knowledge. 

34  It  thus  forms  an  over-all  Alphabetical  Index  to  the  Classified  Part. 

35  It  helps  a reader  to  get  a document  of  which  he  knows  the  author* 
or  any  collaborator,  or  the  series  it  may  belong  to,  or  its  title,  or  the  title  of 
any  part  of  it. 

36  It  also  helps  the  reader  to  find  out  the  Class  Number  of  the  class  of 
knowledge  in  which  he  is  seeking  a document.  This  Class  Number  will 
enable  him  to  aliglft  on  the  particular  spot  in  the  Classified  Part,  where  the 
documents  on  his  subject  are  listed.  He  will  also  find  just  earlier  than  them 
the  documents  on  subjects  of  which  his  subject  is  a subclass.  Further,  he 
will  also  find  after  those  in  his  own  subject,  the  documents  on  subjects  which 
are  subclasses  of  his  subject. 

4 Main  Entry  in  a Classified  Catalogue  begins  with  Call  Number  in  the 
case  of  a book  and  with  Class  Number  in  the  case  of  a periodical  publication. 

41  It  is  thus  a Number  Entry. 

42  Therefore  it  belongs  to  the  Classified  Part. 


167 


FP3  CLASSIFIED  CATALOOUE  CODE 

Examples: 

The  Eauies  given  as  Example  1 under  Sec  FNil  and  as  Example  1 under 
SecFN21. 

# 

5 Cross  Reference  Entry. — Specific  Added  Class  Number 
Entry  in  a Classified  Catalogue. 

51  It  refers  from  the  Class  Number  of  a subject  to  its  Locus  in  a Host 
Document. 

52  It  is  a Number  Entry. 

53  Therefore,  it  belongs  to  the  Classified  Part  of  the  Catalogue. 

54  It  corresponds  to  the  Subject  Analytical  in  a Dictionary  Catalogue. 
Example: 

Entry  given  as  Example  1 under  Sec  FN53. 

6 Class  Index  Entry. — General  Added  Word-Entry  in  a 
Classified  Catalogue,  referring  from  the  name  of  a Class  to  its 
Class  Number. 

61  It  is  derived,  by  Chain  Procedure,  from  the  class  number  of  the  Main 
Entry  or  of  a Cross  Reference  Entr>'  of  a document. 

62  It  enables  a reader  to  know  the  class  number  of  the  subject  on  which 
he  seeks  documents. 

Examples: 

Entries  given  as  Examples  1-4  under  Sec  FN12. 

7 Cross  Reference  Index  Entry. — Same  as  Sec  FN45. 

It  enables  a reader  to  find  out  the  call  number  of  the  document,  for  which 
he  looks  up  the  catalogue  under  the  name  of  its  author,  collaborator,  title, 
scries,  or  any  related  book. 

Examples: 

Entries  given  as  Examples  2 and  3 under  Sec  FNl  1,  and  Example  1 under 
Sec  FN46  and  Sec  FN47  respectively. 

8 Book  Index  Entry. — Specific  Added  Wprd  Entry  in  a 
Classified  Catalogue. 

91  In  a Classified  Catalogue,  Main  Entry,  Cross  Reference  Entry,  and 
Oass  Index  Entry  are  Subject  Entries. 

92  In  a Classified  Catalogue,  Main  Entry  is  a Specific  Subject  Entry. 

93  In  a Classified  Catalogue,  Cross  Reference  Entry  is  a Subject-Analytical. 

94  In  a Classified  Catalogue,  Class  Index  Entry  is  a General  Subject  Entry: 


168 


CHAPTER  FQ 
SECTIONS  OF  ENTRY 

0 Section  of  an  Entry. — ^That  which  is  prescribed  to  be  a 
separate  paragraph  in  an  entry  in  a Card  Catalogue. 

01  When  an  entry  occurs  in  a catalogue  in  book-form,  all  its  sections  may 
occur  as  separate  sentences  of  a single  paragraph. 

1 Leading  Section. — Section  1 of  an  Entry. 

2 Heading  Section. — 

1 Leading  Section  of  a Word  Entry. 

2 Section  2 of  a Call  Number  Entry  of  a book  or  of  a 
Class  Number  Entry  of  a periodical  publication,  i e of  a Main 
Entry  in  a Qassified  Catalogue 

3 Section  3 of  a See  also  Subject  Entry. 

4 Section  3 of  a Cross  Reference  Index  Entry. 

3 Title  Section.— Section  of  a Main  Entry,  giving  the  title 
of  the  document  catalogued,  along  with  the  names  of  Colla- 
borators and  of  Edition  if  any. 

31  BibUognipliical  Section. — Section  giving  format,  collation, 
and  imprint,  in  the  Main  Entry  of  a Macro  Document. 

32  Locos  Section. — 

1 Section  in  the  Main  Entry  giving  the  locus  of  a Micro 
Document,  in  its  host  document. 

2 Section  in  a Cross  Reference  Entry  of  a Classified 
Catalogue,  giving  the  locus. 

3 Section  in  a Subject  Analytical  in  a Dictionary  Cata- 
logue, giving  the  locus. 

4 Note  Section.— Section  of  a Main  Entry  giving  the  name  of 
series  and/or  the  name(s)  of  related  book(s)  and  certain  other 
information  in  the  case  of  a Periodical  Publication. 

41  Annotation  Section. — Section  in  a Main  Entry  giving  an 
Annotation,  or  a Synopsis,  or  an  Abstract  of  the  document 
catalogued. 


169 


FQ5  CLASSmED  CATALOGUE  CODE 

5 Acceaden  Noniber  Section. — ^Last  section  in  the  front  of  a 
Main  Entry  Card,  giving  the  Accession  Number  of  the  Document. 

6 IVacing  Section. — Back  of  a Main  Entry  Card,  indicating 
all  the  Added  Entries  of  the  document. 

61  Tracing  Section  is  not  normally  given  in  a catalogue  in  book-form. 

91  Directing  Section. — Section  in  an  Added  Entry  directing 
attention  to  a Document,  or  a Class  Number,  or  Name  of  a Class, 
or  an  Alternative  name. 

This  section  occurs  in  a Cross  Reference  Entry,  a Class  Index  Entry,  a See 
also  Subject  Entry,  and  a Cross  Reference  Index  Entry. 

92  Second  Section. — Section  in  a Book  Index  Entry  giving 
the  specification  of  the  concerned  document{s). 

93  Index  Number  Section. — 

1 Section  in  a Book  Index  Entry,  giving  the  Call  Number 
of  the  document. 

2 Section  in  a Class  Index  Entry,  giving  the  Class  Number 
of  the  class. 

3 Section  in  a Specific  Subject  Entry,  giving  the  Call 
Number  of  the  document. 

4 Section  in  a Subject  Analytical,  giving  the  Call  Number 
of  the  document. 

5 Section  in  the  Main  Entry  of  a Dictionary  Catalogue 
giving  the  Call  Number  in  general  and  Class  Number  in  the  case 
of  the  Periodical  Publication. 


170 


CHAPTER  FR 


HEADING 

0 Heading. — ^The  occupant  of  a Heading  Section  {See  Sec 
FQ2). 

01  A Heading  may  be  the  name  of 

1 A person; 

2 A geographical  entity; 

3 A corporate  body; 

4 A series; 

5 A document; 

6 A subject;  or 

7 A language. 

02  A person  or  coiporate  body  whose  name  is  used  as  Heading  may  be 

1 An  author; 

2 A joint  author; 

3 A collaborator; 

4 A joint  collaborator;  or 

5 The  subject  of  a document. 

03  The  name  of  a geographical  entity,  used  as  Heading,  may  represent 
the  name  of 

1 A Government; 

2 A Document ; or 

3 A Subject. 

1 Homonym  in  Sense  1. — One  and  the  same  name  denoting 
two  or  more  entities  of  any  one  of  the  categories,  such  as 

1 Person;  5 Series; 

2 Geographical  Entity;  6 Subject; 

3 Corporate  Body;  7 Language. 

4 Document; 

11  Homonymous  Heading  in  Sense  1. — ^A  heading  which  is  a 
Homonym  in  Sense  1, 

12  Individualising  Element  in  Some  1. — Term(s)  added  to  a 
name  in  a Heading  to  resolve  Homonym  in  Sense  1 — that  is,  so  as 
to  individualise  the  entity  intended  to  be  denoted. 


171 


FR12  CLASSIFIED  CATALOGUE  CODE 

JExamples: 

1 Hall  (James)  (17S5). 

Hall  (James)  (1761). 

These  are  both  names-of-persons.  The  elements  in  brackets  are  Infiivi- 
dualising  Elements  in  Sense  1 . 

2 Tanjore. 

Tank>re  (City). 

Taniore  (Taluk). 

These  three  are  geographical  names.  The  words  in  brackets  are  Individuali* 
sing  Elements  in  Sense  1 . The  first  of  the  above  headings  is  the  name  of  the 
geographical  area  of  the  largest  extent  denoted  by  the  homonym  being 
considered.  It  is  a district  of  which  the  taluk  is  only  a part. 

3 Godavari. 

Godavari  (City). 

Godavari  (River). 

Godavari  (Taluk). 

These  four  are  geographical  names.  The  words  in  brackets  are  Individualism 
ing  Elements  in  Sense  1. 

4 Ramayana  (Kamban). 

Ramayana  (Tulasidas). 

Ramayana  (Valmiki). 

These  three  are  names  of  books.  The  words  in  brackets  are  Individualising 
Elements  in  Sense  1. 

5 Cambridge. 

Cambridge  (Borough). 

Cambridge  (Maryland). 

Cambridge  (Massachusetts). 

Cambridge  (Ohio). 

2 Homonym  in  Sense  2. — One  and  the  same  name  denoting 
entities  of  any  two  or  more  of  the  categories  mentioned  in 
Sec  FRI. 

21  Homonymous  Heading  in  Sense  2. — A Heading  which  is  a 
Homonym  in  Sense  2. 

22  Individualising  Element  in  Sense  2. — ^Term(s)  added  to  a 
name  in  a Heading  to  resolve  a Homonym  in  Sense  2 — that  is,  so 
as  to  individualise  the  entity  intended  to  be  denoted. 

Examples: 

1 Salisbury. 

Salisbury  (Book). 

Salisbury  (City). 

Salisbury  (Subject), 


172 


HEAPING  FR42 

Hie  words  in  bradkets  ace  Individualising  Bksments  in  Sense  2.  The  fim 
of  tito  above  headings  is  the  name  of  a person. 

3^  Homonym  in  Sense  3. — Homonym  simultaneously  in 
Senses  1 and  2. 

31  Homonymous  Heading  in  Sense  3« — A Heading  which  is  a 
Homonym  in  Sense  3. 

32  Individualising  Elem^t  in  Sense  3. — ^A  succession  of  Indi- 
vidualising Elements  in  Senses  1 and  2 added  to  a name  in  a 
Heading  to  resolve  Homonym  in  Sense  3 — that  is,  so  as  to 
individualise  the  entity  intended  to  be  denoted. 

Example: 

Cambridge  (Massachusetts)  (Book). 

Here,  ‘‘Massachusetts”  is  Individualising  Element  in  Sense  1 and  “Book” 
is  Individualising  Element  in  Sense  2.  Both  taken  together  form  Individualis- 
ing Element  in  Sense  3. 

4 Individualised  Heading. — Heading  including  Individualising 
Element(s)  added  to  resolve  homonym. 

41  Word-Group  in  a Heading. — One  or  more  words,  constitu- 
ting the  name  forming  the  heading,  which  are  inseparable  and 
should  be  taken  together,  to  make  the  specification  of  the  entity 
intelligible. 

Examples: 

1 “Hall”  in  Example  1 under  Sec  FR12  is  a Word-Group  of  one 
word  only. 

2 De  Quincy,  Le  Sage,  Ni  Ni,  Quiller-Couch,  Rajendra  Prasad, 
SivASWAMi  Ayyar,  Yusuf  Au; 

Chin  Hills,  Costa  Rica,  La  Plata,  Madhya  Pradesh,  New  Delhi, 
New  York,  Nova  Scotcia,  Porto  Rico,  West  Lothian; 

Book  selection,  Elementary  education,  Integral  calculus.  Respi- 
ratory system; 

are  Word-Groups  of  two  words, 

3 Basu  Ray  Chaudhuri,  Leon  y Roman,  Martin  du  Card,  Muham- 
mad Ibn  Aly,  Sankara  Narayana  Pillai; 

Clacton-on-Sea,  Dera  Ghazi  Khan,  Prince  Edward  Islands,  New 
South  Wales,  Rio  de  Janeiro; 
arc  Word-Groups  of  three  words. 

42  Individualised  Word-Group  in  a Heading. — Word- 

173 


FR42  CXASSIHED  CATALOGUE  CODE 

Group  in  a heading  taken  along  with  the  Individualising  Elements 
if  any. 


Example: 

“Hall  (James)  (1755)”  in  Example  1 and  “Tanjore  (City)”  in  Example  2 
under  Sec  FR12  are  examples  of  Individualised  Word-Groups  in  a Heading. 

43  Block  in  a Heading. — Individualised  Word-Group  in  a 
Heading. 

This  term  is  introduced  for  brevity. 

5 Heading  of  an  entry  may  be  Simple  or  Multiple. 

51  Simple  Heading. — Heading  consisting  of  a single  Block. 

Examples: 

1 Hall  (James)  (1755). 

2 Tanjore  (City). 

3 Cambridge  (Massachusetts  ) (Book). 

52  Multiple  Heading. — Heading  consisting  of  two  or  more 
Blocks,  usually  separated  by  a punctuation  mark  such  as  a 
comma. 

Examples: 

See  under  Sec  FR56  and  FR57. 

53  First  Heading  or  Main  Heading. — The  First  Block  in  a 
Multiple  Heading. 


Examples: 

The  following  remarks  pertain  to  the  successive  examples  given  in  Sec  FR56; 
1.  “India”  is  First  Heading  or  Main  Heading  in  Example  I. 

2 “Law”  is  First  Heading  or  Main  Heading  in  E\^mplc  2. 

3 “Diagnosis”  is  First  Heading  or  Main  Heading  in  Example  3. 

The  following  remarks  pertain  to  the  successive  examples  given  in 
Sec  FR57; 

1 “Madras”  is  First  Heading  or  Main  Heading  in  Example  1. 

2 “Madras  (City)”  is  First  Heading  or  Main  Heading  in  Example  2. 

3 “Madras”  is  First  Heading  or  Main  Heading  in  Example  3. 

4 “Western  railway  (India)”  is  First  Heading  or  Main  Heading 
in  Example  4. 

174 


HEADING  FR57 

5 “University  College  (London)”  is  First  Heading  or  Main  Heading 
in  Example  5. 

S4*  Second  Heading  or  First  Subheading. — ^The  Second  Block 
in  a Multiple  Heading. 


Examples: 

The  following  remarks  pertain  to  the  successive  examples  given  in  SecFR56: 

1 “Law”  is  Second  Heading  or  First  Subheading  in  Example  I . 

2 “Constitution”  is  Second  Heading  or  First  Subheading  in  Example  2. 

3 “Tuberculosis”  is  Second  Heading  or  First  Subheading  in  Example  3. 

The  following  remarks  pertain  to  the  successive  examples  given  in  Sec  FR57 : 

1 “Council  of  Ministers”  is  Second  Heading  or  First  Subheading  in 
Example  1. 

2 “Council”  is  Second  Heading  or  First  Subheading  in  Example  2. 

3 “District  Court  (Coimbatore)”  is  Second  Heading  or  First  Sub- 
heading in  Example  3. 

4 “Audit  (Department  of-—)”  is  Second  Heading  or  First  Subheading 
in  Example  4. 

5 “Biometric  (Laboratory)”  is  Second  Heading  or  First  Subhead- 
ing in  Example  5. 

56  Multiple  Subject  Heading. — Subject  Heading  having,  in  its 
successive  blocks,  the  names  of  successive  classes. 


These  are  normally  of  increasing  extension. 

Examples: 

1 India,  Law,  Library. 

2 Law,  Constitution,  Great  Britain. 

3 Diagnosis,  Tuberculosis,  Lungs. 

561  It  can  be  seen  that  normally  any  class  mentioned  in  a subheading  in  a 
Multiple  Subject  Heading  will  have  the  earlier  classes  mentioned  in  the  head- 
ing as  its  subclasses. 

562  The  Main  l^cading  and  the  Subheadings  of  a Multiple  Subject 
Heading  are  derived  from  a Class  Number  by  the  Chain  Procedure  described 
in  Part  K. 

57  Multiple  Corporate  Heading. — Corporate  Heading  having, 
in  its  successive  blocks,  the  name  of  a Corporate  body  and  the 
names  of  its  successive  organs  of  increasing  remove. 


175 


FR57  CLASSIFIED  CATALOGUE  CODE 

Exatnples: 

1 Madras,  Council  of  Ministers. 

2 Madras,  (City),  Council,  Works  (Standing  Committee  for—). 

3 Madras,  District  Court  (Coimbatore). 

4 Western  Railway  (India),  Audit  (Department  of—). 

5 University  College  (London),  Biometric  (—Laboratory). 

6 Descriptive  Element. — ^Term(s)  added  after  the  name  of  a 
person  or  a corporate  body  including  its  individualising  element(5), 
if  any,  to  denote  the  role  of  the  person  or  the  corporate  body, 
if  it  is  other  than  that  of  author — such  as,  J Auth;  Ed;  J Ed;  Tr; 
J Tr;  Assis;  Dir;  Ded;  etc. 

7 Connecting  Element. — Word  like  “and'’,  “of’*,  etc  occurring 
within  a Block  in  a Heading  or  between  the  names  of  J Authors, 
or  J Collaborators. 

Examples: 

1 “y’ * in  “Leon  y Roman.” 

2 “on”  in  “Clacton-on-Sea.” 

3 “de”  in  “Rio  de  Janeiro.” 

4 “and”  in  “Ranganathan  (Shiyali  Ramamritha)  (1892)  and 
Sivaraman  (Kesarimangalam  Manikam  Aiyar)  (1903).” 

5 “and”  in  “Library  Association  (Great  Britain)  and  American 
Library  Association,” 

8 Entry  Element. — ^The  Word  or  Word-Group  occurring 
First  in  a Block  in  a Heading,  that  is  before  any  Individualising 
or  Descriptive  or  any  other  Element  belonging  to  the  Block. 

81  Entry  Word. — The  First  Word  in  an  Entry  Element, 


176 


CHAPTER  FZD 


« • 

DICTIONARY  CATALOGUE 

1 Dictionary  Catalogue. — Catalogue  in  which  all  the  entries 
are  Word  Entries. 

11  Consequently,  a Dictionary  Catalogue  consists  of  one  part  only. 

2 The  entries  in  a Dictionary  Catalogue  are  arranged  alphabetically  as  in 
a dictionary. 

3 In  a Dictionary  Catalogue,  the  Main  Entry  begins  with  the  Name  of 
the  Author  or  a substitute  for  it. 

Example; 

Entry  given  as  Example  1 under  Sec  FN41. 

4 Subject  Index  Entry  in  a Dictionary  Catalogue; 

1 Specific  Subject  Entry; 

2 Subject  Analytical ; 

3 See  also  Subject  Entry. 

41  Specific  Subject  Entry. — Specific  Added  Word  Entry  in  a 
Dictionary  Catalogue,  entering  a document  under  the  name  of  the 
class  treated  in,  if  it  is  unifocal,  or  under  that  one  of  its  classes, 
which  is  most  dominant,  if  it  is  multifocal. 

Example: 

Entry  given  as  Example  1 under  Sec  FN52. 

42  Subject  Analytical. — Specific  Word  Entry  in  a Dictionary 
Catalogue  entering  a document  under  the  name  of  a class  treated 
in  it  in  a subsidiary  way,  that  is  occurring  as  a secondary  focus 
in  the  documer|j. 

Example: 

Entry  given  as  Example  2 under  Sec  FN53. 

43  See  also  Subject  Entry. — General  Added  Word  Entry  in  a 
Dictionary  Catalogue  referring  from  the  name  of  one  Subject  to 
that  of  another. 


12 


177 


FZD44 


CLASSIHED  CATALOGUE  CODE 


44  All  the  Subject  Index  Entries  are  derived  from  the  Class 
Number  of  the  document  or  of  any  portion  of  it  for  which  a 
Specific  Subject  Entry  has  been  made. 

Examine'. 

Entry  given  as  Example  1 under  Sec  FN22. 

7 Cross  Reference  Index  Entry — Same  as  Sec  FN45. 

8 Book  Index  Entry. — A Specific  Added  Word  Entry  in  a 
Dictionary  Catalogue. 

Example: 

Entry  given  as  Example  2 under  Sec  FN53. 


178 


PART  G 

CONFLICT  OF  AUTHORSHIP 


CHAPTER  GA 


INTRODUCTION 

1 Difficulties 

Difficulties  arise  in  deciding  the  author  of  a Work.  These  difficulties  may 
be  taken  to  centre  round  the  following  issues: 

1 Person  vs  Person 

2 Person  vs  Corporate  Body 

3 Government  vs  Institution 

4 Ecclesiastical  Polity 

5 Institution  vs  Institution 

6 Delegation-from-Body  vs  Delegated-to-Body 

7 Legal  Publications 

8 Author’s  Name  Merged  in  Title 

2 Problem  for  International  Catalogue  Code 

It  is  desirable  from  the  point  of  view  of  international  intercourse  in  the 
Library  field  such  as.  International  Library  Loan  and  Centralized  Cataloguing, 
that  a uniform  practice  should  be  followed  in  respect  of  the  problems  men- 
tioned in  Sec  GAL  Unesco  took  interest  in  this  problem.  It  requested 
the  International  Federation  of  Library  Associations  to  pursue  the  problem, 
promising  as  usual  the  necessary  financial  help.  Accordingly  at  its  meeting 
held  in  Zagreb  in  September  1954,  the  international  Federation  of  Library 
Associations  seized  this  problem.  After  several  years  of  work,  the  problem 
was  brought  for  consideration  at  the  International  Conference  on  Cataloguing 
held  in  Paris  from  9 to  18  October  1961.  The  attention  of  the  International 
Conference  was  invited  to  these  problems  in  a paper  circulated  to  the  authori- 
ties of  the  Conference  early  in  1961  [RI3]. 

3 Evasion  of  the  Problems 

However,  the  Conference  did  not  consider  the  problems  on  the  basis  of 
accepted  Canons  and  Principles  of  Cataloguing.  In  fact,  the  work  of  the 
Conference  was  not  at  all  guided  by  such  canons  and  principles.  The 
Conference  dealt  in  detail  with  certain  problems  that  are  best  left  to  National 
and  Linguistic  C^des.  But  this  question  of  Conflict  of  Authorship  was  not 
adequately  discussed  by  the  Conference  [R14]. 


181 


CHAPTER  GB 


PERSON  VS  PERSON 

1 Spoken  Word 

In  certain  types  of  works,  the  thought  expressed  in  the  spoken  word  is  not 
committed  to  writing  by  the  author  of  the  spoken  word.  The  words  are  not 
even  published  always  exactly  in  the  form  in  which  they  were  spoken.  Usually 
they  are  edited,  rearranged,  and  featured.  (The  person,  who  creates  the 
thought,  is  taken  as  the  author;  while  the  person  who  collects  or  notes  down 
the  words  uttered  by  the  creator  of  the  thought  and  gives  them  the  shape  of  a 
work  is  regarded  as  a collaborator.  He  may  be  called  Reporter.  The 
reporter  may  even  prompt  the  author  by  his  owm  questions  and  suggestions; 
and  yet  he  is  not  given  the  status  of  a joint  author.  It  must  be  stated  that 
the  steno-typist  of  an  author  is  not  even  regarded  as  a collaborator. 


Ser  N Type  of  Work 

Author 

1 

Ana,  table-talk 

Talker 

2 

Dialogue,  conversation. 

Participants 

debate 

3 

Interview 

Person(s)  interviewed 

4 

Lecture 

Lecturer 

5 

Narration  (real  and  not 

Narrator 

fictitious) 

6 

Mediumistic  communication 

Medium(s)  and  not  the 

disembodied  souls 

Example: 

Consider  the  book  whose  title  page  reads  as  follows: 

Plasma  Physics:  A Course  Given  by  S Chandrasekhar  at  the  University 
of  Chicago.  Notes  compiled  by  S K Trehan.  * 

The  Author  of  the  book  is  S Chandrasekhar.  Trehan  is  only  the 
Reporter— that  is,  a Collaborator. 

2 Correspondence 

In  the  case  of  correspondence,  the  correspondent(s)  should  be 
taken  as  joint  author(s).  If,  however,  the  document  contains  the 

182 


PERSON  VS  PERSON  GB6 

correspondence  of  one  person  only  with  several  others — (hen  the 
one  person  alone  may  be  taken  as  the  author. 

3  Map  and  Atlas 

The  cartographer  should  be  taken  as  the  author  of  a map  or 
atlas. 


4  Dependent  Work 

Dependent  Work  is  a work  got  by  some  modiScation  of  another  work  or 
by  the  augmentation  of  it.  The  modification  or  augmentation,  as  the  case 
may  be,  need  not  necessarily  be  by  the  author  of  the  original  work.  It  may 
be  done  by  some  other  person  or  corporate  body.  Conflict  in  authorship 
arises  in  respect  of  the  original  author  and  the  modifier  or  the  augmenter. 
The  decision  in  such  cases  is  to  be  in  accordance  with  Sec  CBS  and 
GB6. 


5  Author  of  the  Original 

The  author  of  the  Original  should  be  taken  as  the  Author  of  the 
following  kinds  of  dependent  works: 

1 Abridgement  4 Revision 

2 Adaptation  5 Selection 

3 Paraphrase  6 Translation 


6  Author  of  Dependrat  Work 


The  author  of  the  Dependent  work  should  be  taken  as  the 
Author  of  the  following  kinds  of  dependent  works: 


1 Commentary  91 

(Of  greater  importance  92 
than  the  basic  work)  93 

2 Concordance  94 

3 Contiijuation  95 

4 Dramatisation  96 

3 Imitation 

6 Index 

7 Libretto 

8 Music-setting 


Novelisation 

Parody 

Sequel 

Supplement 

Versification 

Version  in  the  same  or 
another  language,  which 
has  sufficient  new  qualities 
in  thought  and/or  expres- 
sion to  deem  it  an  inde- 
pendent work  on  its  own 
right. 


183 


CHAPTER  GC 


PERSON  KS  CORPORATE  BODY 
0 Introduction 

The  title-page  of  a document  may  indicate  corporate  authorship  or  may 
contain  the  name  of  a corporate  body,  in  addition  to  containing  the  name($) 
of  person(s).  Such  a document  raises  a conflict  in  authorship.  This  conflict 
can  be  resolved  in  most  cases  by  observing  the  rules  given  in  this  chapter. 

1 If  the  title-page  mentions  the  name(s)  of  person(s)  only  in 
the  author-statement  and  does  not  mention  or  indicate  the  name 
of  any  corporate  body(ies)  other  than  the  one(s)  belonging  to  the 
publishing  trade  mentioned  in  the  imprint,  the  work  in  the 
document  is  of  personal  authorship. 

2 If  the  title-page  does  not  mention  the  name(s)  of  person(s) 
in  the  author-statement,  but  mentions  or  indicates  somewhere  in 
itself  or  in  the  overflow  of  title-page  the  name  of  a corporate 
body(ies)  other  than  a body  belonging  to  the  publishing  trade 
mentioned  in  the  imprint,  and  if  there  is  also  internal  evidence  of 
corporate  authorship,  the  work  in  the  document  is  of  corporate 
authorship;  provided  that,  even  in  the  case  of  the  name(s)  of  the 
corporate  body(ies)  mentioned  in  the  imprint  being  only  that  of  a 
body  belonging  to  the  publishing  trade,  if  it  is  a work  by  the 
corporate  body  itself— such  as  its  catalogue,  administration 
report,  history— the  work  in  the  document  is  of  corporate 
authorship. 

3 If  the  title-page  mentions  or  indicates  the  name(s)  of  a 
corporate  body(ies)  other  than  a body  belonging  to  the  publishing 
trade  mentioned  in  the  imprint,  and  also  the  name^s)  of  person(s) 
in  the  place  usually  giving  the  name  of  the  author. — 

31  The  work  in  the  document  is  of  corporate  authorship,  if  it 
is  of  a deliberative,  legislative,  directive,  judicial,  administrative 
or  routine  character  limited  by  the  purpose  or  function  or  outlook 
of  the  corporate  body.  The  mere  fact  that  a document  is 
published,  financed,  aided,  approved,  sponsored,  or  authorised 
by  a corporate  body  is  not  suflBcient  reason  to  deem  the  work  in 

184 


PERSON  VS  CORPORATE  BODY  GC5 

it  to  be  of  corporate  authorship,  an4  not  to  be  of  personal 
authorship. 

32«  The  work  in  the  document  is  of  personal  authorship,  if  its 
primary  function  is  the  extension  of  the  boundary  of  a field  of 
knowledge  or  its  intensification,  and  the  responsibility  for  the 
thought  and  expression  of  it  rests  on  the  person  and  not  on  the 
office  held  by  him  in  the  corporate  body,  in  spite  of  his  being  a 
paid  or  an  honorary  employee  or  a member  of  the  corporate  body. 
The  mere  mention  of  the  personal  name  of  an  official  of  the 
corporate  body  in  the  place  in  which  author’s  name  is  usually 
mentioned  in  a book,  is  not  sufficient  reason  to  deem  the  work  in 
it  to  be  of  personal  authorship  and  not  to  be  of  corporate 
authorship. 


4 Legal  Publication 

Legal  publications  raise  certain  issues  of  their  own  in  regard  to  author- 
ship. For  example,  a bill  is  usually  the  work  of  a Ministry.  Its  modification 
may  be  the  work  of  a Select  Committee.  The  Act,  before  the  assent  of  the 
Head  of  the  State,  is  the  work  of  the  Legislature.  These  cases  give 
no  difficulty.  But  the  final  Act  is  the  work  of  the  Legislature  and  the 
Head  of  the  State.  Constitutionally,  the  part  of  each  of  these  limbs  of  the 
government  is  of  equal  weight.  Quantitatively,  they  are  quite  unequal. 
Further,  the  details  have  to  be  filled  up  usually  by  the  Executive  or  even  by  a 
Department.  For  these  reasons,  we  may  have  the  following  Rule: 

41  The  whole  government  should  be  taken  as  the  author  of  an 
Act  and  a collection  of  Acts,  with  or  without  the  Rules  framed 
under  them. 

Another  difficulty  may  arise  in  respect  of  legal  publications.  Editions  of 
an  Act  may  be  brought  out  by  a private  author  with  notes,  commentaries, 
and  case  laws  in  various  degrees  of  proportion.  Such  publications  arc 
perhaps  best  treated  according  to  Sec  GB82. 

42  An  edition  of  an  Act,  brought  out  by  a private  author  with 
introduction,  notes,  commentaries,  case  laws,  and  over-all 
observations,  should  be  treated  as  provided  in  Sec  GB6. 

5 Person  vs  Conference. — A Conference  is  deemed  author 
only  of  its  agenda,  minutes,  resolutions,  report  of  proceedings, 
and  similar  collectively  created  thought.  But  a collection  of 


185 


GC5 


CLASSIFIED  CATALOGUE  CODE 


learned  papers  or  memoranda  presented  by  person(s)  or  corporate 
body(ies)  at  the  conference  is  deemed  to  have  Ae  respective 
person(s)  or  body(ies)  as  author(s). 


186 


CHAPTER  GD 


% 

CORPORATE  BODY  VS  CORPORATE  BODY 
1 GOVERNMENT  VS  INSTITUTION 

Several  institutions  are  government-owned  or  nearly  so.  Some  of  these 
are  autonomous.  Some  are  managed  directly  by  government  as  if  they 
were  departments  or  other  organs.  There  are  all  possible  grades  of  transition 
from  an  unmistakable  organ  of  government  to  an  independent  institution. 
Now  and  again,  there  is  also  shift  of  the  same  institution  in  course  of  time 
from  the  status  of  an  independent  institution  to  any  status  short  of  an  un- 
mistakable organ  and  vice  versa.  A useful  test  is  this : 

Organ  of  first  remove  is  usually  mentioned  in  a modern  written  constitu- 
tion. On  the  analogy  of  this,  organ  of  first  remove  of  a nation  with  un- 
written constitution  may  be  recognised. 

Another  fact  has  to  be  remembered.  There  is  a tendency  for  the  state  to 
take  up  more  and  more  functions,  beyond  the  traditional  and  primary  ones 
of  government — v/z,  policy  decision,  legislation,  defence,  judiciary,  and 
administration.  It  takes  up  many  service  functions  such  as: 

1 Construction  and  maintenance  of  hi^-ways,  bridges,  harbours,  air- 
ports and  such  other  essentials  of  transport; 

2 Astronomical  and  meteorological  observations  through  its  own 
observatories; 

3 Transport  systems  such  as  railways,  tramways,  bus  system,  and 
airways; 

4 Communication  systems  such  as  postal,  telegraph,  telephone,  wireless 
and  radio  services; 

5 Healing  the  sick  and  wounded  through  its  own  hospitals  and  its  own 
sanatoria; 

6 Teaching  through  its  own  schools,  colleges,  and  universities;  and 

7 Banking  service  through  its  own  banks. 

Perhaps  none  of  the  above  seven  categories  except  the  first  is  usuaUy 
included  among  the  primary  functions  of  a government.  At  any  rate,  this 
may  be  adopted  as  a cataloguing  convention. 

But  for  such  a convention,  most  institutions  will  come  into  the  category 
of  organs  of  government,  as  the  state  progresses  towards  socialisation.  In 
a truly  totalitarian  state,  there  may  not  be  any  corporate  body  other  than  the 
government  and  its  organs.  To  break  up  this  octopus-type  of  governmental 
authorship,  cataloguing  practice  has  to  adopt  a convention  to  distinguish 
between  an  organ  of  a government  and  an  institution.  The  conventions 
may  be  put  in  the  form  of  Sec  GD2  and  GD3. 


187 


GD2 


CLASaO^  CATALOGUE  CODE 

2 GoTeniiiMiit  as  Aathttf 


For  a work  bearing  on  the  discharge  of  primary  functioi^ — 
administration  report,  report  of  deliberation,  direction,  and  any 
kindred  work  embodying  thought  created  and  expressed  by  an 
organ  of  government  of  first  remove,  second  remove,  etc  as 
defined  in  Sec  FC21  to  FC217 — the  government  or  its  appro- 
priate organ(s),  as  the  case  may  be,  should  be  taken  as  its  author. 

3 Institution  as  Anthor 

Any  autonomous  or  even  non-autonomous  organisation, 
engaged  in  the  work  of  research,  production,  commerce  and 
supply  of  commodities  and  services  to  the  public,  may  have  to  be 
taken  to  be  the  institutional  author  for  an  work  for  whose  thought 
and  expression  it  is  responsible.  It  is  so  even  if  the  institution  is 
owned  and  managed  by  the  government. 

4  Elusive  Cases 

The  above-mentioned  criterion  to  distinguish  between  governmental 
and  institutional  authorship  will  be  sufficient  in  most  cases.  But  there  will 
occasionally  be  refractory  cases  baffling  this  criterion.  No  help  except 
the  persona]  judgment  of  the  cataloguer  will  be  of  avail  in  such  cases.  By  a 
periodical  review  of  such  elusive  cases,  the  criterion  can  be  made  progressively 
sharper. 


5  Ecclesiastical  Polity 

Ecclesiastical  polity  has  features  similar  to  those  of  a government.  There 
are  organs  of  different  removes  from  the  central  authority.  There  are  also 
autonomous  institutions.  The  criterion  to  resolve  conflict  of  authorship 
between  an  ecclesiastical  organ  and  institution  is  similar  to  that  for  the 
conflict  between  a governmental  organ  and  institution,  astgiven  in  Sec  GDI 
and  GD3. 


6  Institution  vs  Institution 

The  criterion  to  resolve  the  conflict  about  authorship  between  a parent 
institution  or  one  of  its  organs  on  the  one  side,  and  an  autonomous  afflJiated 
institution  on  the  other  is  similar  to  that  for  the  conflict  between  a govern- 
mental organ  and  institution  as  given  in  Sec  GD2  and  GD3. 

188 


OORFORAIC  BODY  VS  OORTOItAlS  WDY  GD81 
7 OdcsrtiQii— Conflict  nbont  Pnnnt  Bodico 

Dd^atkm  to  a conference  or  an  international  body  sudi  as  the  Umted 
Nalfpns  appears  to  be  amphibious.  A delegation  is  itself  a corporate  body. 
It  implies  the  existence  of  two  other  corporate  bodies — ^Del^ated-fhnn-Body 
and  Ddegated-to-Body.  The  kind  of  document,  about  whose  authnship 
conflict  arises,  may  comprise  memoranda  submitted,  resolutions  tabled,  and 
utterances  made,  by  the  delegation  at  the  conference,  and  report  by  the 
Delegation  to  the  Delegated-from-Body.  There  is  no  doubt  about  the  author* 
ship  belonging  to  the  Delegation.  But  the  Delegation  is  not  an  independent 
body.  It  is  only  an  organ.  The  name  of  the  body  of  which  it  is  an  organ 
should  be  mentioned  along  with  its  own  name  to  establish  its  identity.  The 
question  is,  “Is  it  an  organ  of  the  Delegated-from>Body  or  of  the  Delegated* 
to-Body  ?”  The  answer  to  this  question  depends  upon  the  answer  to  another 
question:  “Which  body  takes  the  ultimate  responsibility  for  the  thought* 
content  of  the  document  created  by  the  delegation?  Is  it  the  Delegated* 
from-Body  or  the  Delegated-to*Body  ?“  There  can  be  no  difference  of  opinion 
about  the  answers  to  these  questions.  The  answers  lead  to  the  following  Rule: 

71  The  Delegated-from*Body  should  be  taken  to  be  the  parent 
body  of  a Delegation  to  a Conference  or  to  a body  such  as  the 
United  Nations  or  a Peace  Conference  in  respect  of  any  work 
embodying  any  thought  and  expression  created  by  the  Delegation. 

8 Synopshi  of  Cataloguing  Conventions 

The  following  is  a synopsis  of  the  cataloguing  conventions  more  or  less 
stabilised  at  present,  in  deciding  the  corporate  body  to  be  deemed  the  author 
of  a work— parent  body  or  an  organ  of  it  on  the  one  side  and  a dependent 
of  afiitiated  institution  on  the  other. 

Group  1 


81  Each  of  the  following  Institutions  should  be  taken  as 
Author  of  its  works,  as  if  it  were  independent  of  the  parent  body, 
if  any  exists,  be  it  government  or  institution: — 


Abbey 

Bank 

Board  of  Trade 
Cathedral 
Cemetery 
Chamber  of 
Commerce 


Church  (place  of 
worship) 

College 
Convent 
Endowment 
Exchange  (Money) 
Firm  of  Enterprise 


Foundation 

Guild 

Masonic  Body 

Monastery 

Mosque 

Mutt 

Park 


189 


GD81 


, CXASSmED  «ATAU>GUE  CODE 

Political  Party  School  Telephonollxc^lige 

Pc^  Office  Stock  Exchange  T^ple 

Produce  Exchange 

Religious  Order  Telegraph  Office  University 

Group  2 

82  Each  of  the  following  Institutions  should  be  taken  as 
Author  of  its  works  as  if  it  were  independent  of  the  parent  body, 
if  any  exists,  be  it  government  or  institution,  provided  it  has  a 
distinctive  name: — 


Botanical 

Garden 

Chapel 

Exhibition 


Experimental 

Station 

Festival 

Hospital 

Laboratory 

Library 


Museum 

Observatory 

Shop 

Zoological 

Garden 


If  any  of  the  above  institutions  has  no  distinctive  nanm,  it  should 
be  treated  as  an  organ  of  its  parent  body. 


Group  3 


83  Any  formal  or  informal  group  of  the  members  of  a parent 
body  formed  for  recreative,  ameliorative  or  any  other  economical 
or  social  purposes  should  be  treated  as  an  organ  of  the  parent  body 
even  if  it  has  a distinctive  name. 


Group  4 

84  Each  Section  or  Branch  of  an  institution  s\iould  be  taken 
as  Author  of  its  work,  as  if  it  were  independent  of  its  parent  body, 
provided  it  has  a distinctive  name  not  involving  the  name  of  thp 
parent  body. 

If  a section  or  a branch  has  no  distinctive  name  not  involving 
the  name  of  the  parent  body,  it  should  be  treated  as  an  organ  of  the 
parent  body. 

190 


. CORK^ATC  BOOY  VS  CORKHU’P  B|l?6x'  G0915 

Group  5 

85  Each  Intonatioiial  lostitotion  or  Copfemce— isolated  or 
contidvdng, — of  private  persons,  non-govemmental  institution^, 
or  national  govemments'should  be  taken  as  Andior  of  work  made 
up  of  its  deliberations. 


91  Refractory  Cases 

The  preceding  Rules  of  this  Chapter  will  prove  sufficient  to  resolve  the 
conflict  that  may  arise  in  respect  of  authorship  in  most  of  the  cases.  The 
commentaries  in  Sec  GD4  and  GD7  and  their  subsections  amount  to  some 
loud’thinking  in  resolving  the  conflict  in  some  of  the  difficult  cases  in  the 
light  of  the  definition  of  authorship  and  the  Sec  given  in  this  Chap.  All  the 
same,  it  cannot  be  asserted  that  every  possible  refractory  case  involving  con- 
flict in  authorship  can  be  solved  unambiguously.  New  guiding  principles 
will  have  to  be  evolved  as  and  when  new  types  of  refractory  cases  arise.  A few 
more  discussions  and  directions  are  given  here.  These  are  chosen  to  counter- 
act a wrong  tradition  brought  into  vogue  by  the  Anglo-American  Code. 

91 1 Charter 

The  author  of  the  charter  granted  by  a government  to  a city  or  a rural 
district  or  any  other  body  is  the  government  and  not  the  recipient  of  the 
charter.  For,  the  charter  is  a document,  for  the  thought-content  and  the 
expression  of  which  the  government  is  responsible. 

The  prescription  in  Rule  87  of  the  Anglo-American  Code  implies  a violation 
of  this  fact,  if  it  is  to  be  taken  as  a rule  for  author-entry. 

912  Law  of  Territory 

The  author  of  a law  of  a territory  promulgated  by  a suzeraine  power  is 
the  government  of  the  suzeraine  power  and  not  that  of  the  territory.  For 
the  law  in  question  is  a document,  for  the  thought-content  and  expression 
of  which  the  government  of  the  suzeraine  power  is  responsible. 

The  prescription  in  Rule  84B  of  the  Anglo-American  Code  implies  a 
violation  of  this  fact,  if  it  is  to  be  taken  as  a rule  for  author-entry. 

9^3  Constitution  of  Dependency 

The  remarks  are  similar  to  those  for  Law  of  Territory. 

914  Decision  or  a Court  of  Law 

A Court  of  Law  is  the  author  of  any  of  its  decisions  ora  collection  of  them. 

915  Report  of  Legal  Proceedings 


A report  of  the  legal  proceedings  in  a Court  of  Law  raises  some  conflict  in 

191 


GD91S  CLASSmED  catalogue  coot 

regard  to  its  authorship*  A full  report  of  the  case  will  contain  an  account 
of  the  plaint  and  the  defence  statements  of  all  the  parties  concerned.  It  may 
also  contain  a verbatim  report  of  the  chief-examination  and  the  cross-examina- 
tion of  the  parties  and  the  witnesses.  It  may  further  contain  the  arguments 
of  the  advocates  of  all  the  parties.  It  must  necessarily  contain  the  verdict 
of  the  jury,  if  any,  and  the  judgment  of  the  court.  Even  if  the  report  is  brief, 
it  will  contain  a summaiy  of  all  these  elements.  The  different  elements  have 
different  authors.  And  yet,  the  contribution  of  each  is  not  conveniently 
separable  from  those  of  the  others.  At  the  same  time,  the  report  cannot  be 
regarded  to  be  of  joint-authorship,  as  the  portion  for  which  each  author  is 
responsible  is  specified.  Perhaps,  it  resembles  a document  embodying  corres- 
pondence between  several  persons.  There,  however,  the  thought-content  of 
the  document  gets  developed  jointly  by  all  the  correspondents.  ^Such  a 
description  cannot  apply  with  sufficient  propriety  to  the  report  of  legal 
proceedings  of  a case  in  a court.  Can  we  take  the  following  view  ? It  is 
the  court  which  co-ordinates  and  guides  the  course  of  the  proceedings,  and 
finally  summarises  the  entire  proceedings  and  gives  the  judgment.  The  real 
focus  or  the  culmination  of  the  report  is  the  part  played  by  the  court  from 
the  beginning  right  up  to  the  judgment.  Therefore,  the  court  may  be  taken 
as  the  author  of  the  report  of  the  legal  proceedings  of  a case  tried  by  it. 


192 


CHAPTER  GE 


* 

NAME  OF  ORIGINAL  AUTHOR  MERGED  IN 
TITLE 

1 lotroduction 

Some  works  are  almost  immortal.  They  have  elements  of 
permanent  value.  They  are  saturated  with  the  personality  of  the 
author,  which  itself  is  very  powerful  and  highly  organized.  It  is 
usually  a seminal  book  cutting  new  ground,  blazing  new  trail, 
stimulating  new  thought,  and  so  on.  It  gets  printed  repeatedly 
even  after  centuries.  It  stimulates  other  works  on  itself.  Sudi  a 
work  is  called  a classic  {See  Sec  FAT).  Since  a classic  outlives 
the  author,  the  title  page  of  any  later  edition  of  it  has  often 
necessarily  to  contain  the  name  of  a collaborator  as  editor  or  as 
translator  or  in  any  other  capacity.  The  author’s  name  may  be 
merged  in  the  title  of  the  work.  It  may  even  happen  that  the  name 
of  the  original  author  is  totally  absent  from  the  title  page.  The 
conflict  of  authorship  in  the  case  of  classics  is  dealt  with  else- 
where {See  Chap  GB). 

1 1 Long-Lived  Work 

We  are  only  concerned  here  with  other  fairly  long-lived  works. 
The  essential  value  of  such  a long-lived  work  does  not  centre 
round  its  seminal  nature  or  on  the  personality  of  the  author  or  on 
the  elements  of  permanent  value  contained  in  it  so  much  as  in 
classics.  On  the  other  hand,  it  embodies  current  knowledge  or 
current  informatjpn.  For  this  reason  it  has  to  be  revised  and 
brought  up  to  date  from  time  to  time.  In  other  words,  its 
current  validity  essentially  requires  correction  or  omission  of  old 
matter  and  addition  of  new  matter  from  time  to  time.  But  the 
frame  work  of  the  original  edition  is  retained  in  all  the  successive 
editions.  Such  a work  often  occurs  in  all  the  sciences— parti- 
cularly in  the  taxonomic  works  of  natural  sciences,  medical  works, 
and  legal  works. 


13 


193 


GE12 


CLASSIFIED  CATALOGUE  CODE 


12  Extent  of  Change 

At  one  extr^e,  the  change  in  a new  embodiment  of  a long-|ived 
work  may  be  slight — ^that  is,  it  may  affect  only  a small  fraction  of 
the  work.  At  the  other  extreme,  it  may  affect  most  of  the  work — 
at  any  rate,  more  than  half  the  work.  The  change-over  from  the 
one  extreme  to  the  other  may  be  in  gradual  steps  from  embodi- 
ment to  embodiment. 

13  Need  for  Collaborator 

From  certain  edition  onwards,  a long-lived  work  of  the  nature 
described  above  will  necessarily  require  a collaborator.  It  may  be 
due  either  to  the  incapacity  of  the  original  author  or  to  his  having 
been  dead.  Surely  thereafter,  the  original  author  can  have  no 
responsibility  for  the  changes  made  in  the  later  editions.  The 
entire  responsibility  for  bringing  the  work  up  to  date  falls  on  the 
collaborator  alone.  This  factor  has  resulted  in  the  title  page  of 
the  later  editions  reflecting  the  change  of  responsibility  in  diverse 
ways. 

2 Examples 

Example  11; 

Dewey/Oecimal  Classification/and  Relative  index/ Devised  by/Melvil 
Dewey/16  EditionlW ohxme  I /Tables/Forest  Press  Inc/Lake  Placid  Club/Essex 
Country/New  York. 

First  published  anonymously  in  1876  under  the  title;  A Classification 
and  Subject  Index.  Ed  2 to  14  published  under  the  title:  Decimal  Classi- 
fication and  Relative  Index. 

In  P 19,  the  Editor’s  Introduction  says,  *‘The  editors  have  tried  to  provide 
enough  subdivisions  but  not  too  many. . . In  this  respect  the  16th  edition 
varies  distinctly  from  earlier  editions . . . Edition  14  has  31,364  separate 
entries  in  the  Tables  . . . While  edition  16  has  17,929, 

“There  are  in  this  edition  1,603  relocations.  Of  these  832  are  total,  mean- 
ing that  the  entire  number  has  been  ^dropped’.”  ‘ 

On  P 27  the  Editor's  Introduction  is  signed  “Benjamin  A Kuster/Editor.*' 
Thus,  there  is  no  doubt  that  there  is  a considerable  alteration  in  ed  16.  About 
10  per  cent  of  the  classes  have  been  relocated.  The  number  of  classes  has 
been  nearly  halved.  This  has  certainly  involved  a good  deal  of  judgment. 
Surely  no  responsibility  for  this  can  go  to  the  original  author  Melvil  Dewey 
who  died  two  decades  earlier.  The  responsibility  can  only  rest  with  the 
editor  Kuster.  But  Kuster  has  not  allowed  his  name  to  be  printed  even  in 
the  Collaborator  Statement  in  the  title-page. 

194 


author’s  name  merged  . GE2 

The  only  hint  that  somebody  other  than  the  original  author  has  played  a 
a large  part  in  Ed  16  is  to  be  found  in  the  Author-Statement.  In  that  state- 
m^t  we  find  '^Devised  by  Melvil  Dewey.*’ 

Ailbther  peculiarity  is  that  there  is  no  mention  either  in  the  Foreword  or 
in  the  Editor’s  Introduction  of  the  policy  decision  to  merge  the  original 
author’s  name  in  the  title,  though  it  is  found  to  be  merged  in  the  title-page. 

Example  14: 

Rider’s/Intemational/Ciassification/for  the  arrangement  of  books/on  the 
shelves  of  general  libraries/By  Fremont  Rider/Librarian  Emeritus,  Olin 
Memorial  Library,/Wesleyan  University/Preliminary  Edition/Printed  as 
manuscript  for  the  receipt  of  corrections,  amendations  and  amplifications./The 
Author/Middletown,  Conn./1961. 

This  example  is  of  a different  kind.  The  author’s  name  is  merged  in  the 
title  by  the  author  himself,  in  addition  to  his  name  appearing  in  the  ’Author- 
Statement’  in  the  title-page. 

Example  221: 

James  Duff  Brown’s/Manual/of/Library  Economy/  Seventh  Edition/ 
Completely  rewritten/By/R  Northwood  Lock  F L A/Grafton  & Co/London/ 
1961. 

Unlike  in  example  231  the  title-page  indicates  Lock’s  role  as  a reviser  of 
Brown’s  work. 

Example  222: 

Thomson’s  Outlines/of/Zoology/Revised  by/ James  Ritchie,  M.A.,  D.Sc. 
Ninth  'Edition/Geoffrey  Cumbcrlege/Oxford  University  Press/London  New 
York  Toronto. 

Extract: 

“The  present  edition,  the  first  to  appear  since  the  death  of  Sir  J Arthur 
Thomson,  has  been  carefully  revised,  and  apart  from  amendations,  rearrange- 
ments and  additions  suggested  by  advancing  knowledge,  takes  more  cogni- 
zance of  fossil  forms,  without  which  a just  survey  of  animal  progress  is 
impossible.  The  short  section  on  tissue  structure  has  been  expanded  and 
illustrated,  and  I have  made  close  upon  a hundred  new  figures  to  supplement 
the  text  and  to  replace  diagrams  less  suitable,  particularly  in  connection 
with  animals  custonfhrily  examined  in  first  courses  ...” 

Ed  8 1929;  Ed  9 1944. 

In  this  case  probably  the  change  introduced  is  not  sufficient  to  justify 
regarding  Ritchie  as  the  author  instead  of  Thomson. 

Example  231; 

James  Duff  Btown/Manual  of/Library  Economy/Sixth  Edition/By/W.  C. 
Berwick  Sayers/Lecturer  in  Public  Library  Administration  in/The  University 
of  London  School/of  Librarianship/lUustrated/London/Grafton  & Co.,/1949. 

195 


GE2  CLASSIFIED  CATALOGUE  CODE 

In  this  case,  it  is  not  merely  the  family  name  *‘Brown**  that  is  mei^gedin  the 
title,  but  the  full  name  including  the  words  forming  the  personal  name.  This 
may  tempt  one  to  treat  Brown  as  the  Author  of  the  work,  thou|^  his  name 
does  not  occur  in  the  Author-Statement.  But  this  would  be  a violat^n  of 
the  Canon  of  Asoertainability.  This  view  has  a further  support  in  Ed  7 as 
example.  There  what  is  merged  is  not  the  word  group  ^"James  Duff  Brown,** 
but  “James  Duff  Brown’s.” 

While  Lock  states  in  the  title-page  of  ed  7 that  he  has  “completely  re- 
written” the  work,  Sayers  does  not  say  whether  he  is  a reviser  or  editor.  His 
name  just  occurs  in  the  Author  Statement  on  the  title-page.  This  definitely 
implies,  according  to  the  Canon  of  Asoertainability,  that  he  should  be  taken 
as  the  author  of  the  work  contained  in  ed  6.  This  gains  support  in  the 
following  words  occurring  in  the  preface:  “Hardly  a page  of  Brown’s  now 
remains,  but  the  book  was  his  and  his  name  will  always  be  associated  with 
it.”  This  statement  is  delightedly  vague  in  respect  of  the  conflict  of  author- 
ship. Perhaps  this  is  sufficient  ground  to  infer  that  the  intention  is  that 
Brown  should  not  be  taken  as  the  author  of  the  work  contained  in  ed  6. 

There  is,  however,  something  in  usage  which  may  shake  a cataloguer  from 
the  straight  path  laid  down  by  the  Canon  of  Ascertainability.  For,  in 
common  usage  the  book  is  referred  to  as  “Brown  and  Sayers.” 

Example  232.* 

Archbold’s/Pleading,  Evidence  and  Practice/in/Criminal  Cases/Thirty- 
third  Edition/By/T  R Fitzwalter  Butler/of  the  Inner  Temple  and  Midland 
Circuit, /Barrister-at-Law,  Recorder  of  Neward/and/Marston  Grasia/of  the 
Middle  Temple  and  South  Eastern  Circuit,/Barrister-at-Law/London/Swect 
and  Maxwell  Limited/2  & 3 Chancery  Lane  W C 2/1954. 

Extract  from  the  Preface: 

“The  32nd  edition  had  to  incorporate  the  then  very  recent  and  far-reaching 
changes  introduced  into  the  administration  of  criminal  law  by  the  passing 
of  the  Criminal  Justice  Act,  1948,  and  the  adaptation  of  the  book  so  as  to 
include  these  manifold  new  developments  was  at  that  time  the  chief  concern 
of  the  editors . . . has  necessitated  alterations  great  in  number  and  occasionally 
of  importance  in  substance.” 

Information  about  previous  editions: 

Ed  1 1822  by  J.  F.  Aichbold;  Ed  6 1835  by  John  Jervis;  Ed  9 1846  by  W.  N. 
Welsby;  Ed  16  Ed  16  1867  by  W.  Bruce;  Ed  22  1900  by AV.  F.  Craies  and  G. 
Stephenson;  Ed  31  1943  by  T R F Butler  and  M Grasia. 

In  this  case  more  than  a century  has  passed  since  Archbold  wrote  his  book. 
It  is  still  Archbold  only  in  the  Irish  sense — of  the  table  knife  in  the  family 
being  still  the  same  which  has  been  used  continuously  for  five  hundred  years, 
each  year  one  and  only  one  part  being  renewed — handle  in  one  year,  blade  in 
another  and  so  on.  The  pattern  of  the  book  might  have  been  continued  but 
the  thought-content  should  have  become  totally  different.  In  this  case  it  is 
probably  more  appropriate  to  take  the  word  Aichbold  as  the  first  word  of 

196 


Airmon’s  NAME  MERGED  GE2 

the  title,  instead  of  promotiiig  it  to  the  Heading,  and  some  other  apprc»i>iate 
person  as  the  atidior.  However,  the  book  is  likely  to  be  soti^t  under  the 
word  ‘Archbold.*  This  situation  is  met  by  the  book  getting  a title  aitiy 
as  a ^psult  of  its  being  a Proper  Name  Title  (See  Sec  FB  93). 

Exanufle  233: 

Seat’s  List/of  Subject  Headings/Seventh  Edition/By/Bcrtha  Margaret 
Frick/Associate  Professor,  School  of  Library  Service,  Columbia  University/ 
With  Practical  Suggestions  for  the  Beginner/in  Subject  Heading  Work,/by 
Minnie  Earl  Sears/New  York/The  H W Wilson  Company/1950. 

Extract  from  the  Preface: 

‘Tn  recognition  of  Miss  Sear’s  pioneer  and  fundamental  contributions, 
in  the  sixth  edition  the  title  was  changed  into  ‘Sear's  List  of  Subject  Head- 
ings*, the  name  by  which  it  is  usually  cited.  . . . New  subjects  for  this  edition 
have  been  gathered . . . Many  references  have  been  added  for  these  new 
subjects  as  well  as  for  those  already  in  the  List,  when  it  seemed  desirable. 
On  the  other  hand,  some  of  the  outmoded  references  have  been  removed 
. . . Some  subjects  have  been  changed  to  agree  with  changes  made  in  the 
Congress  Libraiy  headings.” 

In  this  case  Frick,  responsible  for  the  seventh  edition,  does  not  even 
designate  herself  as  a reviser  or  editor.  Her  name  appears  in  the  Author- 
Statement  and  not  in  the  Collaborator  Statement  in  the  title-page.  But  the 
content  of  the  book  does  not  diifer  from  the  last  edition,  which  Sears  herself 
brought  out  sufficiently  to  deny  to  Sear’s  name  the  right  of  becoming  the 
heading. 

Example  32: 

Mellor’s  Modcrn/Inorganic  Chemistry//?ev/5ed  and  Edited  bylG,  D. 
Parkes,  M.A.,  D.Phil.,/FelIow  of  Keble  Collegc/Oxford/in  collaboration 
with/J,  W.  Mellor,  D.Sc.lWith  diagrams  and  illustrationsIhongpadLm^  Green 
and  co./London.  New  York,  Toronto/(1939). 

Preface: 

“This  new  edition  of  Mellor's  Modern  inorganic  chemistry  embodies  exten- 
sive changes  in  comparison  with  the  previous  editions.  . . . Mellor's  Modern 
inorganic  chemistry  was  first  published  in  1912  and  very  quickly  achieved 
widespread  popularity  in  many  parts  of  the  world.  It  had  run  to  eight 
editions . . . when  it*  became  clear  that  in  preparing  a further  edition  and 
time  had  come  for  a drastic  revision  and  re-arrangement  of  its  contents. 
The  present  volume  is  the  consequence.  By  the  time  that  this  decision 
had  been  made,  Dr  Mellor  was,  unfortunately,  in  failing  health,  and  this  in 
conjunction  with  his  numerous  commitments  made  it  necessary  for  the  work 
of  revision  to  be  undertaken  jointly.  Although  Dr  Mellor  passed  away 
before  it  could  be  published,  he  had  given  a final  revision  to  the  whole  of  the 
joint  work  in  manuscript  form;  so  that  the  new  edition  is  now  issued  with 
the  confidence  that  it  has  his  full  authority.” 


197 


OE2  CLASSDPIED  CATALOGUE  CODE 

In  this  case,  O D Parkes,  the  editor  has  collaborated  with  Mellor*  tibe 
original  author  of  the  work.  The  name  of  the  editor  and  that  of  the  original 
author  are  given  in  the  Collaborator  Statement. 

This  is  an  unusual  case.  Virtually  during  the  very  life-time  of  the  ^.thor 
his  name  loses  its  place  in  the  Author  Statement  and  occupies  only  a secondary 
position  even  in  the  CoUaborator  Statement.  But  to  signify  that  the  book 
was  that  of  Mellor,  his  name  has  been  fused  with  the  very  title  of  the  book  as 
its  very  first  word.  Thus  those  who  look  for  it  under  the  name  Mellor  in 
the  catalogue  will  not  miss  it.  For,  the  new  title  is  a Proper  Name  Title. 
As  such  it  will  have  a Proper  Name  entiy. 

Example  33; 

May’s  Chemistry/of  synthetic  Drugs/Fifth  tdxXionj Revised  and  rewritten 
by/G.  Malcolm  Dyson/M.  A.  (Oxon),  R.Sc.  (London)  F.R.I.C.,  M.I.  Chem. 
E.F.I.S./i/i  consultation  with  Percy  May/D.Sc.  (London),  F.R.I.C.,  C.P.A. 
(Longmans)./( 1 959). 

Preface: 

“The  fifth  edition  of  this  work  has  very  drastic  rewriting  of  all  sections. 
The  enormous  growth  of  the  subject  since  the  publication  of  the  fourth 
edition  in  1939  has  made  the  sub-division  into  chapters  according  to  chemical 
classification  unworkable.  The  broadening  of  the  number  of  organic  chemical 
types  showing  specific  therapeutic  action  has  been  so  great  that  any  attempt 
to  preserve  the  original  chemical  subdivisions  would  involve  much  overlap- 
ping of  chapters.  We  have  therefore  redistributed  the  material  according  to 
the  main  biological  activity  of  the  drugs,  except  for  a part  of  the  field  of 
chemotherapy  where  the  retention  of  special  sections  devoted  to  the  considera- 
tion of  general  antiseptic,  dyestuff,  sulphonamides  and  organo-metallic 
compounds  assist  in  clarifying  the  subject  matter.” 

The  fact  that  the  preface  is  signed  by  both  Dyson  and  May,  confirm  that 
the  fifth  edition  is  a joint  product.  However,  the  title-page  mentions  May  as  a 
consultant  to  Editor  Dyson.  In  this  case  May  is  further  removed  from 
the  author’s  position  than  Mellor  in  the  previous  example.  For,  Mellor 
was  at  least  a co-editor  whereas  May  is  only  consultant  to  the  editor. 

Example  43; 

Garrison  and  Morton’s/Medical  Bibliography/An  Annotated  Check-list 
of  Texts/Illustrating  the  History  of  Medicine/By/Leslie  T Morton/Informa- 
tion Officer,  British  Medical  Journal  ;/FormerIy  LibArian,/St.  Thomas’s 
Hospital/Medical  School/Sccond  Edition/London/Andre  Deutsch/A  Grafton 
Book/1961. 

Extract  from  the  Introduction  to  Ed  2: 

“The  publication  of  a second  edition  of  this  bibliography  has  provided 
opportunity  to  close  some  gaps  and  to  bring  the  book  into  line  with  recent 
discoveries  in  medicine.  Several  sections  have  been  considerably  expanded 
and  the  whole  work  has  been  completely  overhauled,  although  no  attempt 

198 


author’s  name  merged  * GE2 

has  been  made  to  come  close  to  the  present  in  all  subjects.  About  1»400 
entries  have  added  and  a few  removed.  The  total  nun^  of  items  (6,908) 
includes  some  3,800  from  Garrison’s  original  Check  LisC* 

l^cltract  from  the  Introduction  to  Ed  I 

**To  Sir  William  Osier  belongs  the  credit  of  first  suggesting  such  a wm'k 
as  this.  The  late  Fielding  H Garrison  carried  his  suggestion  into  effect, 
and  the  list  compiled  by  him  appeared  in  the  Index^Catalogue  of  the  Library 
of  the  SurgeonrGenerals  Office^  Washington,  1912,  2nd  Series,  xvii,  89-178. 
Garrison  himself  wrote  that  he  used  the  list  “as  convenient  scaffolding  for 
a book  on  the  history  of  medicine  . . . Later  Garrison  revised  the  list  and 
republished  it  in  the  Bulletin  of  the  Institute  of  the  History  of  Medicine^ 
Baltimore,  1933;  i,  333-434,  entitling  it,  A Revised  Students*  Check-List 
of  Texts  Illustrating  the  History  of  Medicine,”  and  it  is  this  later  Check- 
List  which  forms  the  basis  of  the  present  work.  Much  has  been  added  and 
a little  deleted.  The  Check-List  1933  contained  4,186  entries,  of  which 
3,826  have  been  retained,  and  to  which  1,680  new  entries  have  been  added. 

. . . Many  sections  have  been  expanded,  and  modem  representative  works 
have  been  added  in  most  sections.” 

In  the  title-page  of  ed  1 of  the  work,  the  name  of  Morton  occurs  in  the 
Collaborator  Statement,  as  a reviser.  But  in  ed  2 his  name  occurs  in  the 
Author-Statement  of  the  title-page. 

Example  52: 

Blakiston'sfScw  Gould/Medical  Dictionary//4  modern  comprehensive 
dictionary  of  the  terms  used  in/all  branches  of  medicine  and  allied  sciences, 
including/we<f/cu/  physics  and  chemistry^  dentistry  ^ pharmacy  I nursing,  veterinary 
medicine,  zoology  and  botany,  as  welljas  medico — legal  terms  with  illustrations 
and  /flWej/Editors/Harold  Wellington  Jones,  M.  D./Normand  L Hoerr, 
M.  D./Arthur  Osol,  Ph.D/with  the  co-operation  of  an  Editorial  Board/and 
80  contributors/252  illustrations  on  45  plates,  129  in  color/First  Edition/The 
Blakiston  Company/Philadelphia.  Toronto/ 1951. 

Preface: 

Blakiston' s New  Gould  Medical  Dictionary  is  a completely  new  reference 
work.  Based  upon  Gould^s  Medical  Dictionary,  which  through  many  editions 
since  1890  has  carried  on  the  tradition  of  scholarship  laid  down  by  the  first 
editor,  this  new  werk  reflects,  much  more  accurately  and  thoroughly  than 
could  a mere  revision,  the  advances  of  recent  years  in  the  various  fields  of 
medicine  and  the  allied  sciences.  The  Editors  were  convinced  that  even  the 
most  judicious  modernization  of  older  material  would  prove  inadequate 
to  the  need.  They  therefore  undertook  the  preparation  of  an  entirely  new 
work — a task  which  they  approached  with  full  realization  of  its  difficulty 
and  one  which  they  now  complete  with  an  enhanced  realisation  of  the  problems 
and  complexities  of  modem  lexicography.” 

The  progressive  changes  in  the  title  of  this  work  are  worth  recording. 

199 


GE2  CLASSIFIED  CATALOGUE  CODE 

What  is  more,  with  every  change  in  title,  edition  numbering  is  restarted  with 
one.  Here  is  the  table  of  information: 


Title 

Year 

EdN 

New  Medical  Dictionary 

Illustrated  Dictionary  of  Medicine,  Biology,  and  Allied 

1890 

^ 

1 

Sciences 

1894 

1 

Dictionary  of  Medical  Terms 

1904 

1 

Gould's  Medical  Dictionary 

1926 

1 

1928 

2 

1931 

3 

1935 

4 

1941 

5 

Blakiston's  New  Gould  Medical  Dictionary 

/1949 

1 

11956 

2 

(current) 

3 Variety  of  Practices 


The  above  examples  indicate  the  possibility  of  the  following  varieties  of 
practices: 


Original  Author's  Name 
in  the  title-page 

Collaborator's  Name 
given  in  the  title-page 
in  the  place  of 

See  Example 
N given  in 
Sec  2 

(1) 

(2) 

(3) 

1 Merged  in  the  title  and  also  re- 
tained in  the  place  of  the  Author’s 
name 

1 1 (Omitted  altogether) 

12  Collaborator’s  Name 

13  Author’s  Name 

14  (No  Collaborator) 

11 

14 

2 Merged  in  the  title,  but  not  re- 
tained in  the  place  of  the  Author’s 
Name 

21  (Omitted  altogether) 

22  Collaborator’s  Name 

23  Author’s  Name 

221;  222 
231;  232; 
233 

3 Merged  in  the  title,  not  retained 
in  the  place  of  Author’s  Name,  but 
mentioned  in  the  Collaborator 
Statement 

31  (Omitted  altogether) 

32  Collaborator’s  Name 

33  Author’s  Name 

32;  33 

4 Merged  in  the  title  along  with 
Collaborator’s  Name 

41  (Omitted  altogether) 

42  Collaborator’s  Name 

43  Author’s  Name 

43 

5 Merged  in  the  title  but  occulted 
by  the  first  word  of  the  title  being 
that  of  the  publisher 

51  (Omitted  altogether) 

52  Collaborator’s  Name 

53  Author’s  Name 

52 

No  doubt  no  example  has  been  given  for  12,  13,  21,  31,  33,  41,  42,  51,  and 
53.  But  examples  may  be  forthcoming,  if  they  do  not  already  exist. 


author’s  name  merged  GE5 

4 The  Conflict 

Whose  name  are  we  to  use  as  the  heading  of  the  Main  Entry  in 
suclRcases  ? That  is  the  conflict.  At  a deeper  level,  this  question 
implies  another,  namely,  who  is  the  author  of  the  successive 
editions  of  the  work  ? 

The  person  who  easily  has  the  knowledge  to  resolve  the  conflict 
is  the  one  who  brings  out  the  later  editions.  Even  the  decision 
by  him  is  subject  to  common  human  frailties  affecting  him.  He 
may  be  too  sentimental  and  either  give  the  name  of  the  originai 
author  as  The  Author  in  the  title  page  and  give  his  own  name  only 
as  a collaborator,  or  he  may  even  omit  his  name  altogether  from 
the  title-page,  even  when  more  than  half  of  the  work  embodied  in 
the  new  edition  is  different  from  the  work  of  the  original  edition. 

At  the  other  extreme,  an  egotistic  editor  of  a new  edition  may 
omit  the  name  of  the  original  author  and  insert  his  own  name  as 
the  author  even  though  the  change  in  the  work  embodied  in  the 
new  edition  is  much  less  than  half  of  the  original  work.  The 
merging  of  the  name  of  the  original  author  in  the  title  may  be  due 
to  one  of  three  causes: 

1 It  may  be  in  recognition  that  the  frame  work  designed  by 
the  original  author  continues  to  be  valid  though  the  details  need 
change  from  time  to  time. 

2 It  may  be  out  of  deference  to  the  memory  of  the  original 
author. 

3 It  may  be  as  a means  of  having  the  benefit  of  the  goodwill 
established  for  the  work  by  the  original  author. 

5 Follow  the  Canon  of  Ascertainability 

The  safest  course  to  determine  the  choice  of  the  heading  is  to 
rely  on  the  Canoq  of  Ascertainability — ^that  is,  by  what  is  indicated 
in  the  title-page,  rather  than  sit  in  judgement  over  what  is  given  in 
the  title-page. 


201 


GE6  CLASSIFIED  CATALOGUE  CODE 

6 Hie  Result 


The  result  of  so  relying  on  the  Canon  of  Ascertainability  will  be  as  follows: 


Exanq>le  N as 

Heading  to  be  chosen  ^ 

^iven  in  Sec  2 

9 

11 

Dewey  (Melvil) 

14 

Rider  (Fremont) 

221 

Lock  (R  Northwood),  Rev, 

222 

Ritichie  (James),  Rev. 

231 

Sayers  (William  C Berwick) 

232 

Butler  (T  R Fitzwalter) 

233 

Frick  (Bertha  Margaret) 

32 

Parkes  (G  D)  and  Mellor  (J  W),  Ed, 

33 

Dyson  (G  Malcolm),  Ed, 

43 

Morton  (Leslie  T) 

52 

Jones  (Harold  Wellington)  etc,  Ed, 

7 A Suggestion 

Even  if  the  Canon  of  Ascertainability  is  adhered  to,  this  class  of  books 
would  baffle  the  Canon  of  Consistency.  Perhaps  this  stage  of  uncertainty 
is  neither  necessary  nor  unavoidable.  The  Entry  Statements  for  Author 
and  the  Collaborator  to  be  given  at  the  back  of  the  title  can  be  used  by  the 
person  responsible  for  an  edition  to  indicate  clearly  what  the  intention  is. 
If  the  name  of  the  original  author  should  go  only  with  the  title,  his  name 
should  not  be  mentioned  on  the  back  of  the  title-page.  Further,  the  role  of 
the  person  responsible  for  the  edition  should  be  definitely  described  on  the 
back  of  the  title-page.  The  Standards  Organisations  in  different  countries 
and  the  International  Standards  Organisation  should  strive  to  bring  such  a 
standard  into  vogue. 


202 


NAME 


PART  H 

OF  PERSON 


CHAPTER  HA 


% 

INTRODUCTION 

Examples  will  be  found  in  Chap  JA,  Part  4 and  in  the  later  Sec  of 

this  Chap, 

0  Places  of  Occurrence 

A Name-of-Person  occurs  in  most  of  the  entries  of  a library  catalogue. 
It  occurs  in  the  Headings  of  entries.  It  also  occurs  in  their  Title-Sections. 
In  a Heading  it  may  occur  as  the  name  of  an  Author,  or  of  a Collaborator  of 
one  kind  or  another,  or  of  a person  forming  the  subject  of  study,  or  of  a 
person  whose  name  forms  the  title  of  a document.  It  may  occur  in  a Title- 
Section  in  any  of  the  above  ways  except  as  name  of  author.  The  variety  of 
ways  in  which  a Name-of-Person  can  occur  increases  the  frcQuency  of  its 
occurrence  in  entries.  A Catalogue  Code  has,  therefore,  to  pay  special 
attention  to  a Name-of-Person.  Its  features  creating  problems  in  cataloguing 
are: 

1 The  number  of  words  in  it; 

2 Their  grammatical  nature; 

3 Their  functions; 

4 Their  sequence; 

5 Their  relative  potency;  and 

6 The  complexities  in  their  structure. 

1 Number  of  Words 

In  the  far-off  days,  the  number  of  persons  writing  books  was  small.  Forma- 
tion of  homonym  among  names  of  authors  was  not  frequent.  Therefore 
the  name  of  an  author  often  consisted  of  one  word  only<~such  as,  Valmiki, 
Homer,  and  Kalidasa.  However,  the  increase  in  the  number  of  persons 
writing  and  written  upon  has  led  to  many-worded  Names-of-Persons.  Apart 
from  the  need  to  have  an  extra  word  to  resolve  homonym,  additional  words 
began  to  cumulate  for  one  reason  or  other.  In  Names-of-Persons  of  Arabic 
origin  or  influence,  <we  come  across  the  largest  number  of  words.  Is  the 
cataloguer  to  retain  all  these  words  in  the  Headings  in  full  ? Can  any  of 
the  words  be  removed  ? Can  any  of  the  words  be  abbreviated  ? Such 
questions  arise  today.  An  author  himself  reduces  some  of  the  words  in  his 
name  to  their  initial  letters.  Is  the  cataloguer  to  retain  them  as  they  are  ? 
Or,  is  he  to  expand  them  to  their  full  names  ? 

2 Nature  of  the  Words 

The  essential  words  in  a Name-of-Person  are  Proper  Nouns.  Some 

205 


HA2  CLASSIFIED  CATALOGUE  CODE 

Naioes-of-Fersoiis  indude  also  common  nouns  and  auxiliary  words,  such  as 
artide,  prq)osidon,  and  adjective.  When  the  language  of  a Name-of-Person 
is  quite  foreign  to  the  cataloguer,  it  may  be  difficult  for  him  to  recognise  the 
the  nature  of  the  Words.  Modem  intercourse  among  nations  bring^  into  a 
library  books  published  in  diverse  languages.  It  will  be  difficult  for  any 
cataloguer  to  know  all  the  languages.  This  causes  a difficulty.  Can  the 
Catalogue  Code  provide  any  aid  in  this  matter  ? 

3 Functloiis  of  the  Words 

Some  help  can  be  formulated  as  we  consider  the  functions  of  the  words  in 
a Name-of-Person.  The  Proper  Nouns  are  irremovable. 

31  Proper  Noun 

Some  of  the  Proper  Nouns  denote  the  Given  Name  of  the  person.  These 
words  are  essential  in  the  Name.  One  or  two  of  the  words  may  denote  the 
Family  Name.  It  occurs  in  some  cultural  groups;  and  it  does  not  occur  in 
others. 


32  Common  Noun 

Common  Nouns  may  or  may  not  occur  in  a Name-of-Person.  If  they  do, 
tbesy  may  denote  some  attributes  of  the  person  such  as  academic,  civic,  military, 
ritualistic,  or  other  distinction,  or  the  profession  of  the  person  or  some  or  his 
dominant  ancestors.  They  may  also  denote  denomination  by  caste,  creed, 
or  religion.  Some  may  be  terms  of  respect.  Most  of  these  are  removable. 
Some  are  irremovable  attachments  to  the  proper  nouns  in  certain  cultural 
groups.  Can  the  Catalogue  Code  help  the  cataloguer  of  a foreign  culture  to 
distinguish  between  the  removable  and  the  irremovable  common  nouns  ? 

33  Auxiliary  Word 

The  auxiliary  words  are  peculiar  to  certain  cultural  groups  only.  They 
occur  between  the  Given  Name  and  the  Family  Name.  They  are  deemed 
irremovable. 


4 Sequence  of  the  Words 

Every  conceivable  sequence  is  found  in  a Name-of-Person  among  the 
Given  Name,  the  Family  Name,  and  the  common  nouns,  and  the  auxiliary 
words. 


41  Position  of  Common  Noun 

The  common  nouns  may  lie  at  the  very  beginning,  or  at  the  end,  or  any- 
where in  the  middle  as  in  Buddhistic  or  Viet-Namese  Names-of-Persons. 
They  cannot,  therefore,  be  spotted  out  in  every  case  by  their  position,  and 
removed. 


206 


iNTR<M>ucrnoN  HA53 

42  Family  Name  at  the  end 

In  a Name-of-Pterson  of  European,  Japanese,  Marathi,  Gujarathi,  Sindhi, 
Kashmiri,  Bengali,  Oriya,  and  Assamese  cultural  groups,  the  Family  Name 
occurs^Lst;  and  the  Given  Name  precedes  it  Of  the  words  forming  the 
Given-Name  the  one  specific  to  the  individual  usually  comes  first;  and  those 
of  father,  godfather,  or  patron  may  come  thereafter  in  European,  Marathi, 
and  Gujarathi  Names. 

43  Family  Name  at  the  Beginning 

In  a Name-of-Person  of  Chinese,  Viet-Namese,  Malayalam,  Kannada, 
and  Telugu  cultural  groups,  the  Family  Name  comes  first  and  the  words  of 
the  Given  Name  come  thereafter. 

44  Given  Name  the  Last  Proper  Noun 

In  a Name-of-Person  of  Tamil,  Malayalam,  Kannada,  Telugu  and  Viet- 
Namese  cultural  groups,  the  last  proper  noun  is  usually  the  Name  specific 
to  the  individual. 


45  Tamil  Name 

In  Tamil  the  preceding  proper  nouns  may  be  the  names  of  father  and  place 
of  birth  or  place  of  ancestors. 

46  Burmese  and  Hindi  Names 

In  a Name-of-Person  of  the  Burmese  cultural  group  and  in  some  Names- 
of-Persons  of  the  Hindi  cultural  group,  the  Given  Name  alone  occurs  without 
any  other  proper  nouns. 

5 Potency  of  the  Words 

51  Common  Noun 

If  there  is  any  conunon  noun  in  a Name-of-Person,  which  is  an  irremovable 
attachment,  it  has  no  potency  as  a result  of  its  being  a common  noun.  It 
has  no  claim  to  become  the  Entry  Element. 

52  Proper  Noun 

Among  the  proper  nouns,  either  the  Family  Name,  or  the  word  in  the 
Given  Names  specific  to  the  individual,  may  have  greater  potency  than  the 
other. 


53  PoTEOT  Family  Name 

In  Western,  Japanese,  and  Chinese  names,  the  Family  Name  is  drawn  from 
a far  more  extensive  and  larger  group  of  words  than  the  Given  Name.  The 
group  of  the  former  runs  to  many  thousands,  while  the  group  of  the  latter 
does  not  have  more  than  a thousand  words  or  so.  Therefore,  in  a Name-of- 

207 


HAS3  CLASSIFIED  CATALOGUE  CODE 

Pmon  in  those  cultural  groups,  the  Family  Name  has  a greater  potency  than 
the  Given  Name.  It  has,  therefore,  a greater  right  than  the  Given  Name  to 
become  the  Entry  Element. 

54  Viet-Nam  ^ 

On  the  other  hand,  in  a Name-of-Person  of  the  Viet-Namese  culture,  th» 
Family  Name  has  to  be  only  one  out  of  about  two  hundred  words.  It  is, 
therefore,  not  usual  to  make  it  the  Entry  Element. 

55  Thailand 

In  Thai  culture,  the  Family  Name  was  brought  into  use  only  after  1916. 
Its  number  is  still  small.  It  is,  therefore,  not  usual  to  make  it  the  Entry 
Element. 

56  Bengal 

In  a Name-of-Person  of  Bengali  culture,  the  Family  Name  has  to  be  drawn 
from  a group  of  less  than  1000  words;  while  the  Given  Name  has  a very 
large  group  running  to  many  thousands  to  draw  from.  In  spite  of  this,  the 
English-educated  persons  prefer  to  give  the  Family  Name  the  status  of  Entry 
Element.  But  there  is  a section  of  opinion  in  Bengal  which  would  deny  it 
that  status. 

57  Potent  Given  Name 

Generally  speaking  in  Indian,  Burmese,  Ceylonese,  and  Islamic  cultural 
groups,  the  Given  Name  has  great  potency.  It  is  chosen  as  Entry  Element 
in  a Name-of-Person  in  Tamil,  Malayalam,  Kannada,  Telugu,  Burmese, 
Ceylonese  and  Islamic  cultural  groups. 

58  Names  for  Investigation 

The  relative  numerousness  of  the  reservoir  of  Family  Names  and  Given 
Names  in  the  Marathi,  Gujarathi,  Hindi,  Oriya,  and  Assamese  cultures 
needs  investigation,  to  see  if  the  status  of  Entry  Element  given  to  the  Family 
Name  satisfies  the  Canon  of  Prepotence. 

6 Complexities  of  Structure 
61  Compound  Name 

Compound  Family  Names  and  Given  Names  form  one  kind  of  complexity 
in  Names-of-Persons.  In  some  cases  the  components  are  linked  by  a hyphen 
or  by  a conjunction  or  by  some  other  auxiliary  word.  In  some  other  cases 
there  is  no  such  visible  indication  that  two  or  more  words  together  form 
a compound  Family  Name  or  a compound  Given  Name.  This  happens  in 
Names-of-Persons  in  Bengali,  Marathi,  Gujarathi,  Sinhalese,  and  the  Islamic 
cultural  groups  of  India  and  Pakistan.  Can  the  Catalogue  Code  give  aid  to 
foreign  catalogues  in  this  matte  ? 

• 

208 


INTRODUCTION  HA7 

62  Name  of  Married  Woman 

A Compound  Family  Name  among  the  Names  of  married  women  of  some 
of  the  European  cultural  groups  present  great  difficulty.  It  is  a compound 
of  the  Family  Names  of  the  Husband  and  the  Wife.  Their  sequence  varies. 
The  connecting  word  also  is  not  the  same.  Their  claim  to  the  status  of 
Entry  Element  cannot  be  determined  by  their  position  alone.  Can  the  Cata- 
logue Code  give  aid  to  foreign  cataloguers  in  this  matter  ? 

63  Auxiliary  Word 

The  auxiliary  word  between  Given  Name  and  Family  Name  in  European 
cultural  groups  gives  difficulty.  In  some  it  is  deemed  to  go  with  the  Family 
Name  and  in  some  others  with  the  Given  Name.  Here  again  can  the  Cata- 
logue Code  give  aid  to  foreign  cataloguers  ? 

64  Arabic  Name 

The  Names  based  on  Arabic  culture  present  peculiarities  of  their  own. 
These  will  become  clear  in  Chap  HF,  dealing  with  the  rendering  of  such 
names. 


7 Cultural  Impact 

• To  add  to  the  five  important  problem-cases  pointed  out  in  the  preceding 
sections  as  needing  special  aid  from  the  Catalogue  Code,  more  tantalising 
problems  are  created  as  a result  of  the  cultural  impact  between  different 
cultural  groups.  It  leads  to  imitation  as  well  as  counter-imitation.  The 
order  of  King  Rama  VI  of  Thailand  calling  for  the  adoption  of  Surnames  by 
all  his  people  and  arranging  to  confer  them  officially  was  a result  of  his  travel 
in  Europe.  But  in  spite  of  its  adoption,  the  surname  has  not  been  made  the 
Entry  Element.  In  Bengal,  there  is  conflict  between  Family  Names  and 
Given  Names  as  stated  in  Sec  HA5,  as  a result  of  British  contact.  In  Uttar- 
Pradesh  and  Punjab,  Family  Name  came  into  vogue  as  a result  of  British 
impact.  But  the  dropping  of  the  Family  Name  has  begun  in  more  recent 
years.  While  the  Muslims  of  India  and  Pakistan  do  not  generally  go  in 
for  Family  Name,  a few  do  so.  In  some  places,  but  not  in  all,  the  Christians 
imitate  the  West.  In  Indonesia,  the  father's  name  is  being  treated  as  if  it 
were  Family  Name,  just  during  the  present  generation.  This  vogue  may  or 
may  not  be  continued.  In  Bengal  and  Uttar-Pradesh,  and  to  a smaller  degree 
in  other  areas,  the  Given  Name,  which  is  a single  word,  is  broken  into  two 
parts  and  written  out  as  if  they  were  two  distinct  words, — Ganesh  Prasad 
instead  of  Ganeshprasad,  Prithvi  Nath  instead  of  Prithvinath,  Sankara 
Narayanan  instead  of  Sankaranarayanan,  and  Vidya  Bhushan  instead  of 
Vidyabhushan.  As  a result  of  British  contact,  some  contract  the  former  of 
these  two  parts  into  its  initial  letter  and  use  the  second  part  as  it  if  w6re  the 
true  name  by  itself.  In  the  name  of  Sir  C V Raman,  the  real  name  should 
be  C Venkataraman.  Some  abbreviate  all  the  proper  nouns  into  their  res- 

♦ 209 


14 


HA7  CLASSIHED  GATAJLOaUB  CWB 

pective  initial  tetters  and  retain  only  the  last  attached  common  noim  in  iaXL 
ASP  Ayyar  is  an  example.  It  should  be  A S Panchapakesa  Ayyar.  Ayyat 
is  a common  noun  attached  to  the  proper  noun. 

8 Towards  Aid 

The  terminology  introduced  and  the  procedure  laid  down  in  the  succeeding 
sections  of  this  chapter,  tak^  along  with  the  Rules  on  the  rendering  of 
Names^of-Persons,  form  a sample  of  one  way  in  which  a Catalogue  Code 
can  give  some  aid  to  foreign  cataloguers.  The  best  aid  can  come  only  by  the 
implementation  of  the  standard  for  Entry  Statement  for  Author  (See  Sec 
HG  5). 


210 


CHAFUER  HB 

♦ 

TERMINOLOGY  : SIMPLE  NAME 

1 Introdaetion 

In  tny  rqxnt  to  Unesco  on  Asian  Names  [RRl],  I developed  a certain 
tnminology  in  the  process  of  probing  into  the  structure  of  a Name^-Petson 
and  the  problem  of  rendering  it  in  the  Heading  of  an  Entry.  Perhaps  some 
of  these  terms  may  be  of  help  in  the  further  pursuit  of  diis  problem.  They 
are  therefore  given  here. 


2 Name-of-Penon 

2 Nunemf-Person. — ^Word  or  set  of  words  arranged  in  a 
definite  sequence  and  used  to  denote  a person. 

21  Name. — ^Name-of-Person. 

This  briefer  term  will  be  used  in  any  context  where  it  is  not  likely  to  denote 
any  entity  other  than  a person. 


3 Kinds  of  Word-Group 

31  Given  Name 

Word  or  word-group  usually  given  to  a person,  shortly  after 
birth,  as  the  individual’s  name,  by  the  parents  or  their  deputy. 
It  consists  of  proper  nouns.  It  is  ako  denoted  by  the  terms 
Christian  Name,  Personal  Name,  Forename,  and  First  Name. 

• 

The  last  two  terms  are  valid  only  in  Western,  Jt^anese,  Marathi,  Gujaratfai, 
and  Bmgali  Names.  In  Tamil,  Malayalam,  Kannada,  Telugu,  Sinhalese, 
Viet-Namese,  and  Indonesian  Names,  it  is  the  last  proper  noun.  In  Iffindi 
and  Punjabi  also,  it  may  be  the  last  proper  noun  in  some  cases.  But  it  may 
be  followed  by  a common  noun  (See  Sec  HB33).  In  Maradii,  Gujarathi, 
Kashmiri,  Puqjabi,  Hindi,  Assamese,  Bengali,  and  Chiya  names,  it  is  die 
first  inoper  noun.  But  it  may  be  preceded  by  a ccmunon  noun  or  other 
hottorifics.  (See  Sec  HB34). 


211 


HB32 


CtASaOIED  CATALOCtUE  «»}£ 

32  Family  Name 


32  FarnHy  Name. — Word  or  word-group  normally  inherited 
by  a person  as  denoting  the  name  of  his  family.  It  consi^s  of 
proper  noun(s).  It  is  also  denoted  by  the  terms  Surname  and 
Last  Name. 


The  last  term  is  valid  only  in  Western,  Japanese,  Marathi,  Gujarathi, 
Bengali,  and  Hindi  names.  In  Chinese,  Viet-Namese,  Malayalam,  Kannada, 
and  Telugu  names,  it  is  the  First  Name. 


33  Irremovable  Attachment 

33  Irremovable  Attachment. — A Word  or  word-group  made  of 
common  nouns  attached  after  the  Given  Name,  deemed  to  be  an 
Irremovable  Attachment  to  the  Given  Name,  and  always  taken 
along  with  it. 


It  is  difficult  for  a foreign  cataloguer  to  recognise  an  Irremovable  Attach- 
ment. Therefore,  the  next  Sec  provides  some  aid  in  this  respect. 


331  The  following  list  gives  some  of  the  oft-recurring  Irremov- 
able Attachments  in  names  of  Burmese,  Ceylonese,  Hindi, 
Kannada,  Malayalam,  Punjabi,  Telugu,  and  Tamil  cultural 
groups.  Similar  lists  should  be  prepared  for  other  cultural 
groups. 


Note: 

1 The  language  of  the  word  is  enclosed  in  brackets  in  most  cases. 

2 If  a word  may  occur  in  two  or  more  languages,  all  the  languages  are 
given  within. the  brackets. 

3 Variants  due  to  transliteration  are  listed  in  many  cases. 

4 In  Burmese,  the  liremovable  Attachment  occurs  as  a Prefix  and  in  all 
other  languages  as  a Suffix. 

5 In  Islamic  name,  the  Irremovable  Attachment  ^ay  be  a Prefix  or  a 
Suffix. 


Abhar  (Tamil) 
Achar  (Kannada) 
Acharaya  (Telugu) 
Acharayalu  (Telugu) 
Acharayalu  (Telugu) 
Achari  (Kannada) 
Achariar  (Tamil) 


Acharya  (Kannada/Tamil) 
Achchan  (Malayalam) 
Adigal  (Tamil) 

Agha  (Islamic) 

Agha  (Islamic) 

Aiya  (Tamil/Telugu) 
Aiyangar  (Tamil) 


212 


imMlNOLOGY:  SIMPLE  NAME 


HB331 


Aiyar  (Kaiinada/Malayalam/ 
Tamil) 

Aiyengar  (Kannada) 
Aiye]»(Kannada) 

Al^  (Kannada) 

Alwar  (Tamil) 

Amba  (Kannada/Tamil) 

Ambal  (Kannada) 

Ambalakkarar  (Tamil) 

Ambalavasi  (Tamil) 

Amma  (Kannada/Malayalam/ 
Tamil/Ccylon) 

Ammaiyar  (Tamil) 

Ammal  (Tamil) 

Ammanni  (Kannada) 

Anna  (Kannada/Tamil) 

Annavi  (Tamil) 

Annaiya»  Annaya  (Kannada) 
Anniah  (Kannada) 

Appa  (Kannada/Tamil) 

Appiah,  Appaiya,  Appaji,  Appana, 
Appaya  (Kannada) 

Appu  (Ceylon) 

Appusamy  (Ceylon) 

Aradbya  (Kannada) 

Arasu  (Kannada) 

Arya  (Kannada/Tamil) 

Aryan  (Kannada) 

Asan  (Malayalam/Tamil) 

Asari  (Tamil) 

Atiyodi  (Malayalam) 

Atreya  (Telugu) 

Avadhani  (Kannada/Tamil) 
Avadhaniar  (Tamil) 

Ayya  (Kannada) 

Ayyangar  (Kannada/Tamil) 

Ayyar  (Kannada/Tamil) 

Babu  (Tamil/Telugif) 

Bagavathar  (Tamil) 

Bai  (Kannada/Tamil) 

Banda  (Ceylon) 

Bandara  (Ceylon) 

Bayi  (Kannada) 

Bhadra  (Kannada) 

Bhadran  (Kannada) 

Bhar  (Hindi/Punjabi) 


Bharati  (Tamil) 

Bharatiar  (Tamil) 

Bhat  (Tamil) 

Bhatta  (Kannada) 

Bhatta  (Kannada/Tamil/ 
Telugu) 

Bhattachari  (Tamil) 
Bhattacharya  (Kannada) 
Bhattar  (Tamil) 

Bhattatiri  (Malayalam) 
Bhattatiripad  (Malayalam) 

Bhan  (Hindi/Punjabi) 

Bhupala  (Telugu) 

Bhusan,  Bhushana  (Kannada) 
Bhushan  (Hindi/Punjabi) 

Bihari  (Hindi/Punjabi)  » 
Bihari  Lai  (Hindi/Punjabi) 

Boyi  (Kannada) 

Chand  (Hindi/Punjabi) 

Chander  (Hindi/Punjabi) 

Char,  Chari,  Charya  (Kannada) 
Chauduri  (Telugu) 

CTietti  (Kannada/Tamil) 
Chettiyar  (Tamil) 

Chetty,  Chettiar  (Kannada) 

Das  (Kannada/Tamil) 

Dasa  (Kannada) 

Dasan  (Tamil) 

Dasappa  (Kannada) 

Dass  (Hindi/Punjabi) 

Dasu  (Tamil/Tclugu) 

Daw  (Burmese) 

Dayal  (Hindi/Punjabi) 

Deo  (Hindi/Punjabi) 

Desika  (Kannada) 

Desikan  (Tamil/Kannada) 
Desikar  (Tamil/Kannada) 

Dev  (Hindi/Kannada/Punjabi) 
Deva,  Devaru  (Kannada) 

Devi  (Tamil) 

Dhar 

Dikshit  (Kannada) 

Dikshitalu  (Telugu) 
Dikshitan(r)  (Tamil) 

Ditta  (Hindi/Punjabi) 

Dorai  (Tamil) 


213 


HB331 


CLASSIFIED  CATALO0UB  COSm 


Elayatu  (Malaya* 
lam) 

Embirandri  (Malayalam) 
Badiuthatchan  (Malayalam) 
Oiri  (Kannada) 

Gowd,  Gowda  (Kannada) 
Gownd,  Gownden,  Gownder 
(Kannada/Tanul) 

Gramani  (Tamil) 

Gupta  (Kannada) 

Gurukkal  (Malayalam) 

Haji  (Islamic) 

Hakim  (Islamic) 

Hami  (<>ylon) 

Hamina  (Ceylon) 

Hegde,  Heggade  (Kannada) 
lah  (Kannada) 
lya  (Kannada) 

Iyengar  (Kannada/Tamil) 
Iyer  (Kannada/Tamil) 

Jain 

Jatavallabhan(r)  (Tamil) 

Jetty  (Kannada) 

Jogi  (Kannada) 

Jois,  Joisa,  Joshi  (Kannada) 
Josi  (Tamil) 

Josiyar  (Tamil) 

Josyer  (Kannada) 

Jotidar  (Tamil) 

Kaimal  (Malayalam) 

Kamath  (Kannada) 

Kander  (Tamil) 

Karan  (Hindi/Punjabi) 
Karanth(a)  (Kannada) 
Karayalar  (Tamil) 

Kartha  (Malayalam) 

Kavi  (Telugu) 

Kavipjnan  (Tamil) 
Kavirayan(r)  (Tamil) 

Khau  (Islamic) 

Khwaja  (Islamic) 

Kirth  (Hindi/Punjabi) 

Kirthi  (Kannada) 

Kishen  (Hindi/Punjabi) 
Kishore  (Hindi/Punjabi) 
Kizhar  (Tamil) 

214 


KoCStmneae) 

Konan(r)  (Tamil) 

Kone  (Tamil) 

Kounder  (Tamil) 

Krishen  (Hindi/Punjabi) 
Kudumban  (Tamil) 

Kumar  (Hindi/Kannada/ 
Punjabi) 

Kumara  (Kannada) 

Kumari  (Hindi/Kannada/ Pun- 
jabi/Tamil) 

Kumarihami  (Ceylon) 
Kurukkal  (Malayalam) 

Kurup  ( Malayalam) 

Kutti  (Malayalam) 

Labbai  (Tamil) 

Lai  (Hindi/Punjabi) 

Lemaltani  (Ceylon) 

Linga,  Lingan,  Lingiah 
(Kannada) 

Mahavidwan  (Tamil) 

Maistri  (Tamil) 

Mai  (Hindi/Punjabi) 
Mandradiyar  (Tamil) 

Manigar  (Tamil) 
Manikkaran(r)  (Tamil) 
Mannadiyar  (Malayalam) 
Mappillai  (Malayalam) 
Marakkayar  (Tamil) 

Marar  (Malayalam) 

Maung  (Burmese) 

Melakaran  (Tamil) 

Menike  (Ceylon) 

Menon  (Malayala  m) 

Mian  (Islamic) 

Mirza  (Islamic) 

Mohan  (Hindi/Punjabi) 

Molvi  (Islamic)  • 

Moopan(ar)  (Tamil) 

Moorthi,  Moorthy,  Moorty 
(Kannada) 

Moosad  (Malayalam) 

Moulavi  (Islamic) 

Mudaliar  (Tamil) 

Mufti  (Islamic) 

Murthi  (Kannada/Tamil) 


immmiOQY:  $iMm  namb 


HB331 


Murtby  (Telugu) 

Marti  (Kannada) 

Miirty  (Kannada) 

Nadh^^  (TamiO 
Naicken  (Tamil) 

Naidu  (Tamil/Telugu) 

Naik  (Kannada) 

Nair  (Malayalam) 

Nambi  (Malayalam/Tami!) 
Nambisan  (Malayalam) 
Nambudri  (Malayalam) 
Nambudripad  (Malayalam) 
Namburi  (Malayalam) 

Nand  (Hindi/Punjabi) 
Nandan(r)  (Tamil) 

Narain  (Hindi/Punjabi) 

Nath  (Hindi/Kannada/Punjabi) 
Natha,  Nathan  (Kannada) 
Nattan(r)  (Tamil) 

Navalan(r)  (Tamil) 

Nawab  (Islamic) 

Nawabzada  (Islamic) 

Nayadu  (Tamil/Telugu) 

Nayak  (Kannada) 

Nayaka  (Kannada/Telugu) 
Nayakadu  (Telugu) 

Nayakan(r)  (Tamil) 

Nayaki  (Kannada/Tamil) 
Nayanar  (Tamil) 

Nayar  (Malayalam) 

Nedungadi  (Malayalam) 

Odeya  (Kannada) 

Odeyar  (Tamil) 

Othuvar  (Tamil) 

Padayachi  (Tamil) 

Pakir  (Tamil) 

Pal  (Hindi/Puiyabi) 

Pandaram  (Tamil)# 

Pandit  (Tamil) 

Pandithan(r)  (Tamil) 

Pandiyan  (Tamil) 

Pani  (Kannada) 

Panickar,  Panikker 
(Malayalam) 

Parkash  (Hindi/Punjabi) 
Parshad  (Hindi/Punjabi) 


Pathi,  Piathy*  Pati»  Paty 
(Kannada) 

Patrachari  (Tamil) 

Patrudu  (Telugu) 

Pattanayakan  (Tamil) 

Pattar  (Tamil) 

Pavalan(r)  (Tamil) 

Peer  (Islamic) 

Peerzada  (Islamic) 

Penimal  (Tamil) 

Pilla  (Malayalam) 

Pillai  (Tamil) 

Pishoroti  (Malayalam) 

Poduval  (Malayalam) 

Potthi  (Malayalam) 

Prabhu  (Tamil/Telugu) 

Prakash  (Hindi/Kannada/ 
Punjabi/Telugu) 

Prasada  (Kannada) 

Pujari  (Tamil) 

Pulavar  (Tamil) 

Pusari  (Tamil) 

Qarzi  (Islamic) 

Rai  (Hindi/Punjabi) 

Raj  (Hindi/Kannada/Punjabi) 
Raja  (Kannada/Malayalam/ 
Tamil) 

Rajan,  Rajiah  (Kannada) 

Raj  Kumar  (Hindi/Punjabi) 
Raju  (Kannada/Tamil/ 

Telugu) 

Ram  (Hindi/Punjabi) 

Rao  (Hindi/Kannada/Purjabi/ 
Tamil/Telugu) 

Rao  Naidu  (Telugu) 

Rasu  (Tamil) 

Ratnam,  Ratna  (Kannada) 
Rau  (Kannada/Tamil) 

Rauttar  (Tamil) 

Raya  (Kannada) 

Rayalu  (Telugu) 

Rayappa  (Kannada) 

Rayaru  (Kannada) 

Razu,  Razulu  (Telugu) 

Reddi  (Tamil/Telugu) 

Reddy  (Kannada/Taniil) 


215 


HB331  CIASHFIEO 

Roop  (Hindi/Tupiabi) 

Row  (Kannada/Tamil) 

Rowthar  (Tamil) 

Sa  (Tamil) 

Saheb  (Tamil) 

Saib  (Tamil) 

Saila,  Sailam  (Kannada) 

Sain  (Hindi/Punjabi) 

Sami  (Kannada)* 

Saran  (Hindi/Punjabi) 

Saraswati  (Tamil) 

Sardar  (Islamic) 

Sarma,  Sarman  (Kannada/ 
Malayalam/Tamil/Telugu) 

Samp  (Hindi/Punjabi) 

Sastri,  Sastrigal  (Kannada/Tamil/ 
Telugu) 

Sastrulu  ^elugu) 

Sastry  (Kannada) 

Sawmy  (Kannada) 

Saya  (Kannada) 

Sayab  (Tamil) 

Sayans  (Kannada) 

Sayed  (Islamic) 

Sekhar  (Kannada) 

Sen  (Hindi/Punjabi) 

Seniyan(r)  (Tamil) 

Servat  (Tamil) 

Setty,  Setti  (Kannada) 

Setupathi  (Tamil) 

Shafzada  (Islamic) 

Shaik  (Islamic) 

Sharma  (Kannada) 

Shastri,  Shastry  (Kannada) 

Shetti,  Sbetty  (Kannada) 

Sholiyan  (Tamil) 

Shyam 

Siddar  (Tamil) 

Simha  (Kannada) 

Singh  (Hindi/Kannada/ 
Punjabi/Tamil) 

Singho  (Ceylon) 

Siva  (Tamil) 


CATALOGUE  CODE 

Sivachariar  (Tamil) 

Sivan  (Tamil) 

Somayaji  (Kannada/Tamib 
Telugu) 

Srouthi  (Kannada) 

Sub  (Islamic) 

Sundar  (Hindi/Punjabi) 
Suri  (Kannada) 

Swam!  (Kannada/Tamil) 
Swamigal  (Tamil) 

Swamy  (Kannada) 

Swamp  (Hindi/Punjabi) 
Syed  (Islamic) 

Tambiran  (Tamil) 
Tamburan  (Malayalam) 
Tamburatti  (Malayalam) 
Tampan  (Malayalam) 
Tampi  (Malayalam) 
Tattachari  (Tamil) 

Thangal  (Malayalam) 
Thevan(r)  (Tamil) 
Tirumalpad  (Malayalam) 
Tooran  (Tamil) 

Turai  (Tamil) 

U (Burmese) 

Udayar  (Tamil) 

Unni  (Malayalam) 
Unnithan  (Malayalam) 
Vaidhyan(r)  (Malayalam) 
Vaithiyan  (Tamil) 
Vajapeyar  (Tamil) 

Vallal  (Tamil) 

Vandayar  (Tamil) 

Varma  (Malayalam) 

Varriar  (Malayalam) 
Vathiyar  (Tamil) 

Velan(r)  (Tamil) 

Vellalan  (Tamil)  « 

Velu  (Tamil) 

Warrior  (Malayalam) 
Wodeyar  (Kannada) 
Yalaydu  (Malayalam) 

Yogi  (Tamil) 


216 


l^tMINOLOGY:  SIMPUB  NAME 

34  Removable  Attachment 


HB34 


34  Removable  Attachment. — A word  or  word-group  made  of 
comfiion  nouns  or  adjectives,  attached  as  honorific  or  courtesy 
term  after  or  before  or  in  the  middle  of  a name,  deemed  removable, 
and  not  to  be  retained  in  the  Heading  of  an  Entry. 

341  The  following  list  gives  some  of  the  oft-recurring  Remov- 
able Attachment  in  names  of  Buddhistic,  Ceylonese,  Indian, 
Indonesian,  Malayan,  and  Viet-Namese  cultural  groups.  Similar 
lists  should  be  prepared  for  other  cultural  groups. 


Note: 

1 After  each  word  in  the  succeeding  table  of  Removable  Attachment, 
the  language  or  the  culture  of  occurrence  is  mentioned  within  brackets. 

2 It  is  also  mentioned  within  the  brackets  whether  it  will  occur  as  a 
prefix  or  as  a suffix  or  in  the  middle  of  the  name. 


Adigal,  Adigalar  (Tamil.  Suffix) 
Adigar  (Ceylon.  Suffix) 

Andavan  (Tamil.  Suffix) 

Andavar  (Tamil.  Suffix) 

Aratchi  (Ceylon.  Suffix) 
Ashtavadanam  (Tamil.  Prefix) 
Asukavi  (Tamil.  Prefix) 

Avar  (Kannada/Tamil.  Suffix) 
Avargal  (Tamil.  Suffix) 

Avaru  (Kannada/Tamil.  Suffix) 
Avarugal,  Avarugalu 
(Kannada.  Suffix) 

Ayurveda  Bhushanam  (Tamil. 
Prefix) 

Be  (Viet-Namese.  Middle) 

Baba  (Hindi/Punjabi.  Prefix) 
Bakshi  (Hindi/Punjabi.  Prefix) 
Basnayake  Nilame  (Ceylon  Suffix) 
Bawa  (Hindi/Punjabi.  Prefix) 
Bhagavatam  (Tamil.  Preffix) 

Bhai  (Hindi,  Punjabi.  Prefix) 

Bibi  (Punjabi.  Prefix) 

Brahma  Sri  (Tamil.  Prefix) 
Brahma  Sri  Pandit  (Tamil.  Prefix) 
Brahmesri  (Tamil.  Suffix) 
Brahmesrigal,  Brahmesrigalavaru 
(Kannada.  Suffix) 


Chaophya  (Thai.  Prefix) 

Che  (Malayan.  Prefix) 
Choudhury  (Hindi/Punjabi. 
Prefix) 

Chittirakavi  (Tamil.  Prefix) 

Dasu  (Tamil.  Prefix) 

Dato  (Malayalan.  Prefix) 

Dato  Nuda  (Malayan.  Prefix) 
Datoh  (Malayan.  Prefix) 

Datoh  Panglima  (Malayan. 
Prefix) 

Dekchai  (Thai.  Prefix) 

Dekying  (Thai.  Prefix), 

Dewan  (Hindi/Punjabi.  Prefix) 
Dinh  (Viet-Namese.  Middle) 
Diwan  Bahadur  (India.  Prefix) 
Diwan  Sahib  (India.  Prefix) 
Disave  (Ceylon.  Suffix) 
Diyawadana  Nilame  (Ceylon. 
Suffix) 

Due  (Viet-Namese,  Middle) 
Enche  (Malayan.  Prefix) 

Gal,  Galu,  Galavaru 
(Kannada.  Suffix) 
Gate-Mudaliyar  (Ceylon.  Prefix) 
Gate-Muhandiram  (Ceylon. 
Prefix) 


217 


CLASSIFIED  CATALOODE  CODS 


HBM 

Giani  (ifindi^iuabi  Px^fix) 

HiEdi  (Malayan.  Prefix) 

Hakim  (Tamil.  Prefix) 

Huu  (Viet-Natnese.  Middle) 

Inche  (Malayalan.  Prefix) 
Jagatguni  (Tamil.  Prefix) 
Jalaviddai  (Tamil.  Prefix) 

Jathidar  (Punjabi.  Prefix) 

Jatida  Bhushanam  (Tamil. 

Prefix) 

Kanwar  (Punjabi.  Prefix) 
Katikacarya  (Ceylon.  Title 
Prefix) 

Kaviraj  (India.  Prefix) 

Kaviraj  Pandithan  (Tamil. 

Prefix) 

Kaze  (Tamil.  Prefix) 

Khun  (Thai.  Prefix) 

Koon  (Thai.  Prefix) 

Koonnai  (Thai.  Prefix) 
Koonnylng  (Thai.  Prefix) 

Korale  Mahatmaya  (Ceylon. 
Suffix) 

Kumari  (India.  Prefix/Suffix) 

Lala  (Hindi/Punjabi.  Prefix) 
Lekam  (Ceylon.  Suffix) 

Lung  (Thai.  Prefix) 

Madhusri  (Tamil) 

Madura  (Indonesian.  Prefix) 
Madurakavi  (Tamil.  Prefix) 
Mahacarya  (Ceylon.  Title  Pi®fix) 
Maha  Mudaliyar  (Ceylon.  Prefix) 
Maharaj  (India.  Prefix/SufiSx) 
Maharshi  (India.  Suffix) 
Mabopadyaya  (Tamil.  Prefix) 
Makan  (Tamil.  Suffix) 

Malik  (Punjabi.  Prefix  and 
Suffix) 

Maniyagar  (Ceylon.  Suffix) 

Mas  (Indonesia.  Prefix) 

Master  (Hindi/PunJabi.  Prefix) 
Mian  (Hindi/Punjabi.  Prefix) 
Moulvi  (India.  Prefix) 

Mudaliyar  (Ceylon,  Prefix) 
Muhandiram  (Ceylon.  Prefix) 
Munivar  (Tamil,  Suffix) 

218 


Mim^  (India.  Suffix) 

Nai  (Thai.  Prefix) 

Nang  (Thai.  Prefix) 

Nangsao  (Thai.  Prefix)  ^ 
Nawab  (India.  Prefix) 
Nawabzada  (India.  Prefix) 
Nawabram  (Tamil.  Prefix) 
Nilame  (Ceylon.  Middle) 

Nu  (Viet-Namese.  Middle) 
Padikara  Mudaliyar  (Ceylon. 
Prefix) 

Padikara  Muhandiram  (Ceylon. 
Prefix) 

Padukasevakan  (Tamil.  Prefix) 
Pandit  (Hindi/Punjabi/Ceylon. 
Prefix) 

Pandita  (Ceylon.  Prefix) 
Panditacarya  (Ceylon.  Prefix) 
Panjangam  (Tamil.  Prefix) 
Paramahamsa  (Tamil.  Prefix) 
Paravastu  (Tamil.  Prefix) 

Phra  (Thai.  Prefix) 

Phya  (Thai.  Prefix) 

Prathivathi  bayankara  (Tamil. 
Prefix) 

Pujjya  Pandita  (Ceylon.  Prefix) 
Pulavar  (Tamil.  Prefix) 

Quf  (Viet-Namese,  Middle) 
Raden  (Indonesia.  Prefix) 
Raden  Aryo  (Indonesia.  Prefix) 
Raden  Mas  (Indonesia.  Prefix) 
Raden  Pandji  (Indonesia. 
Prefix) 

Rai  (Punjabi.  Prefix) 

Rai  Bahadur  (India.  Prefix) 

Rai  Sahib  (Hindi/Punjabi. 
Prefix) 

Raizada  (Punjabi . Prefix) 

Raja  (Malayan.  Prefix) 

Raja  Bahadur  (Tamil.  Prefix) 
Rajah  (India.  Prefix) 

Raja  Mrutyjaya  Nisanka 
Raj  Kumari  (India.  Prefix) 
Rana  (Hindi/Punjabi.  Pre^) 
Rao  Bahadur  (India.  Prefix) 
Rao  Sahib  (India.  Prefix) 


terminology:  simh.b  name 


HB35 


Rate  Mahatnaaya  (O^lon. 

Suffix) 

Ratnakum  (Tamil.  Prefix) 

Rishi  flPunuab.  Prefix) 

Ru  (fumnada/Tamil.  Suffix) 
Sadavatanam  (Tamil.  Prefix) 
Sadguru  (Tamil.  Prefix) 

Sahitya  Siromani  (India/Ceylon. 
Prefix) 

Sahitya  Visarada  (tndia/Ceylon. 
Prefix) 

Sami  (Tamil.  Suffix) 

Sannadigal  (Tamil.  Suffix) 

Sardar  (India.  Prefix) 

Sardar  Bahadur  (Punjab.  Prefix) 
Sardar  Sahib  (Punjab.  Prefix) 
Sastri  (Hindi/Punjabi.  Prefix) 
Sastracarya  (Ceylon.  Prefix) 

Sastra  Visarada  (India/Ceylon. 
Prefix) 

Seth  (Punjab.  Prefix) 

Si  (Viet-Namcse.  Middle) 
Sodasavatanam  (Tamil.  Prefix) 
Sodasavatani  (Tamil.  Prefix) 
Soetan  (Indonesia.  Prefix) 
Sowbhagyavati  (Tamil.  Suffix) 

Sri  (India/Ceylon.  Prefix. 

Suffix) 

Sridhasri  (Tamil.  Suffix) 

Sri-la-Sri  (Tamil.  Prefix) 

Sriman  (Tamil.  Prefix) 

Srimathi  (India.  Prefix) 
Srungarakavi  (Tamil.  Prefix) 
Sultan  (Malayan.  Prefix) 

Swami  (India.  Prefix) 


Swamigai  (Tamil.  Suffix) 

Syed  (Malayan.  Prefix) 

Thakur  (Hindi/Pucijabi.  Prefix) 
Thi  (Viet-Namese.  Middle) 
Tikka  (Punjabi.  Prefix) 

Tim  (Tamil.  Prefix) 
Timmathi(Tami].  Prefix) 
Timvalar  ffamil.  Prefix) 

Toh  (Malayan.  Prefix) 

Trong  (Viet-Namese.  Middle) 
Tuan  (Malayan.  Prefix) 

Tungku  (Malayan.  Pr^) 
Udayar  (Ceylon.  Sufiix) 

Ungku  (Malayan.  Prefix) 

Vaid  (Hindi/Punjabi.  Prefix) 
Vaidraj  (Hindi/Punjabi.  Pr^) 
Van  (Viet-Namese.  Middle) 
Vanniyar  (Ceylon.  Sufiix) 
Varakavi  (Tamil.  Prefix) 

Veda  Aratchi  (Ceylon.  Prefix) 
Veda  Mudaliyar  (Ceylon. 
Prefix) 

Veda  Muhandiram  (Ceylon. 
Prefix) 

Velvidance  (Ceylon.  Sufiix) 

Vi  (Viet-Namese.  Middle) 
Vidan  Aratchi  (Ceylon.  Suffix) 
Vidane  (Ceylon.  Suffix) 

Vidwan  (Tamil.  Prefix) 

Vidya  Visarada  (India/Ceylon. 
Prefix) 

Viet  (Viet-Namese.  Middle) 
Visarada  (India/Ceylon.  Prefix) 
Wan  (Malayan.  Prefix) 

Yang  Mutia  (Malayan.  Prefix) 


35  Irremovable  Auxiliary  Word 


35  Irremoyable  Auxiliary  Word. — An  article  or  a preposition, 
or  a combination  of  article  and  preposition,  or  any  other  auxiliary 
word  occurring  between  the  Given  Name  and  the  Family  Name. 
It  is  usually  retained  in  the  Heading  of  an  Entry. 

A list  of  the  articles  in  some  of  the  languages  is  given  in  Sec  £C1.  Fre<* 
positions  and  their  combinations  with  articles  can  be  easily  recognised. 


219 


HB3S  CXASSIFIBD  CATAUXiUE  CODE 

This  list  should  be  comideted  and  sunilar  lists  should  be  prepared  £or 
other  languages. 


36  Abbreviated  Word 

36  Abbreviated  Word. — ^A  proper  noun  in  a Name,  not  fully 
spelt  out  but  abbreviated  to  one  or  more  initial  letters,  either 
habitually  by  the  person  himself,  or  in  public  usage  or  reference, 
or  in  the  title-page,  or  anywhere  else  in  the  preliminary  pages,  or 
elsewhere  in  the  document. 


Examples: 

1 J Boswell 

for 

James  Boswell 

2 

A W Cardinall 

for 

Allen  Wolsey  Cardinall 

3 

G W C Kaye 

for 

George  William  Clarison  Kaye 

4 

BCPal 

for 

Bepin  Chandra  Pal 

5 

SNSen 

for 

Surendar  Nath  Sen 

6 

R P Sood 

for 

Ramraksh  Pal  Sood 

7 

A J Wells 

for 

Arthur  James  Wells 

220 


CHAPTER  HC 


TERMINOLOGY  : COMPOUND  NAME 
1 Compound  Family  Name 

I Compound  Family  Name,— Family  Name  made  up  of  two 
or  more  proper  nouns,  either 

1 Connected  by  a hyphen;  or 

2 Connected  by  a conjunction  or  any  other  kind  of  auxiliary 
word;  or 

3 Written  separately  without  any  connecting  symbol  or 
auxiliary  word. 

Examples: 

The  compound  Family  Name  is  in  Capitals  and  Small  Capitals, 

1 Arthur  Thomas  Quiller-Couch 

2 Hermann  Schulze-Deutzsch 

3 Theodore  Watts-Dunton 

4 Ricardo  Leon  y Roman 

5 Giorgio  Levi  della  Vida 

6 J J Marcuet  de  Vasselot 

7 Roger  Martin  du  Card 

8 Garo  Merhart  von  Bernegg 

9 Henri  Joachim  de  Bull  Nachenots 

10  Vicente  Antonio  de  Espirito  Santo 

I I Dipak  Das  Gupta 

12  Krishna  Row  Mukund  Dixit  Patw^ardhan 

13  Surendar  Nath  Basu  Ray  Chaudhuri 

14  Kumara  Munindra  Deb  Rai  Mahasai 

If  the  component  words  of  a Compound  Family  Name  are  connected 
by  a hyphen  or  an  auxiliary  word  as  in  the  first  eight  of  the  above  examples, 
the  Compound  Name  can  be  easily  recognised.  In  the  absence  of  such 
an  indicator,  it  is  not  possible  to  recognise  it.  To  help  a foreign  cataloguer, 
there  appears  to  be  no  aid  other  than  giving  a list  of  Compound  Surnames, 
unless  the  International  Standard  for  the  Entry  Statement  for  Author  on 
the  back  of  the  title-page  (See  Sec  FL78),  prescribing  the  printing  in  dominant 
type-face  the  whole  compoimd  Family  Name,  is  followed.  In  the  meantime 
some  aid  is  given  in  the  three  succeeding  rules  for  Bengali,  Gujarathi,  Kannada, 
Marathi,  and  Sinhalese  names. 


221 


HC2 


CLASHHEO  CATAUtOUB  COCKB 


2 [^nludese  Starter  Wnd  for  Three-Worded  FamBy 
Name 

2 If  the  last<but-two  proper  noun  in  a Sinhalese  name  is  any 
one  of  the  following,  that  word  and  the  next  two  words  taken 
together  form  a Three-Worded  Family  Name. 

Casio  D,  Da,  Do  Dias 

3 Bengali  and  Sinhalese  Starter  Word  for  Two-Worded 
FamUy  Name 


3 If  the  penultimate  proper  noun  in  a Bengali  or  a Sinhalese 
name  is  any  one  of  the  following,  that  word  and  the  next  word 
together  form  a Two-Worded  Family  Name. 


Abaya  (Sinhalese) 
Acharya  (Bengali) 

Ayan  (Bengali) 

Baidya  (Bengali) 

Bal  (Bengali) 
Bandyopadhyay  (Bengali) 
Barr  (Sinhalese) 

Barua  (Bengali) 

Basu  (Bengali) 

Bej  (Bengali) 

Bhanja  (Bengali) 

Biswa  (Bengali) 

Brito  (Sinhalese) 

C^asie  (Sinhalese) 
Chakravorty  (Bengali) 
Chakrabarti  (Bengali) 
Chel  (Bengali) 

Christie  (Sinhalese) 

Qipos  (Sinhalese) 

Crosett  (Sinhalese) 

Das  (Bengali) 

Datta  (Bengali) 

De  (Bengali,  Sinhalese) 
Deb  (Bengali) 

Dias  (Sinhalese) 

Don  (Sinhalese) 

Dutta  (Bengali) 

222 


Flamer  (Sinhalese) 
Gairik  (Bengali) 
Gandha  (Bengali) 
Ghose  (Bengali) 
Ghosh  (Bengali) 
Gogerly  (Sinhalese) 
Guha  (Bengali) 
Gupta  (Bengali) 
Herat  (Sinhalese) 
Home  (Bengali) 
Homer  (Sinhalese) 
Izadeen  (Sinhalese) 
Jayasinha  (Sinhalese) 
Jayaweera  (Sinhalese) 
Kanja  (Bengali) 
Kansa  (Bengali) 

Kar  (Bengali) 
Kohoban  (Sinhalese) 
Kuriwita  (Sinhalese) 
Lata  (Bengali) 

Lorenz  (Sinhalese) 
Macan  (Sinhalese) 
Mallik  (Bengali) 
Manicka  (Sinhalese) 
Marika  (Sinhalese) 
Mendis  (Sinhalese) 
Mitra  (Bengali) 


rmi^moLOGY:  compound  name  HC4 


NagCBengaU) 

Samuel  (Sinhalese) 

NamaCBen^) 

Sarkar  (Bengali) 

Nandi  (Bmgali) 

Satra  (Bengali) 

Omar  ^Sinhalese) 

Sen  (Etogali) 

FalCB^IO 

Senathi  (Sinhalese) 

Pandita  (Sinhalese) 

Sha  (Bengali) 

Patta  (Bengali) 

Sharma  (Bengali) 

Pinto  (Sinhalese) 

Shukla  (Itengali) 

Puiita  (Sinhalese) 

Shyam  (Bengali) 

Puran  (Bengali) 

Silva  (Sinhalese) 

Raj  (B^gali) 

Singha  (Bengali) 

Raj^  (Bengali) 

Sinha  (Bengali) 

Ray  (Bengali) 

Siv  (Bengali) 

Rudra  (Bengali) 

Sri  (Sinhalese) 

Sadhu  (Bengali) 

Suriya  (Sinhalese) 

Saha  (Bengali) 

Syam  (Bengali) 

Sama  (Bengali) 

Ihakur  (Bengali) 

Sacnaddar  (Bengali) 

Vijaya  (Sinhalese) 

Compound  Family  Name  without  Starter 
Woid 


4 The  following  Compound  Family  Names  occur  in  Gujarathi» 
Kannada,  Marathi,  and  Sinhalese  names,  in  addition  to  those 
indicated  in  Sec  HC2  and  HC3. 


Abhang  Ateetakar  (Marathi) 
Atmaram  Bhukhanvala  (Guja- 
rathi) 

Baheli  Hon\ji  (Gujarathi) 

Bal  Mahajan  (Marathi) 

Bapat  Dikshit  (Marathi) 

Barwe  Wad  (Marathi) 

Bhat  Peshawe  (Marathi) 

Bhrugu  Shastri  (Giuarathi) 
Biradar  Patil  (Kannada) 

Chapte  Sikhatma  (Marathi) 
Dehai  Kulkarni  (Kannada) 

Deo  Inamadar  (Kannada) 

Deo  Paranjpa  (Marathi) 
Deodhar  Dhamdhere  (Marathi) 
Desai  Kolhatkar  (Marathi) 
Deva  Aditya  (Sinhalese) 

Dikshi  Sana  (Marathi) 

Dixit  Patwardhan  (Marathi) 


Ehelepola  Seneviratne  (Sinha« 
lese) 

Flamer  Caldera  (Sinhalese) 

Gogerly  Moragoda  (Sinhalese) 
Gokhale  Raste  (Marathi) 

Gokhale  Tasgaokar  (Marathi) 

Gora  Gandhi  (Guyarathi) 

Hans  Boedkar  (Marathi) 

Jhaver  Laxmichandvala  (Gujarathi) 
Joshi  Ghorpade  (Marathi) 

Joshi  Palashetakar  (Marathi) 

Kadam  Sonsalkar  (Marathi) 

Kadim  Diwan  (Kannada) 

Kamat  Dalai  (Marathi) 

Kanawade  Patil  (Marathi) 

Kankani  Thanki  (Gujarathi) 

Kara  Kalyanavala  (Gujarathi) 

Kashi  Parekh  (Gujarathi) 

Kathiavad  Divapji  (Gujarathi) 


223 


HC4 


CLASSIHED  CATALOGUE  CODE 


Khot  Bhagwat  (Marathi) 
Khirasagar  Kulkami  (Marathi) 
Kunte  Mahajan  (Marathi) 
Lohar  Khamgaokar  (Marathi) 
Mahajan  Kunte  (Marathi) 

Maji  Patil  (Kannada) 
Mamle-Desai  (Kannada) 

Modak  Howaldar  (Marathi) 
Mondhe  Kulkarni  (Marathi) 
Mulki  Patil  (Kannada) 

Mutalik  Desai  (Kannada) 
Mutalik  Deshapande  (Kannada) 
Mutalik  Madagouda  (Kannada) 
Naik  Nimbalkar  (Marathi) 

Naik  Thigale  (Marathi) 

Orpe  Potdar  (Marathi) 

Pai  Raikar  (Kannada) 

Pathak  Vadiya  (Marathi) 

Patil  Kulkami  (Kannada) 


Pawar  Bane  (MaraUii)  ’ 

Pestan  Jampsa  (Gujarathi) 
Phadtari  Deshmuk  (Marathi) 
Phaphe  Manohar  (Marathi) 
Prabhu  Desai  (Kannada)  * 
Prabhune  Pisarwakar  (Marathi) 
Puranic  Dikshit  (Kannada) 

Raje  Shirke  (Marathi) 

Salunke  Rao  (Marathi) 

Saraf  Wakde  (Marathi) 

Savare  Bhagavat  (Marathi) 
Sawant  Tirawadekar  (Marathi) 
Shamal  Becharvala  (Gujarathi) 
Soman  Narawana  (Marathi) 
Thorat  Gadgil  (Marathi) 

Ulli  Pradhan  (Kannada) 
Vachchha  Gandhi  (Gujarathi) 
Vaidya  Shastri  (Gujarathi) 
Varmani  Thanki  (Gujarathi) 


5 Compound  Given  Name 

5 Compound  Given  Name. — Given  Name  made  up  of  two  or 
more  proper  nouns,  either 

1 Connected  by  a hyphen,  or 

2 Connected  by  a conjunction  or  any  other  auxiliary  word; 
or 

3 Written  separately  without  any  connecting  symbol  or 
auxiliary  word. 


If  the  component  words  of  a Compound  Given  Name  are  connected  by 
a hyphen  or  by  an  auxiliary  word,  the  compound  name  can  be  easily 
recognized. 

In  a Namc-of-Person  of  a cultural  group,  which  invariably  ends  or  begins 
with  a Family  Name,  it  is  not  of  very  great  importance  that  one  should 
recognize  a set  of  words  in  the  Given  Name  as  a Cdhipound.  Generally 
speaking,  this  is  true  of  a Western,  Japanese,  Assamese,  Bengali,  Gujarathi, 
Kashmiri,  Marathi,  or  Oriya  name,  each  of  which  ends  with  a Family  Name. 
This  is  also  true  of  a Chinese  or  Viet-Namesc  name,  each  of  which  begins 
with  a Family  Name. 

But  in  a Name-of-Person  without  a Family  Name,  the  Given  Name  will 
have  to  be  made  the  Entry  Element.  In  a Gujarathi  or  a Marathi  name 
of  a period  prior  to  early  nineteenth  century,  Family  Name  was  not  used 

224 


terminology:  compound  name 


HC5 


many  authors  and  the  Given  Name  began  with  a name  specifk?  to  the 
individual  and  ended  with  the  name  specific  to  his  father.  But  neither  of 
these  was  a compound  name.  In  any  other  cultural  group  where  the  Given 
Name  has  to  be  made  the  Entry  Element,  it  is  often  the  last  proper  noun 
in  the  hame — i e,  it  will  be  the  last  noun  barring  any  common  noun  which 
may  occur  at  the  end  as  an  Irremovable  Attachment  to  the  Given  Name. 
This  is  what  happens  invariably  in  Viet-Namese,  Kannada,  Malayalam, 
Tamil  and  Telugu  names.  In  these  cases,  if  the  words  with  a Compound 
Given  Name  are  written  separately  without  a hyphen  connecting  them, 
it  will  not  be  possible  for  the  cataloguer  to  decide  where  the  Entry  Element 
should  begin  and  which  of  the  Proper  Nouns  before  the  last  one  should  be 
taken  with  the  Secondary  Element. 

In  Viet-Namese,  there  is  a tendency  to  insert  the  hyphen.  But  in  Kannada, 
Malayalam,  Tamil,  and  Telugu  names,  there  is  the  opposite  tendency  of 
breaking  a single  fused  word  into  its  parts  in  violation  of  the  Rules  of  Gram- 
mar and  putting  them  down  as  if  they  were  separate  words. 

It  is  not  easy  even  for  a cataloguer  bom  within  the  cultural  group  to  meet 
this  situation  successfully.  It  is  particularly  so  in  the  case  of  a Tamil  name. 
Because  the  word  preceding  the  Given  Name  of  the  individual  is  usually 
the  Given  Name  of  the  father.  These  are  similar.  It  will  be  very  difficult 
to  decide  where  the  father’s  Given  Name  ends  and  where  the  son’s  Given 
Name  begins. 


15 


225 


CHAPTER  HD 


SPLIT  GIVEN  NAME 

1 South  India 

Here  are  some  examples  of  this  tendency  in  Kannada,  Malayalam,  Tamil, 
and  Telugu  Names. 

The  words  in  Capital  and  Small  Capitals  should  be  treated  as  a Single 
Word  denoting  the  Split  Given  Name  specific  to  the  individual.  The  words 
in  the  Split  Given  Name  taken  together  are  to  be  used  as  Entry  Element. 

1 Pannambal  Vishnu  Murthi 

2 Kasaxgode  Yogesha  Ananda  Row 

3 Candeth  Siva  Sankara  Menon 

4 Chcttur  Visva  Natha  Nair 

5 Rama  Nathan  Anantha  Raman 

6 Kalyana  Raman  Badari  Narayanan 

7 Ramu  Mudaliar  Bhima  Sankaran 

8 Kesava  Pillai  Desika  Vinayagam 

9 Umapathi  Ganafathi  Subramanian 

10  Partha  Sarathy  Gopala  Krishna 

1 1 Panchapakesan  Sankara  Narayanan 

12  Muthu  Krishna  Mudaliar  Sankara  Subramania  Mudaliar 

13  Sita  Raman  Satya  Narayanan 

14  Kesarimangalam  Manikam  Ayyar  Siva  Raman 

15  Sundara  Raman  Siva  Rama  Krishnan 

16  Siva  Raman  Siva  Sankara  Narayana 

17  Duggirala  Rama  Krishna  Row 

18  Durba  Subra  Manian 

It  is  difficult  to  make  an  exhaustive  list  of  such  split  words  constituting  a 
Given  Name.  For,  it  is  not  known  what  fused  word  will  be  split  by  a person 
in  his  own  Given  Name  or  that  of  his  father. 

The  first  two  are  Kannada  Names.  The  last  two  are  Telugu  Names. 
The  others  are  Tamil  Names. 

In  2,  3,  4,  and  5,  the  last  word  is  an  Irremovable  Attachment  to  the  Given 
Name.  * 

In  7,  8,  and  12,  the  second  word  is  an  Irremovable  Attachment  to  the 
Given  Name  of  the  Father. 

In  14,  the  third  word  is  an  Irremovable  Attachment  to  the  Given  Name 
of  the  Father. 


2 Split  Words  Alone 

In  Punjabi  and  Hindi  Names  without  a Family  Name,  there  is  often  no 

226 


SrUT  OtVBN  NAME 


HD4 

proper  noun  other  than  the  Given  Name  in  a Split  Form.  IfonecanreGogniee 
it  as  a Punjabi  or  Hindi  Name»  it  wiH  be  easy  to  escape  making  dib  second 
word  the  Entry  Element  and  the  First  Word  the  Secondary  Etoent.  But 
it  will  not  be  possible  for  a foreign  cataloguer  to  recognize  the  name  as  a 
Puidibi  or  a Hindi  one.  It  is  conjectured  that  the  total  number  of  words 
likely  to  occur  as  the  second  part  of  a split  Given  Name  in  Punjabi  or  Hindi 
name  will  not  exceed  a few  hundreds.  But  the  number  of  the  first  of  the 
split  words  will  be  far  more  numerous.  Therefore,  if  a fairly  exhaustive  list 
of  the  second  of  the  split  words  could  be  provided,  it  will  help  a foreign 
cataloguer  to  recognize  with  its  aid  a Punjabi  or  a Hindi  name  and  use  it 
merely  as  if  it  were  an  Irremovable  Attachment  to  the  preceding  word. 

3 Two-Worded  Given  Name  in  the 
Islamic  Names  In  India  and  Pakistan 

An  Islamic  Name  in  India  and  Pakistan  may  have  one  of  the  following 
words  as  Family  Name: 


Abidi 

Hasani 

Naqvi 

Rizvi 

Alavi 

Hashimi 

Qadiani 

Sabzwari 

Alvi 

Husani 

Qadri 

Siddiqi 

Bumie 

Husaini 

Qidwai 

Shirani 

Chishtie 

Hussaini 

Qizilbash 

Shirwani 

Chughtai 

Jafri 

Qadsi 

Tirmazi 

Durrani 

Kidwai 

Quraishi 

Usmani 

Farooqi 

Nadvi 

Qutbi 

Zaidi 

Faruqi 

Naqavi 

Rizavi 

Zubalri 

This  is  not  an  exhaustive  list. 

If  a Family  Name  occurs  at  all,  it  occurs  as  the  last  proper  noun.  But  it 
occurs  only  in  a comparatively  few  names.  In  most  cases,  there  is  only  a 
Two-Worded  Given  Name  excluding  any  Irremovable  Attachment,  if  any, 
at  the  beginning  or  at  the  end.  Of  the  two  words  in  the  Given  Name,  the 
second  is  usually  a word  denoting  God  or  the  Prophet,  or  meaning  “Religion”. 
The  first  word  is  a common  word — ^such  as  Asad  (=Lion),  Nur  (—Light), 
and  Rahimat  (—Grace).  The  result  is  a Two-Worded  Given  Name  such  as 
Asad  Ullab,  Nur  Elahi,  and  Rahimat  ul-Islam.  It  is  conjectured  that  the 
total  number  of  the  words  likely  to  occur  as  the  second  word  in  an  Islamic 
Given  Name  in  India  and  Pakistan  will  be  considerably  smaller  than  the 
number  of  the  words  likely  to  occur  as  the  first  word.  Therefore  if  a fairly 
exhaustive  list  of  t{ie  possible  second  words  could  be  given,  it  will  help  a 
foreign  cataloguer  to  recognize  with  its  aid  an  Islamic  Name  without  a family 
name  and  use  it  as  if  it  were  an  Irremovable  Attachment  to  the  preceding 
words. 


4 Gujarathi  and  Marathi  Given  Name  without  Family  Name 

In  a Gujarathi  or  Marathi  name  without  a Family  Name,  the  first  proper 
norm  is  the  Given  Name  specific  to  the  individual;  and  the  second  is  the 

227 


HD4 


CLASSIFIED  CATALOGUE  CODE 


Given  Nmne  specific  to  his  father.  The  Entry  Element  should  be  the  first  of 
the  two  Given  Names.  But  it  will  not  be  easy  for  a foreign  cataloguer  to 
recognize  the  name  as  a Gujarathi  or  a Marathi  Name.  Both  the  words  in 
the  name  are  alike  and  are  taken  from  the  same  group  of  words.  The^ore, 
the  kind  of  help  to  a foreign  cataloguer  suggested  in  Sec  HD2  and  HD3  for 
Hindi,  Punjabi,  and  Islamic  names  cannot  be  given.  The  only  way  will  be 
to  give  an  exhaustive  list  of  such  Two-Worded  Names  without  a Family 
Name,  likely  to  occur  in  Author  Headings  and  Subject  Headings.  But 
their  number  is  very  great.  Only  a sample  is  given  here.  The  Given  Name 
of  the  Individual  is  in  Capitals  and  Small  Capitals. 

Anant  Atmaram  Ambalal  Dinarakadas 

Atmaram  Kcsavji  Jivanlal  Ambalal 

Kesavji  Vishvanath  Ballubhai  Kahandas 

ViSHVANATH  Govindji  Cheganlal  Ballubhai 

Edaui  Jamshedji  Narayan  Hemachandra 

Jamshedji  Faramji  Sankaranand  Narayan 

5 List  of  Second  Words 

The  following  is  a combined  list  of  the  more  important  words  likely  to  occur 
as  the  second  word  in  a Two-Worded  Punjabi  or  Hindi  Given  Name  or  an 
Islamic  Given  Name  of  India  or  Pakistan. 


Abbas  (Islamic) 

Bhushan 

Dutt 

Afzal  (Islamic) 

Bandhu 

Farooq  (Islamic) 

Ahmed  (Islamic) 

Bansh 

Ganesh 

Alam  (Islamic) 

Bari  (Islamic) 

Gopal 

AH  (Islamic) 

Bashir  (Islamic) 

Govind 

Allah  (Islamic) 

Behari 

Haider  (Islamic) 

Anand 

Bhan 

Halecm  (Islamic) 

Aziz  (Islamic) 

Chand 

Hameed  (Islamic) 

Anant 

Chandra 

Hanif  (Islamic) 

Askari  (Islamic) 

Charan 

Haq  (Islamic) 

Asre 

Das 

Haque  (Islamic) 

Autar 

Dayal 

Hari 

Ayyub  (Islamic) 

Deo 

Hasan  (Islamic) 

Azhar  (Islamic) 

Dev 

Husvn  (Islamic) 

Babu 

Devi 

Idris  (Islamic) 

Badan 

Dhar 

Iqbal  (Islamic) 

Bahadur 

Dhawan 

Is-haq  (Islamic) 

Bai 

Din 

Islam  (Islamic) 

Bala 

Din  (Islamic) 

Ismail  (Islamic) 

Ballabh 

Dular 

Jabbar  (Islamic) 

Bhanu 

Dulare 

Jalil  (Islamic) 

Bhuj 

Dulari 

Jit 

228 


SPLIT  GIVEN  NAKE 


HD5 


Jiwan 
Katnini 
Kant  • 

Kan^ 

Kanti 

Karan 

Kaur 

Kaushal 

Kishan 

Kishore 

Kishori 

Krishna 

Kumar 

Kumari 

Lai 

Lakhan 
Lata 
Laxman 
Majid  (Islamic) 
Mai 

Malik  (Islamic) 

Mohan 

Mohini 

Mukhtar  (Islamic) 

Muni 

Murari 

Murti 

Mushtaq  (Islamic) 
Mustafa  (Islamic) 
Nabi  (Islamic) 
Nand 
Nandan 


Handdini 

Narain 

Naresh 

Nath 

Nazir  (Islamic) 

Nivas 

Pal 

Pati 

Phool 

Prabha 

Prakash 

Prasad 

Pratap 

Pyari 

Qadir  (Islamic) 

Qayyum  (Islamic) 

Rahq  (Islamic) 

Rahim  (Islamic) 

Rahman  (Islamic) 

Rai 

Raj 

Ram 

Raman 

Rani 

Ranjan 

Raoof  (Islamic) 
Rashid  (Islamic) 
Rasool  (Islamic) 
Ratan 

Raza  (Islamic) 
Rezzaq  (Islamic) 
Roshan 


Sagar 

Sahai 

Salam  (Islamic) 

Sanehi 

Saran 

Sarup 

Sen 

Sewak 

Shah  (Islamic) 

Shamim  (Islamic) 

Shanker 

Shekar 

Shiv 

Shyam 

Singh 

Suleman  (Islamic) 

Sunder 

Swarup 

Umar  (Islamic) 

Vallabh 

Vanti 

Vati 

Vilas 

Vinayak 

Vir 

Yagya 

Yahya 

Yunus  (Islamic) 
Yaqub  (Islamic) 
Yusuf  (Islamic) 
Zaki  (Islamic) 


229 


CHAPTER  HE 


FORMS  OF  NAME-OF-PERSON 

The  following  terms  correspond  to  the  different  stages  in  the  successive 
reduction  of  a Name-of-Person  to  the  form  in  which  it  is  finally  entered  in  the 
the  Heading  of  an  Entry. 

1 Usage  Name. — Name-of-Person  used  in  denoting  a person 
for  public  purposes. 

The  Usage  Name  will  contain  a Given  Name  in  one  or  more  words.  It 
may  also  contain  a Family  Name  in  one  or  more  words,  an  Irremovable 
Attachment  at  the  beginning  or  at  the  end,  a Removable  Attachment  at  the 
beginning,  the  middle,  or  the  end  and  an  Irremovable  Auxiliary  Word  between 
the  Given  Name  and  the  Family  Name. 

2 Title-Page  Name. — Name-of-Person  as  it  occurs  on  the 
Title-Page  of  the  document. 

The  Title-Page  name  also  may  present  the  various  kinds  of  Removable  or 
Irremovable  attachment,  and  Irremovable  Auxiliary  Word,  and  Family 
Name  along  with  the  Given  Name,  even  as  the  Usage  Name  may  do.  But 
it  has  usually  less  of  Removable  Attachment. 

3 Full  Name.— Usage  Name  or  Title-Page  Name  as  the  case 
may  be. 

Full  Name  is  the  starting  point  in  the  reduction  of  a Name-of-Person. 
In  an  Author-Entry,  Title-Page  name  will  be  the  starting  point,  for  arriving 
at  the  form  in  which  the  name  is  to  be  entered  in  the  Heading  of  an  Entry. 
In  a Subject  Entry  which  has  the  name  of  a Non-Author  as  the  Heading  the 
Usage  Name  will  be  the  starting  point.  „ 

4 Pure  Name. — Name  derived  from  Full  Name  by  removing 
all  the  Removable  Attachments,  if  any. 

A Removable  Attachment  will  be  a common  noun  or  an  honorific  word 
depending  on  the  cultural  group  to  which  the  Name-of-Person  belongs.  The 
table  given  in  Sec  HB341  will  be  of  help  in  deriving  the  Pure  Name  from  the 
Full  Name  in  the  case  of  Indian,  Ceylonese,  Indonesian  , Malayan,  and  Viet- 

230 


FORMS  OF  NAME-OF-PERSON  HE5I 

Namese  names.  Similar  tables  should  be  constructed  for  oth^  cultural 
groups.  Words  denoting  academic  qualifications,  office  held,  and  civil  or 
military  decorations  are  removable  attachments. 

% 

5 Reduced  Name* — Name  derived  from  Pure  Name  by 
temporarily  coupling  together  with  a hyphen  the  components  of  a 
Compound  or  multi-worded  Given  Name  or  Family  Name,  if 
any,  if  they  are  not  already  coupled  together  by  a hyphen  or  an 
auxiliary  word,  and  coupling  the  irremovable  attachment  at  the 
end  if  any,  with  the  preceding  word  or  compound  word  as  the  case 
may  be. 

Any  auxiliary  word  between  the  Family  Name  and  the  Given  Name  is  to 
be  temporarily  linked  by  hyphen  to  one  or  other  of  them  according  to  the 
practice  in  the  cultural  group. 

The  coupling  is  to  be  done  only  temporarily  to  facilitate  further  work. 
The  tables  given  in  Sec  HC2,  HC3  and  HC4  will  be  of  use  in  recognizing 
Compound  Family  Names.  With  regard  to  inseparable  Two-Worded  and 
artificially  Split  Given  Names,  the  list  given  in  Sec  HD4  and  HD5  will  be  of 
help. 


Auxiliary  Word 

The  following  table  gives  some  of  the  conventions  prevailing  in  regard  t& 
the  attachment  of  the  Auxiliary  Word  occurring  between  the  Family  Name 
and  Given  Name  in  Western  names.  In  column  3,  the  Family  Name  is 
printed  in  capitals  and  small  capitals.  The  auxiliary  word  to  be  attached  to 
the  Family  Name  is  in  small  caps;  while  the  auxiliary  word  to  be  attached  to 
the  Given  Name  is  in  Roman  smalls. 


Language 

Auxiliary  Word  to  be  Attached  to 

Example 

Danish 

1 Family  Name,  if  of  romance  origin 
and  the  auxiliary  consists  of  or  con- 
tains and  article 

2 Given  Name  if  the  auxiliary  is  av,  af 
or  von 

Jans  Lessen  la 
COUR 

Carl  von  Linne 

Dutch 

Given  Name 

Jan  ten  Brink 

English 

Family  Name 

John  DE  Morgan 

French 

1 Family  Name  if  the  auxiliary  consists 
of  or  contains  an  article 

2 Given  Name  if  the  auxiliary  is  a pre- 
position 

Jean  de  la  Fontaine 

Eugene  de  Faye 

231 


HE51 

CLASSniED  CATALOGUE  CODE 

Language 

Auxiliary  Word  to  be  Attached  to 

Example 

German 

Given  Name 

Peter  von  der<^UHLL 

Italian 

1 Family  Name  if  auxiliary  is  an  article 

2 Given  Name  if  auxiliary  is  or  contains 

Antonio  degli  Al- 

a  preposition 

berti 

Norwegian 

Same  as  in  Danish 

Swedish 

1 Family  Name,  if  of  romance  origin 

2 Same  as  in  Danish 

Magnus  Gabriel  de 
LA  Gardie 

6 I^itry  Element. — In  the  case  of  a Name-of-Person,  other 
than  Chinese,  the  Entry  Element,  is  to  consist  of  the  last  word  or 
the  last  coupled  word-group  in  the  Reduced  Name.  If  Chinese, 
the  entire  Pure  Name,  without  any  change  in  the  sequence  of  its 
words,  is  to  be  the  Entry  Element. 

7 Secmidary  Element. — In  the  case  of  a Name-of-Person, 
other  than  Chinese,  the  Secondary  Element  is  to  consist  of  all  the 
words  of  the  Reduced  Name,  not  included  in  the  Entry  Element. 

8 Entry  Name. — Entry  Element  followed  by  the  Secondary 
element,  if  any,  in  a Name-of-Person,  with  all  the  temporary 
hyphens  removed. 


232 


CHAPTER  HF 


ARABIC  NAME 

0 Word  Groups 

An  Arabic  name  may  consist  of  one  or  more  groups  of  words  representing 
respectively; 

1 Conventional  or  professional  title  or  laqab; 

2 The  personal  name  or  ism: 

21  The  name  of  the  father  or  the  brother  of  the  author  preceded  by  the 
word  “Ibn”  or  “Bin”  or  “B”  and  “Akhu”  respectively; 

22  A succession  of  the  names  of  grandfather,  great  grandfather,  etc, 
each  name  being  preceded  by  “Ibn”  or  its  variants; 

3 The  paternal  or  matronymical  name  or  kunyah^  usually  beginning 
with  the  word  “Abu”; 

4 The  conferred  title  or  laqab; 

5 The  nickname  or  urf; 

6 The  relative  name  or  nisbah  usually  eding  in  i or  y: 

1 The  literary  name  or  takhallus^  usually  of  one  or  two  syllables  only; 
and 

71  The  “familiar  name’  or  the  name  by  which  the  person  is  generally 
referred  to  by  the  public  and  in  books,  such  a name  being  usually  preceded 
by  the  words  ^'almaruf  ba'\  or  ^'asaheer^\  if  it  is  given  on  the  title  page. 

These  groups  of  words  generally,  but  not  in  all  cases,  come  in  the  sequence 
indicated  above;  but  it  is  not  to  be  understood  that  all  the  groups  will  neces- 
sarily occur  in  all  the  names. 

The  Kunyah  is  an  indirect  name.  Normally  it  consists  of  the  word  ‘Abu* 
meaning  ‘father  of*  followed  by  the  name  of  the  eldest  son  or  daughter;  but 
there  ate  many  exceptions.  Certain  Kunyahs  go  regularly  with  certain  names 
owing  to  the  first  owner  of  the  name  having  had  that  Kunyah,  Again,  Kunyahs 
are  given  to  infants  and  to  persons  without  children.  Hence,  wc  cannot 
infer  from  the  Kunyah  the  existence  of  a child  bearing  the  name  which  follows 
the  word  ‘Abu*.  In  some  cases,  the  Kunyah  does  not  at  all  express  paternity. 
It  may  express  some  other  characteristic.  While  the  normal  position  of  the 
Kunyah  is  after  the  name  of  the  father  and  the  names  of  other  ancestors, 
occasionally  it  is  also  placed  at  the  beginning  before  the  personal  name. 
In  such  cases  it  will  not  be  difficult  to  identify  the  Kunyah  part  of  the  name. 

The  conventional  title  occurring  at  the  beginning  may  be  invariably  re- 
moved from  the  Heading  in  an  Entry,  for  example  Hakim,  Qazi,  Moulvi, 
Aga,  Habib,  Khaga,  Mir,  Sirdar  and  Syed.  But  care  must  be  taken  to  see 
that  it  does  not  constitute  the  Given  Name.  This  will  not  be  easy  for  a foreign 
cataloguer. 


233 


HF2 


CLASSIFIED  CATALOGUE  CODE 


2 Entry  Element:  Ism 

The  Given  Name  or  Ism  will  usually  consist  of  one  or  two  words  and  in 
rare  cases  of  more  than  two  words.  A rough  test  to  spot  out  the«»Given 
Name  is  this.  If  the  word  Tbn’  or  its  equivalent  or  ‘Akhu’  occurs  in  the 
Pure  Name,  it  may  be  taken  that  the  word  immediately  before  the  first  Tbn’ 
is  the  Given  Name  and  the  word  after  the  first  Tbn’  or  ‘Akhu’  is  the  father’s 
name  or  the  brother’s  name  respectively.  In  such  a case,  the  group  of  words 
consisting  of 

1 Given  Name;  and 

2 The  word  Tbn’  or  its  equivalent  and  the  father’s  name ; or 

3 The  word  ‘Akhu’  and  the  brother’s  name; 
form  the  Entry  Element. 

The  groups  2 and  3 form  an  Irremovable  Attachment  to  the  Given  Name. 
If  there  is  no  ‘Ibn’  or  ‘Akhu’  in  the  name,  the  first  word  (or  two)  in  the  Pure 
Name  is  (are)  likely  to  constitute  the  Given  Name;  and  it  forms  the  Entry 
Element. 


21  Kunyah  as  Entry  Element 

In  certain  cases,  the  Kunyah  may  be  the  only  name  known,  the  ‘Ism’  or 
the  Given  Name  having  never  been  conferred  or  having  been  forgotten. 
In  such  a case,  the  Kunyah  is  to  be  the  Entry  Element. 

3 Secondary  Element:  Kunyah 

In  the  heading  in  a catalogue,  the  Kunyah,  if  it  occurs  as  part  of  the  name, 
is  to  be  included  in  the  Secondary  Element. 

4  Conferred  Title:  Laqab 

The  Laqab  may  be  defined  negatively  as  a name  other  than  that  which  the 
holder  received  at  birth  and  yet  not  substituted  for  it. 

The  conferred  title  or  Laqab  is  to  be  omitted. 

5  Nick>Name:  Uif 

The  nickname  or  Vrf  is  to  be  used,  if  at  all,  as  an  Alternative  Name  or  as  a 
Pseudonym. 


6  Individualising  Element:  Nlsboh 

The  Nisbah  is  an  adjective  which  locates  the  person  to  whom  it  is  given, 
as  a member  of  a tribe,  as  a resident  of  some  place,  as  one  following  some 
trade  or  in  any  other  way.  It  can  be  identified  by  the  fact  that  it  usually 
ends  in  T*’  or  ‘y’.  It  is  not  unusual  to  find  two  or  more  Nisbahs  as  part  of  the 
same  name.  The  Nisbah  is  to  be  treated  as  an  Individualising  Element* 

234 


ARABIC  NAME 
7 Pseudonym:  TakhaHos 


HF91 


The  Takh^llus  is  the  literary  name  which  most  men  of  letters  assume.  It 
is  a ps^donym.  An  author  usually  puts  this  pseudonym  at  the  end  of  his 
real  name.  But  others  refer  to  him  only  by  his  pseudonym.  The  Takhallus 
can  be  easily  identified  by  the  fact  that  it  comes  at  the  end  of  the  real  name 
and  by  remembering  that  it  is  usually  of  one  or  two  syllables  only.  It  has 
to  be  dealt  with  in  accordance  with  Rule  MD42,  if  it  occum  along  with  the 
real  name,  or  in  accordance  with  Rule  MD41  and  its  subdivisions  if  it  occurs 
alone  on  the  title-page. 

71  Pseudonym:  Familiar  Name 

The  Tamiliar  Name’,  or  the  name  by  which  the  person  is  generally  referred 
to  by  the  public  and  in  books,  is  a source  of  some  difficulty.  In  the  books 
written  by  the  author  himself  and  in  such  of  their  editions  as  he  himself  is 
responsible  for,  his  ‘Familiar  Name*  will  not  ordinarily  be  found  on  the 
title-page.  But  in  later  editions  brou^t  out  by  others,  it  may  happen  that 
the  title-page  contains  the  ‘Familiar  name’  alone.  This  too  is  a pseudonym. 


8 Definite  Article 

The  definite  article  M/’  and  its  variants  may  occur  before  one  or  more  words 
in  a name.  Wherever  it  occurs,  it  is  to  be  written,  but  ignored  in  alphabetisa- 
tion.  If  it  occurs  in  the  Nisbah  it  is  to  be  underlined.  Can  we  not  omit  it 
altogether  ? 


91  Appeal 

It  is  no  easy  matter  for  cataloguers  without  a special  knowledge  of  Arabic 
culture  to  deal  with  names  of  such  complexity.  Linderfelt’s  Eclectic  card 
catalogue  rules  is  said  to  contain  definite  instructions  on  the  subject.  But 
1 have  not  had  access  to  a copy  of  that  book.  Generally  the  volumes  of  the 
British  Museum  catalogue  dealing  with  books  in  Muslim  languages  and  the 
entries  in  the  Encyclopaedia  of  Islam  will  be  of  help  in  deciding  the  signi- 
ficance and  the  sequence  of  the  words  in  Arabic  Names.  It  must  be  stated 
that  there  is  still  room  for  systematisation.  There  is  scope  for  research  in 
Arabic  Names.  In  addition  to  the  intrinsic  complexity  of  such  names,  there 
seem  to  be  also  some  special  features  characterising  Muslim  names  of  different 
nationalities  such  as  Spanish,  Moorish,  Turkish,  Egyptian,  Arabic,  Persian, 
Afghan,  and  Indian.  The  whole  problem  is  bristling  with  difficulties  and 
uncertainties.  The  present  practice  in  libraries  can  at  best  be  described  as 
‘drifting’.  The  Aligarh  University  will  be  doing  a great  service,  if  it  would 
set  some  young  men  on  the  investigation  and  systematisation  of  this  problem 
and  publish  an  authoritative  direction  for  the  rendering  of  Muslim  names. 

235 


CHAPTER  HG 


ILLUSION  AND  SOLUTION 

* 1 Illusory  Solution 

Though  the  terminology  and  prescription  in  Chap  HE  and  HF  in  regard  to 
Name-of-Person,  taken  along  with  the  auxiliary  tables  given  in  Chap  HE, 
HC,  and  HD  appear  to  be  over-elaborate,  in  fact,  they  are  over-simplified. 
It  is  doubtful  whether  a cataloguer,  who  is  not  intimately  familiar  with  the 
social  practices  connected  with  the  formation  of  a Name-of-Person  in  a 
cultural  group,  can  successfully  and  consistently  pick  out  the  Entiy  Element 
and  the  Secondary  Element  respectively.  The  individual  variations — one 
may  almost  say  idiosyncrasies— in  making  up  one’s  own  name  may  baffle 
even  a cataloguer  bom  in  the  same  cultural  group,  A word  may  be  split 
into  two  unmeaning  parts.  A common  noun  which  is  only  an  attachment 
may  be  used  as  if  it  were  a proper  noun  denoting  either  a given  Name  or  a 
Family  Name.  The  greater  the  deviation  of  the  cultural  group  of  the  cata- 
loguer from  that  of  a Name-of-Person,  the  greater  will  be  the  uncertainty. 

2 Cultural  Groups  in  Exhaustion 

Till  now,  cataloguing  involved  only  the  names  of  a few  cultural  groups 
in  most  of  the  libraries.  This  was  the  result  of  nearly  two-thirds  of  the 
people  of  the  world  being  in  a state  of  cultural  exhaustion,  producing  few 
books,  and  consuming  even  fewer  books  by  authors  belonging  to  other 
cultural  groups.  Therefore  the  problem  of  rendering  a Name-of-Person 
has  been  dealt  with  in  a more  or  less  light-hearted  way,  and  there  has  been 
only  a small  percentage  of  deviations  from  the  correct  rendering.  But 
today  practically  all  the  cultural  communities  of  the  world  are  entering  into 
the  ascending  phase  of  their  current  cultural  cycles. 

3 Creative  Activity  Everywhere 

Creative  activity  has  begun  everywhere  in  the  world.  New  thought  is 
being  created  by  the  reviving  cultural  groups.  They  cannot  be  ignored 
by  any  other  cultural  group.  The  reviving  cultural  groups  are  also  keen  to 
have  access  to  documents  published  in  every  part  of  the  world.  Modern 
transport  conditions  permit  a free  circulation  of  documents  throughout  the 
world,  whatever  be  the  cultural  group  of  their  origin.  The  consciousness 
of  one  world,  being  helped  by  international  bodies  such  as  the  United  Nations 
and  its  Specialised  Agencies,  is  intensifying  this  desire  on  the  part  of  every 
cultural  group  of  the  world  to  use  documents  produced  in  every  other  cultural 
group. 

236 


ILLUSION  AND  SOLUTION 
4 CoBfermtioii  of  Research  Potential 


HG5 


Moreover,  the  unbalancing  between  population  pressure  and  the  availa- 
bility of  natural  and  near-natural  commodities  makes  it  imperative  that  the 
r^carcl^potential  of  the  world  should  be  conserved,  without  any  wastage 
due  to  any  unwanted  repetition  of  one  and  the  same  piece  of  investigation* 
This  requires  that  any  document  on  nascent  thought  produced  in  any  cultural 
group  whatever  should  be  served  unerringly  to  the  workers  in  every  other 
cultural  group.  In  this  process,  the  rendering  of  Name-of-Person  will  play 
a very  important  part.  The  impracticability  of  any  one  cutlural  group  to 
render  the  Names-of-Persons  of  all  other  cultural  groups  will  lead  to  ineffi- 
ciency of  service.  Ultimately  such  an  inefficiency  of  service  will  be  traceable 
to  the  insolubility  of  the  problem  of  Name-of-Person  by  cataloguing  rules, 
however  involved  and  however  clever.  Solution  of  the  problem  of  rendering 
Names-of-Persons  on  a world-scale  through  a number  of  cataloguing  rules  is 
only  an  illusion. 


5 The  Right  Solution 

The  one  person  who  knows  the  Entry  Element  and  the  Secondary  Element 
in  a Name-of-Person  is  the  person  himself.  International  economy  and 
efficiency  in  cataloguing  requires  that  the  author  should  indicate  in  his  docu- 
ments the  Entry  Element  and  the  Secondary  Element  in  his  name,  along  the 
lines  laid  down  in  the  Indian  Standard  IS  : 792-1962  Specification  for  title 
page  and  hack  of  title  page  of  a book.  This  is  to  be  printed  at  the  back  of  the 
title-page  of  a book  or  in  a suitable  place  in  any  other  kind  of  document. 
If  this  is  done,  the  rule  on  the  rendering  of  a Name-of-Person  need  not  be 
anything  more  than  Sec  JAl.  With  this  single  rule  it  will  be  more  easy  to 
secure  accuracy  and  consistency  in  rendering  a Name-of-Person  than  with  the 
plethora  of  rules  crowding  cataloguing  codes  at  present.  This  appears  to  be 
the  only  right  solution. 


237 


PART  J 

RENDERING  OF  NAMES